FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

1 by Lawrence Rebello
ROADMAP
Week 1 :
Introduction To SAP, view and understand the overview file.
Enterprise Structure Define Company, Company code & Assign the same.
Maintain Fiscal Year Variant, Posting Period Variant, Document Number Ranges, Document
Type, Posting Keys, Field Status Variants & Groups & Assignment of the same wherever
necessary.
Simple Chart of Accounts Create a simple Chart of Accounts, Assign the same, Edit GL A/c’s, Enter Transactions, Post with
reference, Account Assignment Model, Recurring Document and Batch Processing, Document
Parking and Document Extract.
Period End Closing Understand the Closing concept, Close the company created, view the Balance Sheet, Accounts,
carry forward balances to the next year, and view the Retained Earnings Account.
Week 2 :
International COA Create a company encompassing all features of the SAP standard company 0001, create a COA
in line with the INT COA, Assign as necessary, Edit Gl A/c Collectively, Enter Transactions, Post
with reference, Account Assignment Model, Recurring Document and Batch Processing,
Document Parking and Document Extract.
Cash Journal Create GL A/c for Cash Journal, Document Types, Number Range Interval, Setup Cash Journal,
Business Transactions, and Posting.
Taxation Understand the concept of a non-jurisdictional Tax Proceedure, Condition Type, Access
Sequence, Account Key, Tax Codes, Input / Output Tax, Calculation and Posting. Jurisdictional
Tax Proceedure will be configured independently by the student at this stage.
Week 3 :
Accounts Receivable Create Customer Master Records, raise invoices, receive incoming payment, assign and clear
open items, Down payment request, creation and clearing, Maintain Terms of Payment.
Instalment Payment terms to be configured independently by the student.
Dunning Define Dunning Area, Dunning Keys, Dunning Proceedure, Dunning Notices.
Interest Define Interest Calculation Types, Number Ranges, Arrears Interest Calculation, Interest Run
and Posting. Balance interest to be configured independently.
Week 4 :
Accounts Payable Create Vendor Master Records, Input Tax, raise bills, create outgoing payments.
Std Witholding Tax Understand the concept of WT, Basic Settings, Calculation and Postings.
Extended WT will be configured independently by the student.
House Banks Define House Banks, Outgoing Payment Configuration, Number Ranges for Cheques, and Bank
Reconciliation. Automatic Payment Run to be configured independently.
Foreign Currency Translation Understand the concept of foreign currency translations, enter exchange rates, valuate open
items at closing with reversals.
Week 5 :
SD/MM definition,
assignment, and integration
Define Credit Control Area, Valuation Level, Plant, Location, Division, Sales Organisation,
Distribution Channel, Storage Location, Shipping Point and Assignment of the same. Define
Common Distribution Channel and Division. Check Enterprise Structure for Sales and
Distribution. Understand integration concepts, and assign GL A/c’s.
Create Material [FERT] Create material, initial stock entry, check stock of material.
Pricing Proceedure Understand the concept of pricing procedure, condition type, access sequence, account key,
proceedure determination, and maintenance of condition records.
Sales Order & Billing Create Sales Order, Outbound Delivery, Billing Document, Accounting Entries.
Week 6 :
Asset Accounting Understand Organisation Structure, Chart of Depreciation, Depreciation Areas, Asset Classes.
Integration Define and Assign GL A/c’s, Posting Keys, Field Status Variants, Tax Indicators.
Asset Data Create Asset, acquire with / without vendor [ opening balances ].
Depreciation Understand Depreciation Keys.
Transactions Understand Acquisitions, Retirements, Depreciation Run and Posting.
Legacy Data Upload Understand Legacy Data Upload using Microsoft Excel.
Week 7 :
Controlling Maintain Controlling Area, Assign the same and maintain number ranges
Cost Element Accounting Create Default Cost Center, Primary Cost Element, Secondary Cost Element
Cost Center Accounting Activate Cost Center Accounting in Controlling Area, Maintain Standard Hierarchy, Create Cost
Center Groups and Cost Centers, Select Planner Profile, Cost and Activity Input, Enter Plan and
Actual amounts, Generate Variances, Redistribution and Assessment of Primary and Secondary
Cost Elements across Cost Centers.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
2 by Lawrence Rebello
FI - Notes :
SM01 : LIST OF ALL TRANSACTION CODES
SM04 : TO DISPLAY OTHER USERS
SM12 : TO CLEAR LOCKS
SM35 : TO PROCESS SESSIONS
SE09 : TO RELEASE TRANSPORT REQUESTS [sap/tools/abap
………….workbench/overview/transpost organizer]
SE11 : FOR DATABASE TABLES
SE17 : TO ANALYSE TABLE ERRORS
SE38 : ABAP EDITOR & ALL OPTIONS TO GENERATE , EXECUTE ETC.
SHDB : Batch Data Communication
SBWP : Business Workplace [ for SAP Mail etc ]
SEARCH_SAP_MENU : TO SEARCH FOR MENU PATH THRU TRAN CODES
Some Commonly Used Terms :
IDES International Demonstration Evaluation Server
ASAP Accelerated SAP [ systems, applications and products ]
CIN Version Country India Version
LSMW Legacy System Migration Workbench
CATT Computer Aided Testing Tool
BDC Batch Data Communication
CRM Customer Relationship Management
SEM Strategic Enterprise Management
BIW Business Information Warehouse
KM Knowledge Management
BOR Business Object Repository
SQL Structured Query Language
GUI Graphical User Interface
RFID Radio Frequency Identification
APO Advanced Planning Optimiser
EAI Enterprise Application Integration
IDOC Intermediary Document
EDI Electronic Data Interchange
ALE Application Link Enabling - used to distribute data [master &
tran] across different systems
BAPI Business Application Programming Interface
ABAP Advance Business Application Programing Language
LES Logistics Execution System
BPML Business Process Master List
OLAP Online Analytical Processing
ATP Available to Promise
B2B Business to Business
OSS Online Support System
BADI Business Add In
CMOD Customer Modification
ERP Enterprise Resource Planning
EWS Enterprise Wide System
BPR Business Process Re Engineering
SME Small & Medium Enterprises
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
3 by Lawrence Rebello
ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE : IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Financial Accounting
• In “Definition” stage, we define
o Company
o Credit control Area
o Company codes
o Business Area
o Functional Area, and
o other organizational units.
• DEFINE COMPANY : Define company, enter address etc.
Use “New Entries” to define a new Company. It is to put in existence a Company with all its addresses and
other details. A Company serves as a Global group under which various Subsidiaries, Branches & Offices can
be configured. A lot of data or SAP implementation variables can be defined at the Company level and shall be
applicable to all the Subsidiaries, Branches & Offices under this group, eg. Chart of Accounts.
 Note: While saving, a ‘Customizing Request’ Organizer prompts up – This stores changes
made by every individual configuration w.r.t tables changed, date of change made, etc. It can be used as
a tool to troubleshoot the changes & also to put accountability on configuration makers. Changes made
can be viewed via Header > Utilities > Change Request Organizer (available only inside an IMG screen)
 Note: Any In-house Document (created by any user on the same client) can be recalled
entering ‘*’ in the Reference Field and opting for ‘Tree On’.
 Note: If in run-time, while still in some activity, server goes down connection is lost, such
activity will be locked for editing. To unlock, use SM12 transaction.
• DEFINE / DELETE / CHECK COMPANY CODE :
• Edit company code data [ OX02 ] : Create your co code. DO NOT COPY AT
THIS STAGE.
• IMG/ES/ASSIG/FA : ASSIGN COMPANY CODE TO COMPANY : Assign the company
created under 1 to the company code created under 2.
IMG > Enterprise Structure > Assignment > Financial Accounting
Assign Company Code to Company
All the company codes which were under one group are assigned to the Group. The purpose is to assign
common variables defined at the Company level to the company codes also and for consolidated reporting
purposes.
TO CHECK GLOBAL SETTINGS - [ OBY6 ]
• IMG/FA/GLOBAL SETTINGS/FISCAL YEAR - [ OB29 ]
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Fiscal Year
Fiscal year variant is maintained at the company code level. SAP has provided various fiscal year variants,
hence only assignment is needed. eg:
K4 Type : JAN –DEC 1 - 12
V3 Type : APR-MAR 1 - 12
All fiscal types come with 12 posting periods (months) and 4 special periods (months) i.e, after regular entries
in 12 normal posting periods, adjustment entries can be passed in following 4 special periods, which though
falling in next fiscal period will be reflected in the accounts of preceding fiscal only.
 Note: In case of fiscal types which are different from calendar year, SAP adjusts the months that fall in
next calendar by “an year shift variable of -1”.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
4 by Lawrence Rebello
• Maintain Fiscal Year Variant : fiscal year can be
1. Year dependent
2. Year independent
3. Calender
4. Shortened
• Period : Fiscal year is made up of periods 1 – 12. There can be a maximum of
12 normal posting periods and 4 special 13-16 posting periods. Thus for a
General Ledger there can be a maximum of 16 posting periods, and for a Special
Ledger ( where cross flow exists like PCA, PCC etc ) there can be a maximum of
65 posting periods. Once the FYV is defined, periods can be accessed and
defined. Every business transaction is allocated to a posting period. Weekly will
have 52 posting periods.
• Day : Last valid calender date to be specified for each period. FYV 24 PP
Month Day Period Year Shift
1. 1 15 1 +1 for next yr
2. 1 31 2 -1 for last yr
3. 2 14 3 0 for cur yr
4. 2 28 4 periods cannot be maintained for
calender dependent FYV. FYV does not contain info whether a period
is open or closed. This is accessed thru open / close posting periods.
• Year dependent fiscal year means the start and end date of the PP of some FY
will be different from the dates of other FY, and / or if some FY use a different no
of PP. If one year of a FYV has less posting periods than others, it is called a
shortened FY. This could be required if closing has to be made before the end of
the normal FY. The shortened FY and its no of PP has to be specified before the
definition of period dates and for this year only, a lesser no of PP can be
assigned. FY can be defined separately in different modules, which will take
precedence over global settings for that module. Year Independent FY
• Month Day Period Year Shift
1. Jan 31 10 -1
2. Feb 28 11 -1
3. Mar 31 12 -1
4. Apr 30 1 0
5. May 31 2 0
6. Jun 30 3 0
7. Jul 31 4 0
8. Aug 31 5 0
9. Sep 30 6 0
10. Oct 31 7 0
11. Nov 30 8 0
12. Dec 31 9 0
• Assign company code to Fiscal Year Variant. [ OB37 ]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
5 by Lawrence Rebello
IMG/FA/GLOBAL SETTINGS/DOCUMENT
• Posting Periods : The variant principle is widely used in the R/3 system to
assign special properties to one or more R/3 objects. The advantage of using
variants is that it is easier to maintain properties which are common among
several business objects ( FSV, FYV, PPV )
1. Steps : Define the variant - K4
2. Populate the variant - calender year
3. Assign the variant to the appropriate company code.
• Define Variants for Open Posting Periods : define as necessary. [OBBO]
• Open & Close Posting Periods : In case of a FY which spills over 2 years,
define 2002-03 as 2002,2003 with periods 1-12, & 13-16. OB52
• Assign Posting Period Variants to Company Code : assign. [ OBBP ]
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Posting Period
Define Variants for open Posting Period
Here a name is given to the posting period variant. SAP standard is 0001.
Open & Close Posting Periods
This function is used to allow posting any particular account within a any desired period only. The variant type
defined above is populated with characteristics i.e, in the combination of Variant type, Account type, Account Nos
and Posting Period.
Account types maintained by SAP are
‘+’ Valid for all account types Populating ‘+’ type is necessary even if all account types have
been defined separately
‘A’ Assets
‘D’ Customers
‘K’ Vendors
‘M’ Materials
‘S’ G L Accounts
‘V’ Contract Accounts
Activity:
Variant type frm a/c to a/c frm pd1 year to prd year frm pd2 year to prd year
0001 + 1 2004 12 2005 13 2005 16 2005
0001 A ZZZZZ 1 2004 12 2005 13 2005 16 2005
0001 D ZZZZZ 1 2004 12 2005 13 2005 16 2005
0001 K ZZZZZ 1 2004 12 2005 13 2005 16 2005
0001 M ZZZZZ 1 2004 12 2005 13 2005 16 2005
0001 S ZZZZZ 1 2004 12 2005 13 2005 16 2005
Assign Variants to Company Code
Variant properties are assigned to a Company code.
Imp: ‘+’ type can be defined without ‘frm a/c’
& ‘to a/c’ limit, but for others i.e, A, D, K, M &
S, a/c limits are required. However if posting
periods are across accounts, “zzzzzzzzz”
must be entered in ‘to a/c’ field.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
6 by Lawrence Rebello
• Document Number Ranges : Copy from. Once copied, internal no range is
given. External No range if checked, is to be given by the user. [OBA7]
• Define Document Number Ranges : not necessary if copied earlier.
• Copy to Company Code : not necessary if copied earlier.
• Copy to Fiscal Year : not necessary if copied earlier.
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Document No Range
Define Document Number Ranges
Here Document No Ranges can be copied from any other existing Company code, Intervals / Ranges be changed,
Status (i.e, whether any external no. is to be used or what should be the status of current document no.) can also
altered. When ‘External’ is selected, SAP does not use internal Number range but allows user to enter Document
number manually.
SAP has defined 54 Document No Ranges ( 00 – 51 & X1 – used for Recurring Documents, X2 – used for Sample
Document). One can select a document number range out of these ranges or range can also be altered according
to ones own specification.
Activity :
Copy from 0001 (SAP standard company) (IN01 does not have any doc no range)
to ABCD
Copy to Company Code
Document number ranges are Company code specific. Hence Document number range(s) used by any Company
code can be copied to any other Company code.
 Note: Copy function can be possible only if there is no other number range existing in the
target fiscal year or the target company code.
Copy to Fiscal Year
If Document Number ranges have been defined as year-dependent, here range of one year can be copied to
anther year within the same company code.
 Note: If document no range has been defined for any specific year only (first activity as
above), the same can be copied to another year in the same co code. By putting 9999 in ‘To
Year’ field, document no ranges are defined for all years in that co code.
 Note: Copy function can be possible only if there is no other number range existing in the
target fiscal year or the target company code.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
7 by Lawrence Rebello
IMG/FA/GLOBAL SETTINGS/DOCUMENT HEADER
• Define Document Type : [ OBA7 ] Predefined document types are already in
place. SA – G/L a/c type. A/c type allowed :
1. Assets
2. Customers
3. Vendors
4. Material
5. G/L Account.
• Control Data :
1. Net Doc Tyoe – whether NETT
2. Customer vendor check
3. Negative postings allowed.
4. Inter Company Posting.
• Required during Document Entry :
1. Reference No.
2. Document Header Text.
• Special Usage :
1. Batch Input only.
2. Rollup – minimum details saved.
3. Planning
4. Account Allocation
• Default Value : Exchange rate type for foreign currency document …….. [ M
avg translation rate ]
• Assignment of Document Class to Document Type : Document class for Cr
Memo would be C.
1. A - Invoice
2. B - Payment
3. C - Credit Memo
4. D - Debit Memo
5. E - Customs Document
6. F - RG ----
7. G - RG ----
• Maximum Exchange Rate Difference : in %age terms for each co code.
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Document Header > Document Types
• Document types are defined for customer, vendor and general ledger business transactions in
Financial Accounting. Document types differentiate business transactions and control document filing.
• A number range is specified for each document type. Document numbers are chosen from this
number range. One number range can be used for several document types.
• Document types are valid for all clients. A number range key is specified for each document type.
Moreover the desired number range intervals for each number range key based on the company
code. This means that one can specify intervals of different sizes for the same number range.
• The preset document types cover business transactions in Financial Accounting for:
? General ledger accounting SA
? Accounts receivable Cust Invoice – DR, Cust Pymt – DZ
Int – DA
? Accounts payable Vendor Inv – KR, Vendor Pymt – KZ
Int – DA
? Asset accounting AA
? Consolidation
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
8 by Lawrence Rebello
IMG/FA/GLOBAL SETTINGS/LINE ITEM/CONTROLS
• Posting Key [ OB41 ] : 40/50 Dr / Cr GL A/c [ global ]
• Field Status Variant [ OBC4 ] : [ local ] - normally copy as. You group several
field status groups into one field status variant. Assign a company code to a FSV.
This allows you to work with the same FSG in any no of co codes. A FSG
determines the screen layout for doc entry. Fields can have the following
statuses. Optional / Required / Suppresed entry. Enter the FSG in the master
record of the GL a/c. When a doc is entered, the definitions stored for the group
are effective. The FSG determines which fields are ready for input, required and
hidden. Bear in mind that additional assignments [ i.e. cost centers or orders ] are
only possible if data can be entered in the corresponding fields.
• Assign FSV to Company Code : assign. [ OBC5 ]
• Screen Variants for Doc Entry :
1. Standard - to be used.
2. Austria & Switzerland
3. France & Witholding Tax – for TDS.
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Line Items > Controls
Define Posting Keys
There are standard SAP defined posting keys which one has to use. For eg.
40 Dr G/L Account
50 Cr G/L Account
Maintain Field Status Variant
Field Status Variants determine which fields are ‘required’, ‘optional’ or ‘suppressed’ out of available fields w.r.t various
information General, Accounting, Material, Sales, etc in any particular data entry screen.
SAP has defined a variant type 0001 which contains more than 50 variant groups (all groups pertain to different
information types say, general, material management, Cost account, Asset account, etc.
These groups are associated with respective G/L Accounts so that any data entry relating to that G/L Account will have
fields based on properties of the FSV associated with such G/L Account.
Data fields that can be controlled by FSVs here are:
General Data
Additional account assignments
Payment transactions
Asset accounting
Taxes
Foreign Payments
Consolidation
Real Estate Management
Financial Assets management
Assign Company Code to Field Status Variant
Here a Company is given the properties of FSV as defined above.
One can customize the status of these groups as
required.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
9 by Lawrence Rebello
• Define Tolerance Groups for Employees : Not defining tolerance groups will
restrict data entry. [ OBA0 / OBA4 ]
1. Valuewise [upto 1,000,000 etc ]
2. Cash Discounts
3. Payment Difference [not recd full amount]
• Assign User / Tolerance Groups : assign. [ Smith = generic ]
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Line Items > Define Tolerance Group for
Employees
In this activity, amount limits are pre-defined for employees w.r.t the following:
? the maximum document amount the employee is authorized to post
? the maximum amount the employee can enter as a line item in a customer or
vendor account
? the maximum cash discount percentage the employee can grant in a line item
? the maximum acceptable tolerance for payment differences for the employee.
Apart from the above, ‘maximum’ payment difference can also be defined whereby differences are automatically
posted to cash discount, revenue or expense account as required. Any difference is first adjusted to cash discount
(to the extent allowed here and permitted by max cash discount % defined above) and if this limit is exhausted,
balance is adjusted to the revenue or expense account (which can be a combination of absolute amount & a %)
 Note: Allowed Payment differences are posted automatically within certain tolerance groups.
This way the system can post the difference by correcting the cash discount or by posting to a
separate expense or revenue account.
 Note: There must be at least one Tolerance Group for each Company. Leaving ‘Group’ field
‘blank’ means the limits are applicable to all the employees. If any employee(s) is to be
allowed some other limits, another Tolerance Group has to be created and populated with the
employee identification (via next IMG step : “Assign users to Tolerance Groups”). Rest of the
employees will be governed by ‘blank’ Tolerance Group.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
10 by Lawrence Rebello
SIMPLE CHART OF ACCOUNTS
• IMG / FA / GL / Master Records :
• Preparation : Edit COA List : Desc, Lang, Length [10], Manual Creation of Cost
Element.
IMG > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting > G/L Accounts > Master Records > Preparations
Edit Chart of Accounts
• A Chart of Accounts is created with various parameters like Maintenance Language (EN), Length of G/L
Accounts (6), Manual / Automatic creation of cost elements, Group Chart of Accounts for consolidation purposes,
etc.
• Chart of Accounts can be assigned to many companies i.e, it is specific to Company level and not
Company code level.
• G/L Accounts work in association with a specific Chart of Accounts. i.e, If in a company code G/L accounts
have been created w.r.t a Chart of Accounts, such Company code cannot be assigned any other Chart of
Accounts. To do so, first G/L account company code data has to be deleted via IMG > FA > GL Accounting > GL
Accounts > Master Records > Deletion.
• Chart of Accounts can only be deleted if it has not been assigned to any Company or no entry has been
made.
Activity :
Define ABCD ABCCO Chart of Accounts [CAIN is SAP standard COA for India]
Important settings:
Length of G/L accounts 8 (INT has 6 digits)
 Note : even after some G/L a/c s have been created with 8 digits, length can be changed and
the changed length will be applicable to new G/L a/c s created thereafter. This should not be
allowed by SAP.
Controlling integration “manual creation of cost elements”
i.e. user has the option to create related cost element by himself w.r.t the
G/L a/c
other option “automatic creation of cost element”
i.e. related cost element is automatically created on saving the G/L a/c if a
default value for the cost element category has already been set for this
cost element
o Assign Co Code to COA : assign.
Assign Chart of Accounts to Company Code
Unless a Chart of Accounts is assigned, no G/L Account can be created.
Activity :
Assign ABCD (ABCCO – Plant) ABCD (ABCCO Chart of Accounts)
 Note : There is an option of assigning Country COA also in addition to Co Code specific
COA. This would be needed in the following two circumstances:
? where usage of country chart of accounts is required by law in some
countries.
? the connection between the account in the worldwide standard chart of
accounts - used by the parent company, and the account in the country
chart of accounts can be set up
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
11 by Lawrence Rebello
o Define A/c Group : COA, A/c group – name, from a/c to a/c which will decide the
no range for the GL a/c, and the entry screens for which dbl click & a/c control,
doc entry etc – Supress / Reqd / Optional.
Define Account Groups
• When creating a G/L account, you must specify an account group.
• The account group determines:
? the Interval in which the account number can be created using FS00
? which Fields are ‘Required’, ‘Optional’ and ‘Suppressed’ when creating and changing master data.
• Account groups for G/L accounts are based on the chart of accounts
• SAP has defined 5 standard Account Groups
AS CASH GL MAT PL RECN
o Define Retained Earnings A/c : Like a P&L a/c to collect & carry forward. [ Enter
X {table populated} & 900000 ] If it gives error message, repeat, & it will save.
Define Retained Earnings Account
You assign a retained earnings account to each P&L account by specifying a P&L statement account type in the chart
of accounts area of each P&L account.
At the end of a fiscal year, the system carries forward the balance of the P&L account to the retained earnings
account. You can define one or more P&L statement account types per chart of accounts and assign them to
retained earnings accounts.
SAP has kept this activity in main IMG (instead of leaving it on implementer to create in FS00 mode) becoz unless
this is defined, incomes & expenses of previous period cannot be brought forward.
SAP standard Retained Earnings a/c
INT Sample Chart of Accounts (by SAP) 900000
GKR German Standard Accounting System (used by 0001) 900000
IKR Chart of Accounts – Industry 332000
CAINChart of Accounts – India 11610000
(this activity is done using an account assignment key ‘X’)
i.e. P&L Stat G/L a/c
X 11610000
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
12 by Lawrence Rebello
o Individual Procesing : GL A/c Creation & Processing/ Edit GL A/c [INDIVIDUAL
PROCESSING]/ Edit GL Ac Centrally
• FS00 : Edit GL a/c centrally
• Screens : Type desc : A/c group, P&L/BS, Text [enter some text ]
• Control Data : INR, Tax Category, Posting w/o tax allowed, Open Item
Mgmt [will allow open item mgmt like for GR/IR clg]
• Create Bank Int : Field status group, House Bank, A/c Id
• Fin Stat Version for Reporting : for statutory reporting.
IMG > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting > G/L Accounts > Master Records > G/L Account Creation
& Processing > Edit G/L Account (Individual Processing)
Edit G/L A/c (Individual Processing)
A G/L Account has two parts :
→ Chart of Accounts data – Name of G/L account, whether P&L or B/S item, Language, etc
→ Company code data – Currency, Taxation, Field Status Group, Tolerance Group, Financial Planning aspect,
etc.
Edit G/L Accounts (Centrally) FS00
→ Both Chart of Accounts & Company coed data can be edited
Edit Chart of Accounts data FSPO
→ Only Chart of Accounts data can be edited
Edit Company code data FSSO
→ Only Company code data can be edited
o List of A/c created : Info/GL Reports/Master Data S_ALR_87012326 for COA,
S_ALR_87012347 for Doc Extract.
[SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > General Ledger > Information Systems > G/L Reports > Master
Data > Chart of Accounts]
Chart of Accounts List (& FS00 details) S_ALR_87012326
G/L Accounts List (with properties) S_ALR_87012328
[SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > General Ledger > Information Systems > G/L Reports >
Document > General > Document items extract]
Document Item Extract (statement of entries) S_ALR_87012347
[SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > General Ledger > Account]
G/L Account Balances (Ledger Balances) FS10N
o Post with Reference : SAP/A/C/FA/GL/DocEntry/Others under F-02 general
posting, it is possible to Post with reference. This allows you to call back the
document. Post with reference will auto return the latest DOC no, so it is
important to remember the latest Doc no pr obtain it from the list. CAN BE USED
FOR REVERSAL POSTINGS ALSO.
G/L Documents Entry FB50 & F-02
 Note: F-02 is basic SAP G/L Document entry screen where each Dr. & Cr. are entered in
separate running screens. While FB50 is fast entry screen where in one screen only all
transactions can be entered.
 Note: F-02 besides the normal entry screen, gives you the option of post with reference.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
13 by Lawrence Rebello
o Account Assignment Model : FKMT - like a template. The entire entry can e
prepared & stored under a variant name [ xxyyzz etc ]. Equivalence is like a
%age, where the various a/c’s are denoted in %age terms & when the entry is
called, the amounts get distributed. The entry is stored but not saved, hence dr/cr
need not tally. First create and then go to line items by icon Q [can also be
created from FB50 [use F-02 wef 470] & header edit option]. Use F-02 for entry
& recall the AAM from top button. In case of equivalence enter dr & cr items etc.
FB50 can also be use to recall AAM thru Header/Environment/Complex posting
etc.
Recalling Account Assignment Model : Before recalling an Account Assignment Model, it should have been
created via Document Entry > Reference Document (FKMT). It can be created independently or with reference
to some existing Model.
“equivalence to” to pre-define % allocation to G/L accounts
“calculate tax” to allow SAP to calculate tax automatically on line items.
 Note: This function is used to pass entries where specific and pre-defined %s are allocated to
various G/L accounts (expenses or income or any other item) out of a gross Expense or Income
for which a G/L document has to entered. eg. annual payments at fixed point of time in an year
which may include pre-paid expenses.
 Note: While passing G/L Doc using Acct Assgn Model, only gross dr & cr amount has to be
entered and “on saving” it calculates the %s automatically and brings to the F-02 screen.
o Sample Document : F-01 this is a document which can be prepared and stored
for future use. Dr/Cr need not tally. The entry is not saved. Recall with reference
& complete.
o Recurring Document : FBD1
• Scheduled to run on a particular date. The amounts have to be known &
predefined. [ repetitive sales entry etc ]
• The document is scheduled to run on a particular date within the 1
st
& last
run & an interval. Transfer amounts in local currency KEEP ON. A run
schedule can also be setup. Here the run date is very important & must
be remembered. To find run date use Lists – F.15 GL/Periodic
processing/Recurring entries Execute F.14 / Lists F.15.
• When you execute, after entering only the necessary parameters [ 1
st
run
etc ] at T [process], you will get a message that a session has been
created. If the params are incorrect, the session will not be created.
• To run the session, from header System/services/batch input/sessions
select & process [in background] [sm35]
• Instead of processing above, you can also save as variant, which can be
recalled when a job is created. [The variant saves the parameters
defined. Hence a new parameter is required everytime. Execute thru
sessions]
Recurring Document FBD1
If certain transactions appear periodically, and is same in all respect viz amount, Recurring Document
feature allows such entry to be made automatically at regular interval.
First Run time, Last Run time and interval is defined while creating a Recurring document.
Document type need to be specified. i.e, all types of entries can be passed thru Recurring document
feature.
Recurring documents can be Viewed (FBD3), Changed (FBD2), Deleted (F.56) and Changes be displayed
(FBD4)
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
14 by Lawrence Rebello
o Document Parking : SAP/A/c/FA/GL/Doc Entry
• FV50 [ use F-02 wef 470 ] - edit or park G/L Doc
• F-65 - gen doc parking [ posting ] clear with FBV0
The document is parked with a sys generated doc no, but not posted. Hence
it will not appear in the reports like Doc Extract etc. When FV50 is used with
select parked doc [header], you can change the figures, but you can save
only if Dr=Cr. For parking the Dr need not = Cr. [ Useful to leave an entry
halfway. ] When saved, the entry is still not posted. Use post to close the
issue. To clear F-65 parking goto Parked Documents under Documents &
clear with FBV0.
Parking of G/L Documents FV50
A G/L Document can be parked for purposes like capturing of transaction in run-time but posting is desired later say,
after thorough verification by a senior. Various features of Parked Documents are as follows:
⇒ Transaction recorded but not posted
⇒ Dr. & Cr. need not be tallied for saving Parked documents.
⇒ All Parked documents can be Viewed (FBV3), Changed (FBV2) and Posted (FBV0)
⇒ All changes in Parked document can be viewed thru Display Changes (FBV5)
⇒ Parked Documents, no longer relevant, can be refused thru Refuse Parked Documents (FBV6)
 Note: Parked Docs can also be “Saved as Completed” i.e, all ‘Preparation’, ‘Completion’ and ‘Posting’
function can be segregated for different authorities.
 Note: If the entry screen is in some other Company’s environment, it can be changed thru “Edit” menu on
header (as against “Environment” in some other cases).
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
15 by Lawrence Rebello
PERIOD END CLOSING
• IMG/FA/GLA/Business Transactions/Closing
o Valuating - define valuation areas, valuation methods & prepare automatic
postings for foreign currency valuations.
o Regrouping - define valuation areas, define adjustment accounts for GR/IR
clearing [for goods recd, invoice not recd etc],
o Documenting - define financial statement versions [BAIN for India]
o Reporting - sales/purchases tax returns etc
o CarryForwarding - define retained earnings account
• SAP/AC/FA/GL/Periodic Processing/Closing/
o Check/Count - F.03 Comparison gives a list of differences due to documents
not posted etc if any.
o Valuate - F.05 foreign currency valuation
o Regroup - F.19 GR/IR clearing
o Document - audit trails
o Report - Balance sheet, Profit & Loss etc
o Carrying Forward - F.16 balance carry forward
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
16 by Lawrence Rebello
CHART OF ACCOUNTS
[ OB13 ]
1. Create a company from scratch, : IMG/ES/DEF/FA :
o Define Company
o Define,copy,delete,check co code : copy org object, change currency
Edit, Copy, Delete, Check, Company Code
• Edit Company Code data – Here separate companies are defined within one Company (i.e, a Group, as
defined above) for which separate accounting is being done. Configuration can be made at the company code
level for things which are specific to the company code apart from the general configuration done at Company
level. Here Name, Address & other information are configured w.r.t the Company Code. Further configuration shall
be at other places but the concept is that those will be specific to a Company code.
• Copy, Delete, Check, Company Code – One can also copy any existing company code data to a new
company code. Or any existing company code data can be changed / deleted. In case of copying from some
existing Company Code all Variants eg. Fiscal Period, Posting Period, Document No ranges, Field Status variant,
Company code data pertaining to G/L Account, etc (defined at various places) gets copied as is available with the
source company.
 Note: If copy function is used after a company code has been defined earlier (as above), i.e, by giving a new
name of target Company, company code data (various parameters) of source company are not properly
copied to the target company code.
 Note: However if copy function is used without defining a Company code first (as above), SAP copies the
address & other details of the source company. So, take care to change the details accordingly.
 Note: While copying, SAP asks for if the G/L Accounts company code data is also to be copied ? This should
be done only when the source & target companies both come under the same group and uses the same
Chart of Account & G/L Account company code data. Becoz by saying ‘yes’ here would allow SAP to copy
Chart of Accounts & G/L Accounts as used by the source Company. If any other Chart of Accounts is to be
used by the target company, Chart of Accounts & G/L Accounts Company code data should be copied at IMG
> FA > GL Accounting > GL Accounts > Master Records > GL Account Creation & Processing > Alternative
Methods (Here 'copy company code data’ means company code data pertaining to G/L Accounts only).
Otherwise first G/L Accounts company code data has to be deleted via IMG > FA > GL Accounting > GL
Accounts > Master Records > Deletion and then any other Chart of Accounts & G/L Account company code
data be assigned / copied to the target company.
 Note: G/L Account company code data means G/L accounts and all settings pertaining to G/L accounts viz
reconciliation a/c, taxes allowed or not, FSVs, etc. other company code data are – fiscal year variants,
document no ranges, posting period, etc.
o Assign Co Code to Company.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
17 by Lawrence Rebello
2. IMG / FA / GL / Master Records : Chart of accounts can be copied for simplicity, though
in realtime, it is created from the opening trial balance, schedules to the annual accounts
etc.
3. GL A.c Creation & Proc/Alternative Methods :
o Copy COA [ OBY7 ] – normally copied from INT. Target COA must be NEW. The
COA is copied, but not the co code data like variants etc. It is possible to delete a
COA, if no data is entered, and it is not assigned.
IMG > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting > G/L Accounts > Master Records > G/L Account Creation
& Processing > Alternative Methods
Copy Chart of Accounts : Here Chart of Accounts i.e G/L accounts (but not company code data pertaining to a G/L
accounts) can be copied from an existing Chart of Accounts respectively.
 Note: This function can only be done for a new COA (not an existing one), but remember
to assign the copied COA to the company code first and tehn proceed to copy company
code data (why – see the note below)
Copy Company Code : Here G/L Account Company code data can be copied from an existing company code similar
to the type being created, or can also be defined independently via FSSO.
(both of the above functions saves the user to define everything from the scratch)
 Note: G/L Accounts are always in relation to a Chart of Account, so when G/L Account company code data is
copied either at IMG stage while copying Company code or here without creating and assigning a required
Chart of Accounts, SAP copies Chart of Accounts associated with the source company, and hence it partakes all
the parameters of that Chart of Account.
4. Assign Co Code to COA - [ OB62 ] [Check COA by editing where necessary –
Manual Creation of Cost Elements, Group COA BLANK ]
5. Deletion : As the co code data is not copied, the existing co code data must be deleted,
so that the co code data for the COA can be copied. Therefore DELETE GL A/C WITH
GENERAL MASTER DATA IN CO CODE -----.
IMG > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting > G/L Accounts > Master Records > Deletions
• Del ete G/L Accounts : Deletion here means deletion of G/L Account company code data. If
these data are not deleted, the concerned Chart of Accounts cannot be de-assigned.
→ You can only delete master records of G/L accounts that do not contain any transaction data.
The program does not delete the chart of accounts section of a G/L account if the account is
also a primary cost element in Controlling. You can delete cost elements using program
RKSCUS03.
• Delete Chart of Accounts : Chart of Accounts can only be deleted if it is not assigned to any
company, or after assignment, if no entry has passed (i.e, only then G/L Account data can be deleted and Chart
of Account de-assigned)
o Copy Co Code G/L A/c’s from 0001 : [ OBY2 ] copy. [Message of Diff COA is ok]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
18 by Lawrence Rebello
6. Batch Data Communication : /NSHDB
o New recording - ZFS00
o Trancode FS00 - start recording.
o FS00 scr comes up. Pass a sample entry & save.
o On save, the recorded code comes up.
o Save recording.
o /NSHDB
o You can either run the process by Process Button [top], or create a program thru
the program button [top].
o Enter program name & transfer from recording.
o Title “Z---“ & save.
o You can change the source code.
o Select local object [message is program was created.]
o On selection you can view the source code.
o You can then generate & activate & test the prg thru the program option [top]. [
Use F8 to run, and give data file on server details ].
o On process as mentioned earlier, a small window opens, and you can change
the a/c no & other fields are entered auto.
o On test you can process thru batch or call trans as above.
7. Master Records
o Preparation : Edit COA List : Desc, Lang, Length [10], Manual Creation of Cost
Element. [ FSP1 / FSP2 / FSP3 ]
o Change GL A/c Collectively : Mass maintenance where a lot of a/c’s can be
changed one shot. Selection thru top left icon & τ & υ. To get rid of the
characteristics, put a “ “ on the top line, & to check use @. Any other field left
blank, wil be updated as “ “ in all such fields. Hence deselect all such fields which
need not be changed. Useful for “Posting w/o tax allowed etc etc “.
o Define A/c Group : COA, A/c group – name, from a/c to a/c. Field status for a/c
control – Supress / Reqd / Optional. - [ OBD4 ]
o Define Retained Earnings A/c : Like a P&L a/c to collect & carry forward. If it
gives error message, repeat, & it will save. - [ OB53 ]
o Individual Procesing : SAP / A/C / FA / GL / MASTER RECORDS / INDIVIDUAL
PROCESSING
• FS00 : Edit GL a/c centrally
• Screens : Type desc : A/c group, P&L/BS, Text [enter some text ]
• Control Data : INR, Tax Category, Posting w/o tax allowed.
• Create Bank Int : Field status group, House Bank, A/c Id
• Fin Stat Version for Reporting : for statutory reporting.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
19 by Lawrence Rebello
o Cross Co Transactions : IMG/FA/GLA/BT/PREPARE CROSS CO CODE
TRANSACTIONS : From to is not important, as the a/c is created in both
companies. Dr/Cr for the same a/c. BUV – clearing against 2 co codes. When a
transaction is entered, even though the expense a/c of another co is given, in the
1
st
co the default cross co code will be picked up, and in the 2
nd
co, the other
effect will be borne by the default code. Hence for one entry, two sets of entries
are passed in 2 companies. Ensure that co code is entered in the appropriate line
entry. [ New Co Code in F-02 ]. You can setup pool a/c’s in both companies, and
pass one entry in any one co code. The line where the cross co code is
mentioned, will result in an entry to that a/c, with the pool a/c bearing the other
effect in both co codes.
IMG > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting > Business Transactions > Prepare cross-co codes
transactions
One can define the accounts for the clearing entries the system makes when posting cross-company code
transactions. These clearing entries represent the receivables and payables between company codes which result
from central purchasing or payment.
You can specify G/L accounts as well as customer and vendor accounts for clearing between company codes.
However, if the company code for which you are posting these items is an external one, then you can specify only
G/L accounts as the clearing accounts.
Customers sometimes make payment to the wrong company in a group of affiliated companies. You can use cross-
company code entry to minimize the number of entries for posting this payment. In doing so, you debit your bank
account (company code 1) and credit the customer account (company code 2), and the system automatically
generates clearing entries between both company codes.
Activity :
Create one pool account (G/L a/c), say 149999 for inter-company transactions in both the companies that will be
debited & credited depending upon the nature of transactions i.e. it is like inter-company a/c.
Then while in data entry F-02 , note the following :
Situation : Co MRCM receiving payments on behalf of MRCD from the customer (say 2935) of MRCD
1
st
line item entry 40 (dr for SA doc) 113100 (Bank a/c in MRCM)
2
nd
line item entry 15 (cr for incoming pymts) 2935 (customer acct no in MRCD)
(also put MRCD in ‘other co code’ field in case of second line item)
now this will suitably be reflected in both the companies as follows :
MRCM MRCD
40 dr 113100 amount 15 cr 2935 amount
50 cr 149999 amount (payable) 40 dr 149999 amount (recvable)
(SAP presents dr & cr in increasing order of numbers)
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
20 by Lawrence Rebello
o Reconciliation A/c : Control account 140000 for Customers, 160000 for
Vendors.
o List of A/c created : Info/GL Reports/Master Data S_ALR_87012326 for COA,
S_ALR_87012347 for Doc Extract.
o Post with Reference : SAP/A/C/FA/GL/DocEntry/Others under F-02 general
posting, it is possible to Post with reference. This allows you to call back the
document. Post with reference will auto return the latest DOC no, so it is
important to remember the latest Doc no pr obtain it from the list.
o Account Assignment Model : FKMT - like a template. The entire entry can e
prepared & stored under a variant name [ xxyyzz etc ]. Equivalence is like a
%age, where the various a/c’s are denoted in %age terms & when the entry is
called, the amounts get distributed. The entry is stored but not saved, hence dr/cr
need not tally. First create and then go to line items by icon Q [can also be
created from FB50 [ use F-02 wef 470 ] & header edit option]. Use F-02 for entry
& recall the AAM from top button. In case of equivalence enter dr & cr items etc.
FB50 can also be use to recall AAM thru Header/Environment/Complex posting
etc.
o Sample Document : F-01 this is a document which can be prepared and stored
for future use. Dr/Cr need not tally. The entry is not saved. Recall with reference
& complete.
o Recurring Document : FBD1
• Scheduled to run on a particular date. The amounts have to be known &
predefined. [ repetitive sales entry etc ]
• The document is scheduled to run on a particular date within the 1
st
& last
run & an interval. A run schedule can also be setup. Here the run date is
very important & must be remembered. To find run date use Lists – F.15
GL/Periodic processing/Recurring entries Execute F.14 / Lists F.15.
• When you execute, after entering only the necessary parameters. [ FBD1
Enter company code, fiscal year, settlement period, which should
coincide with run date and user. [ 1
st
run etc ] at T [process], you will get
a message that a session has been created. If the params are incorrect,
the session will not be created.
• To run the session, from header System/services/batch input/sessions
select & process [in background] [sm35]
• Instead of processing above, you can also save as variant, which can be
recalled when a job is created. [The variant saves the parameters
defined. Hence a new parameter is required everytime. Execute thru
sessions]
• A job can be created in 2 ways :
o Defining a task : GL/Periodic Processing/Schedule Manager
SCMA When you click on schedule manager, the header will
have an option TASK LIST. Clicking TASK LIST will allow you to
create a task.
o JOB WIZARD : At the SCMA stage, at the header
ENVIRONMENT will allow activation of the Job Wizard to create a
JOB.
 Task List XYZTKL [ create ]
 Transaction F.14
o [an external prg can also be used which SAP will recognize thru
BAPI [Bus Appli Prog Interface]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
21 by Lawrence Rebello
 Variant[new] XYZREC1 [created earlier]
 JOB XYZJOB [now created]
o Recurring entries therefore have to be run on a particular date.
o Recurring Entries [different dates] :
IMG/FA/FaGLOBAL/DOCUMENT/REC_ENTRIES/Define_Run_Schedule Enter
Run Dates, Give run schedule name & save. When executing a recurring entry
giving the Run Schedule will enable pickup of Run Dates specified. Without Run
Date, the session will not be created.
o Document Parking : SAP/A/c/FA/GL/Doc Entry
• FV50 [ use F-65 wef 470 ] - edit or park G/L Doc
• F-65 - gen doc parking [ posting ] clear with FBV0
The document is parked with a sys generated doc no, but not posted. Hence
it will not appear in the reports like Doc Extract etc. When FV50 is used with
select parked doc [header], you can change the figures, but you can save
only if Dr=Cr. For parking the Dr need not = Cr. [ Useful to leave an entry
halfway. ] When saved, the entry is still not posted. Use post to close the
issue. To clear F-65 parking goto Parked Documents under Documents &
clear with FBV0.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
22 by Lawrence Rebello
CASH JOURNAL
IMG/FA/BANK A/C / BUS TRANS/ CASH JOURNAL
1. Create GL a/c for Cash Journal – Ensure post automatically is on, so that posting can
take place automatically. [ 100000 Petty Cash A/c ]
IMG > Financial Accounting > Bank Accounting > Business Transaction > Cash Journal
Create G/L Accounts for Cash Journal
It refers to the activity at FS00. Petty cash items are entered thru Cash Journal while in some cases, even receipt of customer
cheques is also allowed.
SAP standard Petty Cash a/c no. is 100000
Important settings are:
FSV G001 (with text, assignment)
Post automatically ‘on’
Relevant to Cash Flow ‘yes’
2. Define doc types for Cash Journal Docs - SK [other doc types SA GL, DZ Customer
Receipt, KZ Vendor Payment] [ OBA7 ]
3. Define No range & interval for Cash Journal documents [ FBCJC1 ] - copy from 0001.
4. Setup cash journal : [ FBCJC0 ]
a. Give a Cash Journal Code
b. Various code for GL A/c’s, Customers, Vendors.
Set up Cash Journal
Here a name (usu. Petty Cash) and code (any numeric or character) is given to the Cash Journal w.r.t the Company Code.
Though CJ code shows a pop-up button, no CJ code is available as it is created here only. So give any code desired and save.
One Cash Journal can be maintained for one currency type. However if one want to maintain more than one currency in the
same Cash Journal, G/L Account for Cash Journal should not have “Post Automatically On” (FS00).
5. Create, Change, Delete Business Transactions [ FBCJC2 ] : These tran types can be
copied, but as they are linked to GL a/c’s, change as reqd. These can be accessed at
FBCJ.
a. C receipts from bank GL a/c -------
b. B payment ot bank GL a/c --------
c. R Sales
For vendors & Customers, GL a/c’s need not be given, as they will be different for
A/P, A/R.
6. Setup Print params [ FBCJC3 ]– copy from 0001, output device – LP01.
7. Posting - SAP/A/c/FA/GL/Doc Entry - Cash Journal Posting FBCJ
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
23 by Lawrence Rebello
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
[will require INT COA]
• IMG/FA/AR&AP/Customer A/c’s/Master Records/Preparation for creation/ Customer
Master Record preparation.[Bus partner is a customer who is also a vendor]
o Define A/c Groups with Screen Layout : Edit field status (Cust) [ OVT0]
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Customer Accounts > Master Data > Preparations
Define Account Groups with screen layout (customers)
Account Groups are defined to
? the interval for the account numbers
? whether the number is assigned internally by the system or externally by
the user (type of number assignment)
? which fields are ‘mandatory’, ‘optional’ or ‘suppressed’ when creating and
changing master records (field status) – this will depend on the type of
customer a/c i.e. if it is a one-time customer, customer to whom goods are
sold/delivered/billed (these may be different persons)
 Note: Here status of fields (FSV) are defined in each ‘Account Group’ created i.e. it is not
that FSV as defined at IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document >
Line Items > Controls (which is assigned to the company code)
Difference : FSV here relates to Customer master database, whereas FSV at co code level
relates to transactions with the customers.
When creating a customer account, you must specify an account group. You can specify a reference account group
under "Control" in the "General data" part of any customer account's master data.
 Note: If you do not specify a reference account group, then, as previously, all fields of the
customer’s account screen are ready for input during document entry.
 Note: The reconciliation account field is defined as a required field since a reconciliation account
must also be specified for the one-time accounts. This field is company code-dependent.
As many as 22 SAP standard settings are available:
Sold To Party 0001 One-time Cust (int no.) CPD
Goods Recipient 0002 One-time Cust (ext no.) CPDA
Payer 0003 Customer (general) DEBI
Bill To Party 0004 etc Customer (ext no.) KUNA, etc.
For each Account Group:
? an “Output Determination Procedure” is assigned,
? specific “FSV Parameters w.r.t General Data, Company code data and Sales data”
are set as per the requirement, and
? it specified whether it is a one-time account
There are 5 SAP defined “Output Determination Procedure” i.e. procedure to control output say, Invoices, etc:
Sold To Party DB0001
Ship To Party DB0002
Bill To Party DB0003
Output For Payer DB0004
One can define his own Account Group, set FSVs as required, but “Output Determination Procedure” has to be
selected out of the above.
 Note: Account groups once assigned to a customer master & transactions entered cannot be de-
assigned, but FSV (earlier data relating to these fields remain intact) and number ranges can be
changed later.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
24 by Lawrence Rebello
o Define Screen Layout for Co Code : Dunning – SAP term for sending reminders
to customers.
Define Screen layout per Company code (customer)
Within a general setting for an Account Group, FSV settings can be changed for a specific Company code. Here only
Company code data (as defined at Account Group level) can be changed.
 Note: This function should be used only in exceptional circumstances. Normally this requirement is
controlled thru Account Groups (above) only.
o Define Screen Layout per Activity
Define Screen Layout per Activity (customer)
This IMG activity relates to creation of Customers. Three options are available to create customers:
Document Entry
Create customer (Accounting) Only General & Company Code data FD01
Create customer (Sales) Only General & Sales data VD01
Create customer (Centrally) All of three
XD01
General data
Address : Name, Address, Language, ….
Control data : Tax information, ….
Payment : Bank details, …..
Marketing: Industry, customer classification, ….
Unloading pts : Goods receiving hours, ….
Export data : Data for export control, ….
Contact details : address of business partners (agents, etc)
Sales data
Orders : Sales office, currency, price group, ….
Shipping : Shipping conditions, transportation zone, ….
Billing doc: Terms of payment, output tax classification, ….
Partner funct : Ship-to-party, Bill-too-party, ….
Company code data
Account mgmt : Reconciliation account, [imp – 140000 in 4.6c, 24410000 / 24600000
in 4.7]
Cash mgmt group [cash flow]
Value adjustment key [foreign exchange closing valuation]
Interest indicator, Interest cycle, last interest run, …
Payment : Terms of Payment, Tolerance Group, Payment history record key,
A/R Pledging indicator, Payment methods, ….
Correspond : Dunning, Interest, ….
Insurance: Amount insured, ….
 Note:
• FSV parameters can be defined for any of these activity and is a general specification for
creation of all Customer. Any different requirement regarding the fields in relation to any
customer or class of customer, for eg. Suppressing redundant details in case of one-time
customers, etc can further be controlled through FSV for ‘Account Groups’.
• Creation of customer, in real-time, originate from Sales & Distribution deptt, and details relevant
to FI can be fed by Finance deptt via FD02.
Account groups are linked with each of the customer (not co code) in its master record i.e. customer are created
under one of the Account groups.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
25 by Lawrence Rebello
o Define Industries
o Create No Ranges [ XDN1 ]
Create Number Ranges for Customer Accounts
SAP standard Number ranges are available. However one can change range interval and status (external or internal)
as per requirement.
 Note: External number assignment useful if you transfer master data from a pre-system or an
existing system. In all other cases, you should use the internal number assignment.
The SAP system offers a number of help functions to determine an account number. Therefore the account numbers
no longer have to be "mnemonic". The help functions include the ‘matchcode’ or the ‘Previous acct no’ field in the
customer/vendor master record.
o Assign No Ranges
Assign Number Ranges to Customer Account Groups
One type of Number range can be assigned to many Account Groups. Or, one can have separate no ranges for
separate Account groups.
o Define A/R pledging indicator 1 = open. The AR pledging indicator should be
activated to allow PDC to be accounted on the date mentioned. Another field
“probable time until check is paid” refers to realization time i.e. 3 days for local
clg will give an accurate cash forecast.
Define Accounts Receivable Pledging Indicator
You use the accounts receivable factoring indicator to select customer master records and line items within a
company code to participate in the factoring procedure.
Before this factoring procedure must have been activated for the co code via IMG > Financial Accounting Global
Settings > Company Code > Activate Accounts Receivable Factoring Procedure per Company Code.
o SAP/A/c/FA/AR&AP/Master Records :
 FD01 Create [ with sales areas VD01, all areas XD01]
 FD02 Change
 FD03 Display
 Search item CUST for searching
 Authorization group is a user defined field for analysis
 Customers bank data is to print customers bank details on the receipts
 Reconciliation account is 140000
 Sort key 001 by posting date
 Head office of the customer
 Cash management group for cash flow
 Value adjustment key for closing valuation of F/E valuation.
 Interest calculation – Last date will enable interest calculation from date
mentioned.
 Last interest run date on which interest was last run.
 “Slowly changing dimension “ to denote the details of a customer are
slowly changing and hence the need to maintain a payment history etc.
 Payment date [actually meant for Vendors]
• Only cash discount allowed
• Bill of exchange terms 0001 immediate.
• Known/negotiated/leave holidays can be used to avoid invoice
generation on such dates and avoid disputes in delayed
payments.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
26 by Lawrence Rebello
 Probable time till check is paid , to indicate realization time & give better
cash flow [assume no bill discounting].
 Lock box – prevalent in US, where a box is used to deposit cheques, and
the bank/agency does the depositing.
 Payment advice notes
 Selection rule
 Dunning for reminders : can be blocked where not reqd in case of long
overdues, where legal action taken etc
 Collective invoice – no individual invoice, but a weekly invoice etc.
 Decentralized processing will send correspondence to branch office.
 Insurance details
Create Customer (Accounting) FD01
Example settings:
Sort key Posting date
Terms of payment 0001 i.e, Immediate
Tolerance Group ‘ ’ i.e, Blank
Reconciliation a/c 140000 i.e, Sales a/c
Create Customer (Sales) VD01
Example settings:
Shipping Point Only complete delivery
Tolerance level Unlimited tolerance
Calendar 99 i.e, International
Inco Terms EXW i.e, ex-works
Payment terms 0001 i.e, immediate
Acct assignment group 01 i.e, domestic revenues
Create Customer (Centrally) XD01
All the fields available in both VD01 & VD01 can be entered here.
Change Customer (Accounting) FD02
Change Customer (Sales) VD02
 Note: Any change in the customer master after some docs (say, orders, deliveries, billing has been
created but not printed/sent) doesn’t reflect in those documents except ‘address’. Other things have to be manually
altered.
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Incoming Payments > Manual Incoming Payments
Define Tolerances (Customer)
In this step, you specify the tolerances for customers. These tolerances are used for dealing with differences in payment
and residual items which can occur during payment settlement.
Allocate a tolerance group to each customer via the master record. For each tolerance group, specify the following:
• Tolerances up to which differences in payment are posted automatically to expense or revenue accounts when
clearing open items.
• The handling of the terms of payment for residual items, if they are to be posted during clearing
 Note: Tolerance group created with ‘blank’ applies to all customers (as it is defined for a company
code) to whom any specific tolerance group is not assigned. If any specific group is defined, it must
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
27 by Lawrence Rebello
be assigned to a customer account via ‘master record’. [i.e. at least one tolerance group –
‘blank’ must be defined]
 Note: A ‘Payment term’ or a ‘Dunning key’ can also be assigned to tolerance group for posting
residual items from payment differences.
• SAP/A/c/AR/Document Entries
o FB70 - Invoice entries [ use F-22 wef 470 ]
o F-28 - Incoming payment
o F-26 - Payment fast entry
SALES A/C 800000
DATA ENTRY – Sales Invoices
Entering outgoing Invoices FB70 (4.6c version) F-22 (4.7 version)
 Note: Reconciliation a/c defined in FD01 serves as a link between Invoice and Sales G/L a/c.
• Incoming Payment : Bank 113100 Customers a/c xxxx. Optionally you can go for auto
search based on amount. It will bring up the amount in blue colour. If however the
payment does not tally with the invoice, SAP will not adjust, but display all different
receipts till final adjustment.
DATA ENTRY – Incoming Payments, Adjustments & Statements
Incoming Payments
[SAP Menu > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Document Entries]
Incoming Payments F-28
Payment Fast Entry F-26
 Note: Incoming payment can also be processed by F-06 under GL Doc entry. (remember to
change a/c type ‘D’ – customers instead of S – GL, which comes by default)
 Note: Incoming payment can also be handled under FBCJ – cash journal. However it would be
necessary to ‘Cl ear’ these payments received, which need not be done under F-28 / F-26, as the
payment is already received against a specific invoice.
SALES
ORDER
CREDIT
LIMIT
DELIVERY BILLING
BLOCKING
ANALYSIS
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
28 by Lawrence Rebello
o ARAP/Account
o FD10N - Display balances [drill down]
o FD11 - Analysis
For incoming payments F-26/28, after the invoice is created, it is possible that the
amount appears in display FD10N, but does not get processed as an open item. This
can be due to not defining tolerance groups. An error message will be displayed giving
table no, which can be analysed thru SE17, give table no and get lists by T .Another
reason could be IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/IP/AutoIP/Payment Method/Setup all co codes/
Select co & details : FP/FPJ Customer/Vendor types.
o Incoming payment can also be processed by F-06 under GL Doc entry, only A/c
type should be changed to D – customers instead of S –GL, which comes by
default.
o Incoming payment can also be handled under FBCJ – cash journal. However it
would be necessary to clear these payments received, which cannot be done
under F-28, as the payment is already received.
Customer Balances
[SAP Menu > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Account]
Display Customer Account Balances FD10N
Analyse Customer Account Balances FD11
Clear (incoming Payments under FBCJ) F-32
 Note: While clearing incoming payments, the following are possible:
• Partial payment – Diff posted can be used to make the amount not assigned as 0, and then
posting is possible. The diff amt becomes an open item with current date.
• Residual items – allow a residual amount to be kept and the rest is assigned. By keeping a
residual amount as not posted, it is possible to keep the amount not assigned 0.
• Charge to expense a/c – it is possible to charge off amounts not assigned to expenses like
cash discount etc, with predefined reason codes.
• Distribution of residual items – possible based on reason codes.
or
[SAP Menu > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Account > Assignment]
Assignment of open items FB15
 Note: On using FB15, all items appear. Select the one for assignment & “ASSIGN”. Next select the
assigned items and clear. This will bring you to a partial payment screen. Complete the assignment &
save. Next return to FB15 & confirm. The assigned items will go.
Edit Assigned items FB17
• Clearing
o To clear incoming payments received under FBCJ, use F-32/FB15.
o SAP/A/c/FA/AR/Account F-32 clear. When clearing payments it is possible to :
 Partial payment : Diff posted can be used to make the amount not
assigned as 0, and then posting is possible.
 Residual items allow a residual amount to be kept and the rest is
assigned. By keeping a residual amount as not posted, it is possible to
keep the amount not assigned 0.
 Charge to expense a/c. : it is possible to charge off not assigned amounts
to expenses like cash discount etc, with predefined reason codes.
 Distribution of residual items : possible based on reason codes.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
29 by Lawrence Rebello
 SAP/Ac/FA/AR/Ac/Assignment
• FB15 asssign/clear open items. On using FB15, all items
appear. Select the one for assignment & “ASSIGN”. Next select
the assigned items and clear. This will bring you to a partial
payment screen. Complete the assignment & save. Next return to
FB15 & confirm. The assigned items will go. [you can use
difference postings to create a new o/s ]
• FB17 edit assigned items.
 Corresspondence
• FB12 request for stat of a/c SAP06,08,15 etc.
• F.64 maintain SAP06 etc which when dbl clicked will produced
stat of a/c thru LP01.
Statement of Accounts
[SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Account >
Correspondence]
Request (for statement of Customers’ a/c) FB12
Maintain (gives the print-out of above) F.64 [SAP06, SAP08, SAP15, etc]
• Payment Advices
o SAP/Ac/FA/AR/Doc Entry/Payment Advice
 FBE1 Create – payment advice no comes by default. Enter amount &
save.
 FBE2 Change
 FBE3 Display
 Payment advice F4 & execute to get a list. Payment advices can be
created for different payments. Credit memo can be adjusted with
any/specific invoices.
 S_ALR_87012203 payment advice overview.
• Down Payments : like an advance. They have to be requested, made and cleared after
raising an invoice under which it is adjusted. Special groups for GL
o A Down Payment
o B Bill of exchange receivable
o C Rent deposit
o E Reserve for Bad Debts
o F Down payment request
Down payments require certain params to enable clearing.
IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/Outgoing Payments/Auto OP/Payment Method/
Bank selection for payment Programs
o Set up all co codes
o Set up the vendors, customers,Spl GL Transactions
o Vendors FP
o Customers FPJ
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
30 by Lawrence Rebello
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Incoming Payments > Auto Incoming Payments >
Payment Method / Bank Selection
Set up All Company Codes for Payment transactions
In this activity, you make specifications for all company codes involved in payment transactions.
For each company code, you make the following specifications:
• Paying company code & Sending company code – relevant to cross co-code transactions i.e. where one co
code makes payment for other co codes.
• Cash discount and (difference) tolerance limits
• Specify which special G/L transactions are to be settled for customers and vendors.
Vendors Customers
F Down payment request F Down payment request
P Payment request P Payment request
J Advance Payment Request
 Note: This activity is pre-requisite for clearing payments received against open items.
[other important settings w.r.t Incoming Payments are discussed under Accounts Payable which are similar and
relevant to Accounts Receivable also]
• SAP/FA/AR/DocEntry/DownPayment
o F-37 The down payment created thru a request is available under FD10N under
special GL list[after creating downpayments with F-29].
o An AAM can be created for every product type, & the appropriate codes fed into
line items. This AAM can be recalled at the invoice stage thru
Environment/Complex Posting F6. To speed up data entry, ensure A/c no, date
and amount is entered prior to F6, then save.
o F-39 Clearing of down payments. Enter cust no, keep relevant invoice details etc
blank., enter transfer posting amounts & save.
Down Payments
[SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Down Payment]
 Note: like an advance. They have to be requested, received and cleared after raising an invoice
under which it is adjusted. Special groups for GL – ‘A’ Down Payment.
Request (Down Payment) F-37
Down Payment (Receive) F-29
Clear (Down Payment) F-39
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
31 by Lawrence Rebello
• Terms of Payment [ OBB8 ]
o IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/Incoming invoices/Cr Memo
o Maintain terms of payment :
o Base line date is the date to be considered for the calculation of interest. The
interest would actually start after the additional months i.e. CR period has
elapsed.
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Outgoing Invoices and Credit Memos
Maintain Terms of payments
Terms of Payments i.e, due date, discounts %s if paid before due date, etc are defined and stored under a four-
character key. terms of payment is assigned to the customers in the master record via the key.
 Note: One can use the same key for the terms of payment for both customers and vendors who
have the same payment terms. But in such a case any changes made for either customer 0r
vendor will automatically affect both. Hence it is recommended to use different terms of
payment keys for customers and vendors and limit the permitted account type correspondingly
within the terms of payment.
SAP has provided 11 default payment terms types (0001 – 0011). Changes in standard settings are normally not
needed except where
• a separate help text for a payment term is needed which deviates from the explanations created
automatically
• an account type i.e. a particular transaction type with a customer, has to be excluded for a payment term
(in the standard system, a payment term applies to all account types of the business partner)
• change the payment conditions for a payment term
Terms of payment are defined in the following manner:
Paymt Terms Text
0008 14 days/2%, 30 days/1.5%, 45 days net
Day limit Expl.
15 within 14 days, 2% dis
within 30 days, 1.5% dis
within 45 days, net due
baseline date on 31
st
of the month
 Note: Terms of payment (discount, etc) shall be considered after the ‘baseline date’.
 Note: If day limit is ‘nil’, baseline date is date of invoice i.e. becomes immediately due.
 Note: ‘day limit’ is used where ‘baseline date’ (due date of payment) is specified based on a
period range during which invoices are raised, eg. For all invoices raised upto 15
th
of a month,
due date is 30
th
of the same month.
In such a case, terms for ‘another part’ of the month has to be defined for
the same payment term (0008 in this case) – see below.
Paymt Terms Text
0008 14 days/2%, 30 days/1.5%, 45 days net
Day limit Expl.
31 within 14 days, 2% dis
within 30 days, 1.5% dis
within 45 days, net due
baseline date on 15
th
of the next month
double click to get inside for baseline date & payment terms the settings
 Note: Not more than two discount options are available (even under new entry).
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
32 by Lawrence Rebello
Define Terms of Payment for Installments
First, define a term of payment as above with following parameters:
Text Payable in x installments
Own expl. ‘Blank’ (SAP gives system generated explanation)
Installment Payment ‘on’ (do not put any discount %s)
Then specify % of installment amounts under IMG activity “Define Terms of Payment for Installment”. It should be
remembered here that each installment also has its terms of payment. Therefore for a 5 installment method, there
will be 6 payment terms.
 Note: SAP defaults can be altered / new ones created to suite the specific user requirements.
Due date is specified by selecting “payment terms” while defining installments – it can be different for different
installments.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
33 by Lawrence Rebello
TAXES
[ changes to structures for country version India wef 470 ]
SAP 4.6C does not have tax capability for Indian Taxation, for which CIN [country India] version
is available. Tax procedure of Great Britan TAXGB [ TAXINJ wef 470 ] is used.
In FI all taxes are inclusive. For exclusive tax, settings are to be made in the pricing condition for
the tax condition type MWST [TAXJ]. Once taxes are defined, mass maintenance “posting w/o
tax allowed” to be changed. In case of specific accounts like sales 800000 the tax code will
have to be specified like output tax etc. At the invoice stage also, calculate tax will have to be
checked @ to avoid error messages at saving time.
IMG/FA/FAGlobal/Tax on Sales & Purchases/
• Basic Settings
o Define Proceedures [ FTXP ]
o TAXIN [ TAXINJ wef 470 ] Tax Proc for India.
Condition Type BASB as under :
Access sequence
Cond Class A Plus /minus
Calc type B
Cond Cat K
Rounding rule
Manual entries D
Group cond
Header cond Amount/perc
Item cond On
Text det proc Text id
o Condition Type MWAS [ JIN1 & JIN2 for CST & LST wef 470 ] Output tax A1
o Condition Type MWVS [ JIP1 & JIP2 for CST & LST wef 470 ] Input tax V1
o Access Sequences : only country & tax codes possible. [ You can use TAXUSJ for
Jurisdiction Taxes ] Other tax statewise in CIN version. MWST [ Page: 33
[0]TAXJ with jurisdiction wef 470 & cond cat in cond type should be 2 i.e. level 2 to allow for
IN10 etc.] tax indicator.
o Condition Types : Type of calc %age etc. In Master Data screen “delete_fr_DB”
choose “DO NOT DELETE”
o Check and Change Settings for Tax Processing :
 MWS & MW3 for JIN1 & JIN2 [ separate line item ]
 NVV for JIP1 & JIP2 [non deductible & no separate line item, as dist to relevant exps
like purchase etc ]
o Specify structure with tax jurisdiction code. TAXUSJ [ Page: 33
[0]TAXINJ has 2 levels like IN10 etc. ] has 4 levels. It is thus possible to have a code
with [TAXINJ - 2,2]
 Country code 2 chars
 Region code 3 chars
 State code 3 chars
 City code 3 chars e.g. ALABAMA = USMIDALAXXX
 While specifying the structure DiN i.e. discount is net i.e. taxes are
calculated after discount is adjusted.
 TxN i.e. taxes are netted [here the department loses revenue]
 Define Tax Jurisdiction for India TAXIN [ Page: 33
[0]TAXINJ with 32 states as per region codes 10 for Karnataka wef 470 ]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
34 by Lawrence Rebello
• Calculation
o Define tax codes for Sales & Purchases[Page: 34
[0]wef 470 CST FIELD NOT ACCESSIBLE as in condition type JIP1,2 JIN1,2 level 1 was
preset instead of level 2]
 A1 output tax code 10%
 A tax type for output tax
 Tolerance 1 = 1% [for tax differences]
 MWS output tax
 ERS sales deal
 ERL revenue . These a/c keys will integrate SD with FI.
 Fill up only the output tax field o/wise if you enter a value in the input tax, it
will result in duplicate taxes being calculated.
o Assign company code to document date for tax determination : the posting date is
normally considered, but in this case, the doc date will be considered.
• Posting
o Define tax accounts [ OB40 ] [ Page: 34
[0]wef 470 JIN1 Act Key MWS GL 13113400 JIN2 Act Key MW3 GL 13113410 JIP1 & 2
Act Key NVV GL ]
 175000 output tax MWS & 154000 input tax VST
o Define a/c for Exch Rate fluctuations -
 Loss from currency valuation 230010
 Gain from currency valuation 280010
o Assign tax code for Non Taxable transactions
 A0 output tax 0%
 V0 input tax 0%
TAXES WITH JURISDICTION
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax on Sales & Purchases > Basic Settings
Check Calculation Procedures
Define Access Sequences : SAP has pre-defined 3 Access sequences
MWST - Tax Indicator (I/O taxes only)
TAXJ - US Taxes with Jurisdiction
USTX - US Taxes
We will use ‘TAXJ’ access sequence, as it is based on jurisdictions.
Define Condition Types : Condition types are made use of for defining Tax Calculation Procedure. SAP has defined condition types
for different jurisdiction levels in US (JR1, JR2, etc)
Jurisdiction in US works as States ? County ? City (Tax in each
jurisdiction depend on taxation in preceding jurisdiction)
In India jurisdiction are at horizontal level and there is no vertical jurisdictional dependency. So Indian jurisdictions can be designed
as consisting of one level only.
We used JR1 condition type of TAXUSJ to define the following condition types:
• JT1, JT2, JT3 : BED Payable, AED Payable and SED Payable resp.
• JT6, JT7, JT8 : CST–C Form Payable, CST w/o C Form Payable and LST payable resp.
• JR1, JR2, JR3 : BED Recov, AED Recov and SED Recov resp.
• JR6, JR7, JR8 : CST–C Form Recoverable, CST w/o C Form Recoverable and LST Recoverable resp
with “Jurisdiction level 1 or 2”, (depending on whether jurisdiction level is defined as one or ‘two’) – [see notes on structure for tax
jurisdiction below] and “Access Sequence – TAXJ”
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
35 by Lawrence Rebello
Check Calculation procedure :
 Note: Before defining calculation procedure, first check whether G/L accounts and respective accounting keys relevant to
all types of taxes have been created (FS00)
We created 175001, 175002, 175003 for BED Payable, AED Payable, SED Payable respectively. Note the following settings:
Status B/S Item
Posting allowed in only Local currency
Tax category ‘>’ (Output Tax)
Post Automatically is “on”
 Note: Ensure that Accounting keys relevant to each tax types have been defined under “Check and change
Settings for Tax Processing”
We used procedure TAXUSJ (call it TAXINJ) with necessary modifications as follows:
Step Cond Type Desrption frm step to step acctg key
100 BASB Base Amount
110 JT1 BED Payable 100 JT1
120 JT2 AED Payable 100 JT2
130 JT3 SED Payable 100 JT3
190 MWS1 Subtotal 100 130
510 JT6 CST-C Form Pay 190 JT6
520 JT7 CST w/o C Form Pay 190 JT7
530 JT8 LST Payable 190 JT8
(Similarly for JR1 – JR8 also)
Assign Country to Calculation Procedure
Here calculation procedure is assigned to a company code.
Check and change Settings for Tax Processing
Here a tax process for each tax type has to be defined . This serves as accounting key in Calculation Procedure (discussed above),
helps in linking posting to G/L accounts etc (as discussed later). The important settings here are:
Tax type ‘1’ i.e. Output Tax
Posting Indicator ‘2’ i.e. Separate Line Item
Specify structure for Jurisdiction Code
Here structure guides SAP to determine various jurisdictions in one level and also whether a code is in level 1 or level 2 and so on.
As in India we have only one level of taxes we specified a size of ‘6’ to our Jurisdiction structure.
 Note: If we define only one level, while selecting jurisdiction codes in definition of tax codes, it will give us
option of selection by State (Country) only and not by County (State) and hence all jurisdictions code (in our case 26*16) will
pop-up. So its better to define two levels, 2 – for Country and 4 – for States.
IN 10 00
Country State for various categories of jurisdiction
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
36 by Lawrence Rebello
Define Jurisdictions
We defined Jurisdictions as follows (e.g. for Karnataka State):
IN0001 Foreign Jurisdiction - US, Custom (BCD)
IN0002 Foreign Jurisdiction - US, Custom (BCD, CVD)
IN1001 KAR, Branch, Excise (BED)
IN1002 KAR, Branch, Excise (BED,AED)
IN1003 KAR, Branch, Excise (BED,AED,SED)
IN1004 KAR, Branch, No Excise
IN1011 KAR, CST, Regd Dealer, Excise (BED)
IN1012 KAR, CST, Regd Dealer, Excise (BED,AED)
IN1013 KAR, CST, Regd Dealer, Excise (BED,AED,SED)
IN1014 KAR, CST, Regd Dealer, No Excise
IN1021 KAR, CST, Non Regd Dealer, Excise (BED)
IN1022 KAR, CST, Non Regd Dealer, Excise (BED,AED)
IN1023 KAR, CST, Non Regd Dealer, Excise (BED,AED,SED)
IN1024 KAR, CST, Non Regd Dealer, No Excise
IN1031 KAR, LST, Regd Dealer, Excise (BED)
IN1032 KAR, LST, Regd Dealer, Excise (BED,AED)
IN1033 KAR, LST, Regd Dealer, Excise (BED,AED,SED)
IN1034 KAR, LST, Regd Dealer, No Excise
IN1041 KAR, LST, Non Regd Dealer, Excise (BED)
IN1042 KAR, LST, Non Regd Dealer, Excise (BED,AED)
IN1043 KAR, LST, Non Regd Dealer, Excise (BED,AED,SED)
IN1044 KAR, LST, Non Regd Dealer, No Excise
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax on Sales & Purchases > Calculation
Define Tax Codes for Sales & Purchases
Here tax codes are defined for each jurisdiction. Tax codes are:
Output Tax A1 (with rates applicable in each jurisdiction)
Output Tax Exempt A0 (with nil rates)
Input Tax V1 (with rates applicable in each jurisdiction)
Input Tax Exempt V0 (with nil rates)
 Note: Make sure that while defining rates for Output tax A1, rates are specified in JT1, JT2, JT6, JT7, etc (which are
meant for taxes on sales and need to be posted to separate accounts. Similarly while defining rates for Input tax V1, rates are
specified in JR1, JR2, JR6, JR7, etc (which are meant for taxes on purchases and need to be posted to separate accounts.
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax on Sales & Purchases > Posting
Define Tax Accounts
Here all the tax processes defined under “Check & change settings for tax processing” are available. These need to be defined with
respect to G/L account to which it will be posted, dr & cr keys, etc
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
37 by Lawrence Rebello
TAXES WITH JURISDICTION (Version 4.7)
 Note : Version 4.7 has come up with standard country India specific settings i.e. now there is no need to get
additional ‘patch’ for Indian specific taxation requirements.
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax on Sales & Purchases > Basic Settings
Define Calculation Procedure
Define Access Sequences : Some of SAP pre-defined Access sequences (relevant to India taxes) are:
TAXJ - US Taxes with Jurisdiction
JTAX - IN : Excise Access
JST1 - IN : Sales Tax Access
Define Condition Types : SAP predefined condition types, relevant to Indian taxes, are as follows:
Cond Type Desrption Cond Category Access Sequence
JM01 A/P BED deductible
JA01 A/P AED deductible
JS01 A/P SED deductible
JM02 A/P BED non-deduct
JA02 A/P AED non-deduct
JS02 A/P SED non-deduct
JSER Service Tax
JSVD Service Tax Debit
JMOD A/R BED
JAED A/R AED
JSED A/R SED
JCES A/R CESS
JIP3 A/P ST Set-off
JIP1 A/P CST
JIP2 A/P LST
JIN1 A/R CST
JIN2 A/R LST
JIN4 A/R CST s/charge
JIN5 A/R CST s/charge
Cond Type Desrption Cond Category Access Sequence
JMOP BED Set off %
JMOQ BED Set off Inv
JAOP BED Set off %
JAOQ BED Set off Inv
JSOP BED Set off %
JSOQ BED Set off Inv
JMIP BED Inv %
JMIQ BED Inv Qty
JAIP AED Inv %
JAIQ AED Inv Qty
JSIP SED Inv %
JSIQ SED Inv Qty
JMX1 A/P BED Set off
JMX2 A/P BED Inv
‘1’
Jurisdiction
Level 1
TAXJ
‘2’
Jurisdiction
Level 2
TAXJ
‘D’
Taxes
JTAX
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
38 by Lawrence Rebello
JAX1 A/P AED Set off
JAX2 A/P AED Inv
JSX1 A/P SED Set off
JSX2 A/P SED Inv
JIPS Sales Tax Set off
JIPC CST Inv
JIPL LST Inv
Check Calculation procedure :
SAP 4.7 version has got country India specific tax procedure TAXINJ, settings are as follows:
Step Cond Type Desrption frm step to step stat alt CType altBV acctg key
100 BASB Base Amount 362
110 Calculated Call 100 v 352
120 Subtotal 110 v
200 JM01 A/P BED deductible 120 354 JI 1
205 JA01 A/P AED deductible 120 364 JI 2
207 JS01 A/P SED deductible 120 368 JI 3
210 JM02 A/P BED non-deduct 120 362 NVV
212 JA02 A/P AED non-deduct 120 365
214 JS02 A/P SED non-deduct 120 369
215 Base + All duties 100 214 v
217 JIP3 A/P ST Set-off 215 370 363 VS 5
220 JIP1 A/P CST 215 363 JT 1
230 JIP2 A/P LST 215 371 363 JT 2
250 JSER Service Tax 100 ESA
260 JSVD Service Tax Debit 250 ESE
510 JMOD A/R BED 120 v 363
512 JAED A/R AED 120 v 366
513 JSED A/R SED 120 v 360
514 JCES A/R CESS 120 v 367
515 Subtotal v
520 JIN1 A/R CST 515 MWS
530 JIN2 A/R LST 512 MW3
540 JIN4 A/R CST s/charge 520 MWS
550 JIN5 A/R LST s/charge 530 MW3
‘None’ JTAX
‘D’
Taxes
JST1
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
39 by Lawrence Rebello
560 JMOP BED Set off % 120 JI 1
561 JMOQ BED Set off Qty 120 JI 1
562 JAOP AED Set off % 120 JI 2
563 JAOQ AED Set off Qty 120 JI 2
564 JSOP SED Set off % 120 JI 3
565 JSOQ SED Set off Qty 120 JI 3
570 JMIP BED Inv % 120 NVV
571 JMIQ BED Inv Qty 120 NVV
572 JAIP AED Inv % 120 NVV
573 JAIQ AED Inv Qty 120 NVV
574 JSIP SED Inv % 120 NVV
575 JSIQ SED Inv Qty 120 NVV
578 JMX1 A/P BED Set off 560 561 v
579 JAX1 A/P AED Set off 562 563 v
580 JSX1 A/P SED Set off 564 565 v
581 JMX2 A/P BED Inventory 570 571 v
582 JAX2 A/P AED Inventory 572 573 v
583 JSX2 A/P SED Inventory 574 575 v
585 Total Excise Duty 578 583 v
588 Copy Net Price 120 120 v
590 Price + ED 585 588 v
593 JIPS Sales Tax Set off 590 590 VS5
595 JIPC CST Inventory 590 590 NVV
598 JIPL LST Inventory 590 590 NVV
Assign Country to Calculation Procedure
Here calculation procedure is assigned to the company code.
Check and change Settings for Tax Processing
Here a tax process for each tax type has to be defined [as discussed for 4.6 version]. This serves as accounting key in Calculation
Procedure (discussed above), helps in linking posting to G/L accounts etc (as discussed later). The important settings here are:
process key description tax type not deductible posting indicator
JI1 India Basic Excise 4 i.e. not relev to tax v 1 i.e. posting not reqd.
JI2 India Addl Excise 4 i.e. not relev to tax v 1 i.e. posting not reqd.
JI3 India Spl Excise 2 i.e. Input Tax 2 i.e. separate line item
JI4 LST 1 i.e. Output Tax 2 i.e. separate line item
VS5 Input Tax PST gross 2 i.e. Output Tax 2 i.e. separate line item
(also it is configured to be not relevant for cash discount)
ESA Output Acquis Tax 1 i.e. Output Tax 2 i.e. separate line item
ESE Input Acquis Tax 2 i.e. Input Tax 2 i.e. separate line item
MWS Output Tax 1 i.e. Output Tax 2 i.e. separate line item
MW3 Sales Tax 3 1 i.e. Output Tax 2 i.e. separate line item
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
40 by Lawrence Rebello
NVV Non-deduc input tax 2 i.e. Input Tax v 3 i.e. dist to rel exp/rev
 Note : All the above processing keys will be available in IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax
on Sales & Purchases > Posting > Define Tax Accounts – where it shall be associated with different G/L accounts and posting
(dr & cr) rules
 Note : Once all basic settings are made, country India version should be activated for specific fiscal years via
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax on Sales & Purchases > Basic Settings > India >
Activate country India version for specific fiscal years
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
41 by Lawrence Rebello
DUNNING
IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/Dunning/Basic Settings for Dunning
While posting repeated invoices, if the credit limit is crossed, you may not be permitted to enter
further invoices. In such a case, IMG/ES/Defi/Define Credit Control Area. If a credit limit is not
set, you cannot enter invoices.
• Define Dunning area : for each co code, a dunning area is defined.
REMINDERS TO CUSTOMERS – DUNNING
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Dunning > Basic Settings for Dunning
Define Dunning Areas
Dunning area represents a sub-structure of the Company code. If different responsibilities and different dunning procedures exists
within a company code, one can set up corresponding dunning areas.
Dunning areas are used if several organizational units are responsible for carrying out dunning within one company code. These
organizational units are referred to as dunning areas. The dunning area can correspond, for example, to a profit center, a
distribution channel, a sales organization or a business area.
The individual dunning areas can use different procedures or the same dunning procedure.
 Note: The dunning areas with the required dunning procedures are to be entered into the
customer or vendor master record if you use different dunning procedures.
Otherwise, the system uses the standard dunning procedure. The dunning area is then entered in the line item. The system
enters the dunning area into the master record automatically with the corresponding data.
• Define dunning keys : max 4 levels are possible like 1,2,3 reminders etc.
Define Dunning keys
• Dunning keys define how much / many notices have to be sent to customers. i.e.,
key 1 (max level = 1) ? only one notice
key2 (max level = 2) ? two notices, etc.
• Note the settings:
key max level print separately text
1 1 Triggers maximum dunning level 1
2 2 Triggers maximum dunning level 2
3 3 Triggers maximum dunning level 3
z v payment has been made
• Define dunning block : for legal cases, dunning must be blocked.
Define Dunning Block Reason
Dunning can be run for Customer account group as a whole.
If a particular customer need not be dunned, his master data should ‘select’ the ‘reason’. Reasons for a dunning block are defined
under a key. The key can be entered in an item or in the master record of a customer’s account. SAP default keys are:
‘Blank’ freed for Dunning
* Dunning Interface
A Manual Block Reason, etc
Define Dunning Groupings
Dunning notices are generally created per business partner. In special cases, it can be useful to group together the open items of a
business partner according to certain aspects and dun these items together.
In order to group items together for dunning notices, you need to define grouping keys (two-character, alphanumeric). For each
key, specify a field from the line item whose contents are to comprise the main criteria for the group. Items whose contents in this
field are identical, are dunned together.
Define Interest rates (for Dunning)
Interest indicator is defined here specifying interest rates (and validity date) on dr. & cr. items for the purposes of dunning run.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
42 by Lawrence Rebello
• Define dunning procedure : [ FBMP ]
o Dunning interval - frequency of dunning e.g. 14 days
o Totaled for items – when a dunning level 1 is maintained, totaling takes place
level 2 onwards. If level 0 is maintained, all items are totaled. The totaled items
are for threat perception etc. In Germany, court orders can only be issued level 3
onwards for total of all items dunned.
o Minimum day arreas : atleast one item must have a dunning notice to be
created. The minimum days in arrears have no influence on calculation of the
days overdue.
o Line item grace periods e.g. 3
o Interest indicator HI
o Public holiday calender 99 international IN for India.
o Std transactions set on, o/wise spl GL like downpayments will also be
considered.
o Reference dunning process @ 0001. You can create your own dunning letters
using SAPSCRIPT [ similar to ABAP ].
o Dunning levels [top button] - day in arrears @ 30 i.e. dun after 30 days.
o Calculate interest - set on after level 2 as letters after 2 i.e. 3 only have interest
mentioned.
o Always dun keep on g
o Print all items keep on g g g g
o Payment deadline @ 7 i.e. after dunning letter, deadline to receive payment.
o Legal dunning procedure g for items where legal letters to be sent [after 3
levels etc]
o Charge for dunning - the charge for dunning can be fixed or a %age depending
on the parameters set. Here a %age may help, as minimum amounts for dunning
are set, sometimes if the total o/s is low, an item may not come into the dunning
process at all. The %age is based on the total o/s of that customer. You cannot
define a fixed dunning charge, and a %age based charge at the same time.
o Minimum amounts for dunning - the minimum amount to be considered for
dunning. %age of amounts means %age to total of open items [for a customer]. If
both are set, both conditions must be met.
o Minimum amount to be included in dunning
o Dunning text – forms are designed and can be changed using ABAP [a/c type
D][Ensure the DUNNING TEXT FORMS EXIST]
o Spl GL indicator - whether to dun.
For checking dunning open a separate a/c and raise invoices backdated, so that
dunning runs can take place with the interval applicable. It may be necessary to open
posting period suitably. The posting date will also have to be backdated and credit
limit reset. In case of existing customer, ensure dunning procedure is set.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
43 by Lawrence Rebello
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Dunning > Dunning Procedure
Define Dunning procedure FBMP
Dunning procedures are company code independent i.e. one dunning procedure can be assigned to more than one
co codes – it is assigned to each of the customer via master records.
They determine the ‘dunning interval’, ‘the grace periods for the due date determination’, and ‘the number of
dunning levels’. You can also set the dunning level at which you want to list all due items from an account in the
dunning notice.
A customer account is only included in dunning if it assigned a dunning procedure in its master data. To exclude an
account from dunning, you can set a dunning block for it in the master data.
Activity:
Dunning procedure ABCD
Dunning interval in days 14 “min no. of days between two dunning runs”
Total due items from dunning level 1 “1 / 2 / 3 or whatever” no legal use in
India
 Note: In Germany, after 3 dunning notices, court notices can be sent for “Total due items”.
However in India, this function can be used for sending reminders to the customers.
Min days in arrears (acct) 4 “no. of days one of the open items must be overdue for dunning run to be
triggered” (only for trigger – overdue days is
not altered)
Line item grace period 2 “no. of days within which an open item shall be excluded from dunning run”
Interest indicator “interest rate key as defined below” (this interest is not posted to G/L a/c)
 Note: Dunning procedure can also be configured for :
Dunning Levels – interest to start after ‘x’ days in arrears, print parameters, etc.
Charges – dunning charges to be included
? after n
th
level and ‘x’ dunning amount
? % of dunning charges, etc.
Minm amounts – to trigger dunning
? after ‘x’ total overdue amount
? ‘y’% of overdue amounts (out of total open items), and
? minimum amount of dunning interest to be included
o SAP/Ac/FA/AR/Periodic Processing
• F150 Dunning
• Identifier user defined run 1,2,3 use ID for 1
st
Qt etc.
• Select parameters
• Dunning date - the dunning date defines when the next dunning
run takes place [after the interval]. If you click on current date, you
may not be able to take subsequent runs immediately, and you
may have to go to IMG and change the interval.
• Dun posted upto [consider posted upto date ]
• Save parameters
• Individual dunning notice @ LP01
• Specify run dates
• Specify dunning dates
• Specify posted upto dates
• Select print preview & printout [o/wise the dunning will not be
considered, and subsequent runs will also be level 1]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
44 by Lawrence Rebello
• IMG/FA/Global/Corresspondence - it is possible to view the various
dunning forms & even create them [SAPSCRIPT similar to ABAP]
DATA ENTRY – Dunning Run
[SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Periodic Processing]
Dunning F150
Activity:
Select Individual notices > Output Device
? Company code > customer account
? Run date should be in line with dunning interval & can be diff from dunning date
(later)
? Dunning date determines overdue a/cs for dunning trigger
? Documents posted upto date determines which open items are to be considered
Take print out of dunning notices. After this step, customer master data will automatically be updated for first dunning run. (taking
sample printout or test run would not make the dunning run effective)
 Note: SAP standard Dunning forms can be displayed or changed (using SAPSCRIPT similar
to ABAP) via IMG > Financial Accounting > Financial Accounting Global Settings >
Correspondence
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
45 by Lawrence Rebello
INTEREST
IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/Interest Calculation
• Global Settings
o Define interest calculation types
 P item interest calc
 S balance int calc
 Identifier HI for HPCL
INTEREST ON RECEIVABLES
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Interest Calculation > Interest Calculation Global
Settings
Define Interest Calculation types
Interest indicators determine whether they are to be used for the item interest calculation i.e. interest on balance after
giving effect of each dr or cr entries or account balance interest calculation i.e. interest on net debit / credit balance.
[though these indicators can also be used for interest on payables, in practice this is not normally needed]
Interest indicator is assigned to a customer account vis master data.
SAP default interest indicators are:
01standard item interest calculator calculation type – P
02standard balance interest calculator calculation type – S
o Define no ranges for interest forms - define
Define Number range for Interest forms
Number ranges defined for interest calculation are not used for any other purposes (for example, for document types). If
interest is calculated on accounts from various company codes, then you define the same number range for each
company code.
o Prepare interest on arrears calc - while preparing int on arrears calc, the
effective date should be borne in mind [backdated] o/w interest runs will not take
place as invoices are backdated. Keep Int Numerator g ON. Payment Terms
0001 & Tax Code M OFF.
Prepare Interest on Arrears calculation
Terms of interest calculation are defined for interest indicators as defined above.
Important settings:
Interest indicator 01 standard item interest calculator
Selection of Items ‘open & all cleared items’
Transfer Days days taken in bank clearing [excluded from int cal]
Tolerance Days grace days for interest trigger [do not affect overdue days]
o Prepare interest on a/c balances
o Special GL tran for int calc
• Interest Calculation
o Define reference int rates - INR for India as IND_INT
o Define time based transactions - HI for both DR & CR & enter Ref Int as defined
IND_INT.
o Enter interest values
o Special function module for interest rate determination - arrears
[DEBIT_INT_RATE_DETERMINE] / [CREDIT_INT_RATE_DETERMINE] - for
balances [INT_RATE_DETERMINE]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
46 by Lawrence Rebello
Interest Calculation
Define Reference Interest Rates
Here a reference interest rates defined by entering a key and a mnemonic name. This activity is purely informative.
Define Time based Terms (interest)
Here additional (premium) interest rates are defined for long overdue open items. This can be defined directly for each
interest indicators with or without associating it with a ‘Reference Interest rate’.
Enter Interest values
Here a rate of interest is defined for the ‘Reference Interest rate’
Specify Functional Module for Interest Rate determination
The following function modules are included in the standard system:
Transaction type Function Module
Credit int.for int.chgd on overdue items CREDIT_INT_RATE_DETERMINE
Credit int.for account balances INT_RATE_DETERMINE
Debit int.for overdue items DEBIT_INT_RATE_DETERMINE
Debit int.for account balances INT_RATE_DETERMINE
• Interest Posting
o A/R calculation of interest on arrears
 Int recd 273100
 Int paid 220000
 Customer posting open [for customers]
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Interest Calculation > Interest Posting
Interest on arrears - Customers
In this step, you define the specifications for posting the interest calculated as interest on arrears.
The account determination is carried out via the posting interface of application 0002 (interest on arrears). The following
specifications are necessary:
• Account determination keys and posting details
First you determine which account determination keys are used. For the business transaction account
determination key, 1000 (interest earned) and 2000 (interest paid) should be entered. The other account
determination keys (company code, interest indicator, business area) are optional. You use them if you want to
define interest posting in more detail.
For every combination of the account determination keys, you specify a debit posting key, a credit posting key
and account symbols (posting details). You use the account symbol 1000 for the customer posting. It is not
necessary to specify an account since the posting is made to the customer account. You do, however, have to
specify the posting keys.
• G/L accounts
For each G/L account symbol, you specify the account allocation for interest earned and interest paid in full.
You can differentiate the account specifications according to currencies.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
47 by Lawrence Rebello
o A/R balance interest calculation
 0001 interest recd 273100 1
 0002 interest paid 220000 2
 0015 calc int recd
 0016 calc int paid
 1000 customer posting + [open]
Interest on Balances – Customers
In this step, you define the specifications for posting the interest calculated on the customer account balance.
The account determination is carried out via the posting interface of application 0005 (customer interest scale). The
following specifications are necessary:
• Account determination keys and posting details
For the business transaction account determination key, you enter at least one set of posting details for the
interest earned posting and the interest paid posting respectively.
If you are using interest splitting, you should also enter a set of posting details for each of the following
business transactions:
? minus debit interest past period with post-entered value dates, minus credit interest
past period with post-entered value dates
? debit interest past period with post-entered value dates, credit interest past period
with post-entered value dates
? debit interest calculation period, credit interest calculation period.
• G/L accounts
Assign accounts in full to the account symbols for the respective interest earned posting or interest paid
posting. Only the posting key is relevant for the customer posting. It is stored in the posting details. An entry in
the G/L account field of the account allocation is not necessary here (customer posting).
• Assign Form for Int Indicator
o Ensure that Form F_DUZI_01 is assigned for HI & HPCL
o Ensure that Form F_D_INT_SCALE_00 is assigned for HB & HPCL
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Interest Calculation > Print
Assign Forms for Interest Calculation
Note the SAP standard settings:
Int ind Co code Forms
01 std item interest calculator BALC F_DUZI_01
02 std balance interest calculator BALC F_D_INT_SCALE_00
The interest indicator [ HI ] can be entered in the dunning procedure [define interest
rates], to enable calculation [not posting to customer a/c] of interest as per defined
interest parameters for inclusion in dunning letters.
Ensure customer is configured for interest id & cycle.
• SAP/Ac/FA/AR/PP/Interest calculation
o Arrears interest
o F.2A without open items
o F.2B with open items
o F.2C without postings
o F.24 free selections
 Calculation period from to
 Bill of Exch [blank]
 Int indicator HI
 Form for int calc F_DUZI_01
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
48 by Lawrence Rebello
 Create form g & F_DUZI_01
 Print form g & LP01
 Date of Issue [TO period]
 Interest Posting Date [TO period]
 Interest Posting Document Date [TO period]
 Posting Period as applicable.
 You can create a spool request for a neat letter that can be sent to the
party etc. Access from OWN SPOOL JOBS.
 You can generate a batch for subsequent batch processing by specifying
in Output Control “Acct overview printer (batch)”, and processing the
batch with System/Services/BatchInput/Sessions etc.
o F.26 Balance Interest [ F_D_INT_SCALE_00 ]
 Calc Period From to
 Summ level 2
 Ref / Addl Date 3
 Std Int Calc g
 Generate as above.
DATA ENTRY – Interest on Receivables
[SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Periodic Processing > Interest
Calculation]
Arrears Interest
Without open items F.2A
With open items F.2B
Without postings F.2C
Free selection F.24
While performing an interest run, note the following settings:
Calculation period
Interest indicator
Create Form for int cal ‘v’ & specify the relevant Form name
Print Form ‘v’ i.e. o/s balances and interest thereon can be
printed also for correspondence with customers
Acct overview printer (batch) name of a printer [batch process]
Interest posting date i.e. thru this run, interest are also posted to
customer a/c
After specifying all parameters & executing (F8), a session is created. Interest run is processed through
“Batch process” via Header-Systems > services > batch Inputs > Sessions.
Also a spool request can be created for a neat interest statement to be sent to customers. The spool
request can be accessed fro “ Own Spool Jobs”
Balance Interest F.26
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
49 by Lawrence Rebello
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
[All IMG steps are similar to as discussed in Accounts Receivable w.r.t. ‘Preparations’, ‘Invoices’ and ‘Outgoing Payments’.]
IMG/FA/ARAP/Vendor A/c’s/Master Records
o Preparation for creation of vendor master records
o Define a/c groups [ OMSG ]
 KRED Vendor [internal no assignment]
 Reco no 160000
 Down payment 170000
o Define screen layout per co [vendors]
o Define screen layout per activity [vendors]
o Create no ranges for vendor a/c’s. [ XDN1 ]
o Assign no ranges to vendor a/c groups [ OMSJ ]
 KRED 02
o IMG/FA/FA Global/Tax Sales& Purchases/Calculation
 Define tax codes for sales/purchases : I1 input tax GL a/c 154000
o Create vendor SAP/Ac/FA/AP/Master Records
 FK01 create
 Use next screen icon _ to navigate.
 Wt can be used for TDS
 Release group means vendor approval
 Check duplicate invoices for invoice & DC
 EDI electronic data interchange.
Vendor Master Record
Important settings relevant to Vendor Master:
Vendor Account Groups – As many as 18 types are available with SAP
Vendor 0001 One-time Vend (int no.) CPD
Goods Supplier 0002 One-time Vend (ext no.) CPDL
Payee 0003 Vendor (int no.) KRED
Invoicing Party 0004 etc Vendor (ext no.) LIEF, etc.
For each Account Group:
? specific “FSV Parameters w.r.t General Data, Company code data and Sales data”
are set as per the requirement, and
? it specified whether it is a one-time account
 Note that Account determination procedure is not defined for Vendors.
Reconciliation a/c 160000 (4.6c version) 11310000(4.7 version)
Data Entry
Creation of Vendors FK01
Vendor Invoice FB60 [F-43 in 4.7 version]
Vendor Account Balances FK10N
Outgoing Payments F-53 [F-58 for check printing]
 Note: For outgoing payments, a ‘House Bank’ must have been defined and created in the
company as discussed later.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
50 by Lawrence Rebello
o Create invoice SAP/Ac/FA/AP/Doc Entry
 FB60 [ use F-43 wef 470 ] create invoice [R M 400000, TAX V1]
o Outgoing Payment
 F-53 Post
 F-58 Post & Print. Print job is created. Access thru system/own spool
requests [ requires house bank creation ]
o Change co code
o Raw mat a/c 400000 change tax params as reqd
o FK10N to view balances.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
51 by Lawrence Rebello
WITHOLDING TAX
[ will be used with AP payments ]
IMG/FA/Global/Line Items/Controls
• Screen Variants
o Standard
o Austria & Switzerland
o France & Withholding Tax .
• IMG/FA/Global/WT
o Basic settings
 Maintain countries IN India [No addl WTCountry]
 Maintain types of recipients 01 individual
 Define Income types SEW1 self employed cat 1
o Calculation/Maintain Tax Codes
 Copy from GB & change, rates 2%, currency INR, posting with payment
g i.e WT at the payment stage F-58, WT code T1, official WT Code
192C, Net Base for Tax Contrib M OFF. Specifications for WT Rept keep
OFF. [ W1 ]
 Maintain formulas is not necessary if a direct %age is specified above.
o Postings
 Define A/c’s for withholding tax
 Tran QST Dr 177000 Cr 177000 PK 40/50 Rules Dr/Cr
o Reporting
 Define recepient codes
• 00 / / 01 / IN / Individual
 Define forms for WT N/a. [ will be reqd for reports ]
 Assign forms for WT reporting N/a
 Assign Header / Footer Text – copy from default.
o Define WT details in Vendor - FK02
o When entering an invoice FB60. System will inform that WT is applicable for the
Vendor.
o While using F-58 WT is calculated and amount payable is automatically reduced.
o In case of part payment, WT A/c is credited when the payment is finally cleared.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
52 by Lawrence Rebello
EXTENDED WITHOLDING TAX
IMG/FA/Global/Extended WT
• Basic Settings
o Check WT countries
EXTENDED WITHHOLDING TAX
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Basic Settings
Check Withholding Tax Country
It may happen that incase of foreign branches, withholding tax rules of that foreign country is applicable. Hence by
assigning that country here, rules as prevalent in that company are also made available to the Company (global group).
For e.g.
If an Indian parent is having a branch in US, the assigning would be as follows:
Country w/tax country Description
IN IN India
IN US USA
o Define official WT codes [ WT Keys 194C contractors ][ Page: 52
[0]Define Official Withholding Tax Key wef 470 ]
Define official withholding tax keys
Here a tax key is defined for withholding tax types. The withholding tax keys correspond to the withholding tax laws
according to which tax is withheld. The system can therefore assign the withholding tax items to the correct withholding
tax return.
SAP delivers standard settings for official withholding tax keys for India, for eg.
WT key Description
194C TDS on Contractors, etc
o Check recepient types [ Co companies, OT others ]
 The type of recipient categorizes the vendor, which is necessary for
printing the withholding tax form.
Check Recipient types
Here recipient types are (Individual, Company, etc) are defined for every “withholding tax type” [defined later].
Activity :
WHT type Recipient type Description
W1 CO Companies
W1 OT Others
(defined later)
o Check income types
Check Income types
Type of income subject to withholding tax, for example income from
• Interest received
• Work as an artiste
• Self-employed work, etc
SAP standard type SEW1 i.e. Self-employed category
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
53 by Lawrence Rebello
• Calculation
o Withholding tax type
 Define WT type for invoice posting - relevant
• In this activity you define the withholding tax type for posting at the
time of invoicing. Keep Post W/Tax amount ON. This will be
relevant for Vendors, where TDS has to be calculated at posting
time [ no payment ], but in case of Customers also, this will not
hold good.
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Calculation > Withholding Tax
types
Check WT types for Invoice posting
WT types defined here will have effect at the time of INVOICE posting and not at the time of Payment. This has to be
activated for VENDORS as in India, TDS is deductible at the time of credit only (assuming payment is not before credit
entry in the books).
WT types also help in classifying the following:
? The time at which WT is posted i.e. at invoice or at payment
? Basis at which base amount is calculated, and
? Basis of accumulation, if applicable.
 Note: ‘WT types’ are different from ‘WT codes’ to which WT % rates are allocated.
Activity :
Populate W1, etc as defined above for posting at the time of Invoice.
WHT Type Description
W1 Sec 194 – Contractor TDS
W2 Sec 194 – Contractor s/charge
Double click to get inside
Note the settings
Calculation
Net Amount invoice amount considered ‘net of TDS’ and WT calculated accordingly
Gross Amount v
Tax Amount used in case of surcharge
Post WT amount v
Accumulation type “no accumulation” TDS is calculated on each transaction
[If this is selected, invoices are accumulated on periodical basis or till the ‘max acc value’ specified, if any and
then TDS deducted at the end of either condition]
Define minimum / maximum amount
Base amount WT amount
WT code level v WT code level v
Type level Type level
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
54 by Lawrence Rebello
 Define WT type for payment posting – relevant for customers with dedu at
receipt entry.
Check WT types for Payment Posting
WT types defined here will have effect at the time of PAYMENT posting and not at the time of Invoice posting.
This has to be activated for CUSTOMERS as in India, customer is first booked for gross receivable and only at
the payment, TDS, if deducted, is entered.
Activity :
Settings are made here also (with a different WT type) for all types defined for ‘Invoice Posting’ case. All
settings are more or less similar.
 Define exch rate type for WT type M
Define Exchange rate type for WT type
Not needed for TDS in case of payments to nationals in India.
Defined in case of TDS on payments made to Non-residents which is defined by a separate WT type.
 Assign condition type to WT type
• You only need to carry out the following activity if you are
implementing FI together with SD.
o Witholding tax codes
 Define WT codes [ if %age is defined, no formula needed ]
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Calculation >
Withholding Tax Code
Define WT codes
Here WT codes (i.e. rates, etc) are defined for each WT type defined earlier.
 Note: A business transaction can be assigned only one WT code per WT type. If more that
one code (rate) has to be applied, these must be represented by different WT types.
Activity :
WT type WT code
W1 W1 Sec194 - Contractor TDS
% subject to tax 100%
posting indicator 1 i.e. standard posting – bank/customer/vendor line
items reduced
WT rate 2%
Income type SEW1
 Define formula for calculating WT
o Witholding Tax Base Amount
 Define processing key for modified net amount
• Modified means that an extra amount is added to the net amount
 Define processing key for modified tax amount
 Potray dependencies between WT types
o Minimum & Maximum amounts
 Define min/max amounts for WT types
 Define min/max amounts for WT codes
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
55 by Lawrence Rebello
• Company Code
o Assign WT types to co code – Add if necessary.
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Company Code
Assign WT types to Company Code
Activity :
Assign (all) WT type to Company code
double click to get inside settings
Recipient type CO i.e. for every recipient type there has to be a
separate WT type (as interpreted earlier)
w/tax agent v imp for telling SAP to deduct TDS on vendor
payments, unless selected – no TDS
subject to W/tax v -do- (in case of customers)
o Activate extended WT – you cannot then revert to STD WT.
Activate Extended Withholding Tax in Company Code
 Note: Once activated, it cannot be de-activated later.
• Postings
o Accounts for WT – [ can be separate for Cust / Vend ]
 Define a/c for WT to be paid over-177000
 Define a/c for WT gross up offset entry - 204000
 Define a/c for self WT
 Define a/c for WT offsetting entry – 204000
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Posting > Accounts for WT
Define Accounts for Withholding Tax to be paid over
Here G/L accounts are defined for a combination of WT type and WT code.
Activity :
WT type WT code G/L a/c
W1 W1 177000 (in 4.6c version) 13113940 (in 4.7 version)
IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Posting > India
Specify Document types & G/L accounts for WT (TDS) adjustment entries
Adjustments for short-deduction of TDS should be made here and posting should be made to a separate G/L a/c with
“post automatically” off.
[note that in case of TDS accounts, normally “post automatically” will be on as TDS is internally calculated & posted by
SAP]
Activity :
Document type SA
G/L a/c 14880000
o Certificate numbering for WT [ not reqd ]
 Define numbering class - 101
 Define numbering groups - 000001
 Define numbering ranges - 01
 Assign numbering groups to number class
 Assign numbering concept to co code country [K002]
 Numbering concept option 2 - Assign Numbering Class – Add
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
56 by Lawrence Rebello
• Reporting [Extended WT]
o Define recepient code for EWT – W1/ 10 / / co / co / company
o Define forms for WT
o Define form names for EWT reporting
o Assign forms for WT certificates
o Define minimum amounts for WT type
o Define minimum amounts for WT code
• Generic WT reporting
o Define recepient code for EWT
o Define output groups
o Define certificate numbering for EWT
o Define forms for WT reporting
o Define file format for WT reporting
o Define header & footer texts for forms
o Define minimum amounts for WT Type
o Define minimum amounts for WT code
• Define WT details in Vendor - FK02 [ select WT screen at the beginning ]
• When entering an invoice FB60. System will inform that WT is applicable for the Vendor.
• While posting, WT is credited, and Vendor reduced.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
57 by Lawrence Rebello
HOUSE BANK CONFIGURATION
FBZP all house bank info.
IMG/FA/BANK ACCOUNTING/Bank Accounts/
• Define house banks
o Delete the default German Banks if any & create new [del from bottom] [You may not
be able to delete all the info copied. After defining the House Bank etc, commence deletion from bottom up [ ie
value date upwards. ] In the HB definition keep bills of exchange off. In the Payment method / Country, add all
GERMAN [DE] types. In the Payment Method / Co Code, all DE types will be preset. As there would be a
problem of 196600 not being a reco a/c , goto FS00 and change 196600 to be a reco a/c. In Define Reco A/c’s
without Automatic Payments, add 196600 to the list. Deletion will now be possible under Setup Bank Deter for
Payment Trans.}
o A/c id if reqd 1111
HOUSE BANK
IMG > Financial Accounting > Bank Accounting > Bank Accounts
Define House Banks
Each house bank of a company code is represented by a bank ID in the SAP system, every account at a house bank by an
account ID and are used say, for automatic payment transactions to determine the bank details for payment.
Important settings: "bank key"
For Domestic banks Bank number
(However, domestic bank can have a/c in foreign currency)
For Foreign banks SWIFT code
 Note: Assign a G/L account for the specified bank account. The G/L account is to be managed in the
same currency as the account at the bank.
• Outgoing payments configuration
Outgoing Payments
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Outgoing Payments > Auto Outgoing Payments >
Payment Method / Bank Selection
[Set up all Company codes for payment transactions is similar to as discussed in Accounts Receivable]
Set up Payment methods per Country for Payment Transactions
The payment method determines how payments are to be made, e.g. by Check, Bank transfer or Bill of exchange.
Payment methods are entered in the master records of customers and vendors in order to specify how payments are
made. If an open item is to be paid using a specific payment method, enter it in the open item. The terms which have
been defined for the payment method must be satisfied for the payment.
All payment methods are displayed in the customer or vendor master record in the screen for selecting the payment
method. Here you select the required payment method by marking it; the system transfers the payment methods to the
customer/vendor master record.
Important settings:
Required entries in the master record – such as Bank details, SWIFT code or collection authorization.
 Note: If the required details have not been entered in the master record, the payment method
cannot be used.
Posting specifications i.e. Document types – ZP for Payment posting, ZA for clearing payments
Set up Payment methods per Company code for payment transactions
In this activity, you specify which payment method can be used per company code and determine the conditions under
which a payment method should be used.
Important Settings: Minimum & Maximum amount limits for payments
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
58 by Lawrence Rebello
 Note: A maximum amount must be specified otherwise the payment method cannot be used. If you
specify the payment method in an open item, the payment program ignores the amounts you enter
here.
Optimization
• by bank groups – If you optimize by bank groups, money is transferred from the house bank to the
business partner's bank in the shortest possible time. For this to be possible, you assign all banks in
the master records to a bank group defined by you.
• by postal codes – If you optimize by postal codes, the house bank selection is determined by the
business partner's domicile. If you select the "Optimization by postal codes" field, you can go directly
to the activity for assigning house banks to an interval of postal codes.
Foreign payment/Foreign currency payment
If you specify that the payment method can also be used for foreign currencies, all currencies are permitted.
However you can control this by specifying certain currencies per payment method and country in the activity “Set Up
Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions”. Only payments in these specified currencies are then made
using this payment method.
 Note: If the payment method only permits local currency payments, the specified currencies are
ignored.
o IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/OP/Auto OP/
o Payment method / Bank selection for payment Prg
o Setup all co codes for payment transactions
 Tolerance days 7 vendors FP customers FPJ
o Setup paying co codes for payment transactions
o Setup payment methods per country for payment transactions
 Currencies allowed [ blank = all curr allowed ]
 ZP payment posting, ZV payment clearing
 Copy one by one from GB for IN
o Setup payment methods per co code for payment transactions : maximum
amount 5000000/-.
o Setup bank determination for payment transactions
 Ranking order : delete & create for C cheque [ deletion in reverse order
i.e. value date upwards ]
 Bank accounts : 113100
 Available amounts : approx amount available for making payments.
Days indicate interval of getting the bank statement for analysis etc.
 Value date : days taken for local clearance etc.
 Expenses / charges : useful for bill of exchange payments. Create here
and access in available amounts.
o Number ranges for cheques : [ FCHI ]
IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/OP/AutoOP/Payment_Media/Check Management
 Define no ranges for cheques : lot 101 chq no from 100000 to 100100
 Ensure vendor is created
 Raise invoice thru FB60
 SAP/Ac/FA/AP/DocEntry/OP
• F-53 post
• F-58 post and print cheque [ enter details & process open
items]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
59 by Lawrence Rebello
 SAP/Ac/FA/AP/Account/F-44 for clearing payment to vendor thru FBCJ.
WT will however not appear. [ This is a substitute for FB15 on the
customer side. ]
 Automatic Payment Run :
 Note: AP/Periodic Proc/F110 Auto Payment Prog – Give run date and ID like Mth, Qt etc,
enter Co Codes, Vendor [ master data must contain paymt meth ] from to, Addl log Vend
from to, PrintOut Prg RFFOUS_C [as shown on payMeth] enter variant and Maintain TOP
for Chq lot etc. Enter details, Output Control DO NOT VOID CHEQUES.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
60 by Lawrence Rebello
BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT
SAP/FA/Banking/MasterData/BankMasterData
• FI01 create. Instead of the above, you can also create the house bank thru
IMG/FA/BankAccounting/BankAccounts
• Define house bank - When the house bank is entered, click create button to create. The
other details on left like bank a/c con be copied wherever possible.
• IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/IP/AutoIP/Payment Method/Bank selection for payment prg
o Setup all co codes for payment transactions
 FPJ customers
 FP vendors
o Setup paying co codes for payment transactions
 Copy from …..
o Setup payment methods per country for payment transactions
 Copy IN cheque exists
 Possible currencies - include all possible currencies. If not set, payment
cannot be made in that currency.
o Setup payment method per co code for payment transactions
 C cheque
 Ranking order 1
 Min & max amounts for payment
 Optimize using postal code for faster searches.
o Setup bank determination for payment transactions
 Bank a/c create
 Available amounts for C
 Value dates
• IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/OP/AutoOp/PaymentMedia/CheckManagement
o Define no ranges for cheques
o Pass some bank entries thru FBCJ [cash journal]
• SAP/AC/Treasury/CashManagement/Incomings/ManualBankStatement
o FF67 enter
 Beginning balance = 0
 End balance = total or earlier entry
 In Further Processing keep Bank Posting g ON.
 The difference enter into the statement with +=dr & -=cr
 Save statement.
 Post statement from Bank Statement TOP.
o FEBA post process. Value date is important, as the matching takes place as per
the value dates.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
61 by Lawrence Rebello
FOREIGN CURRENCY VALUATION AT CLOSING
At specific intervals [monthly,quarterly,annually], open items [customer/vendor] must be valued
and loss/gain reported - FASB52.
• FB70 - invoice in a different currency is to be valued and posted in co currency.
• SAP/Ac/FA/AR/Environment/Current Settings
o S_BCE_68000174 enter exch rates [OB08 ]
o Exch type “M” from USD to INR. Rate entered will generate loss/gain.
• SAP/Ac/FA/AR/PP/Closing/Valuate
o F.05 open item in foreign currency
 Valuation Method KTO - FC Bal per Account 10 Co Code Curr.
 Create Postings & Reverse Postings ON.
 Selections – Valuate Customer open items
 FASB52 Exch Cur Type M
 Process sessions and view doc ext.
• In case the customer is also a vendor
o Closing/Regroup - F101 receivables / payables
User can pass a reversal entry [ if reqd ] the next day, thereby nullifying the
loss/gain entries passed earlier.
FOREIGN CURRENCY VALUATION AT CLOSING
Valuation of open items at closing date (B/S date) at exchange rate prevalent on the closing date is done as follows:
Set Exchange rates
[SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Environment > Current Settings]
Here an exchange rate can be defined for an ‘exchange rate type’ and with a validity period. Any document posted within
this period will be converted at this rate for posting purposes.
Exchange rate types are:
Standard Bank selling rate B
Standard Bank buying rate G
Standard average rate M
 Note: However in real-time, this field is linked to an on-line system and reflects real-time rate at any
point of time.
Valuate Open Items in Foreign Currency F.05
[SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Periodic Processing > Closing > Valuate]
Process this step after specifying all parameters like, valuation date, posting date, open item selection, FASB exchange
rate type, etc.
It will give a document extract with closing value of open items as well as “Foreign Exchange Loss/Gain”
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
62 by Lawrence Rebello
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION
IMG/ES/Definitions
• Financial Accounting
o Define credit control area [sd updation 000012] [ OB45/OB01/OB02 ]
SALES & DISTRIBUTION
IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Financial Accounting
Define Credit Control Area OB45
The Credit Control Area is an organizational unit that specifies and checks a credit limit for customers. Credit limit, Risk
group (create – OB01) and Credit representative group (create – OB02) all are specific to a Credit Control Area.
Whenever a new customer is created and any CCA is assigned in master record, all parameters, which are specific to such
CCA, get assigned to the customer automatically.
A CCA can include one or more Company codes but not vice-versa i.e. if “all Co codes” is selected ‘v’ while defining a
CCA, it would be applicable to all company codes defined in a Company. (i.e. it can be available to ‘one or all’, but not
‘some’ company codes). Within a CCA, the credit limits must be specified in the same currency.
The credit control area 0001 is defined in the SAP standard system.
 Note: SAP has defined 3 update types for SD updation – 000012, 000015, 000018
000012 000015 000018
Order Document v v
(increases open order value)
Delivery Document v v
(inc open delivery value and red open order value)
Billing Document v v
(inc open billing doc value and red open delivery value)
FA Document v v v
(inc open item value and red open billing doc value)
• Controlling - only if you think necessary
o Copy delete check co area [copy from 0001]
 Top button structure, templates
 Co code
 Plant
 Sales orgn, dist channel. Division
 Co area co code [not necessary unless you want to enable controlling]
 Structure, navigation gives a tree effect
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
63 by Lawrence Rebello
• Logistics – general
o Define valuation level
 Stock valuation, keep valuation as at plant
o Define plant [necessary before copy o/w DEM & German plant
o Copy delete check plant [ OX10 ]
IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Logistics – General
Define Valuation Level (w.r.t. Stocks)
SAP has defined valuation level as Plant by default. Also in two cases valuation level must be Plant :
? To use the SAP Application component for Production Planning / Costing, or
? If SAP system is a Retail one
Define, Copy, Delete, Check, Plant OX10
• A Plant is an operating area or branch within a company. To use the SD module a Plant must be
created.
• It has got different meaning in different SAP modules:
? MM : Location where material stock is kept
? PP : Manufacturing facility
? SD : Location from where material and services are distributed and corresponds to a
distribution centre.
 Note: Even is case of service organization, Plant has to be defined and here it would mean the
‘Location’ services are rendered from.
• Data specific to a Plant are – Address / Language / Country / Own Material Master Record.
• The Plant plays an important role in Material Valuation / Inventory Management / MRP /
Production / Costing / Plant Maintenance
Company Code
?
? Plant / Plants ? Shipping Points ? Other Plants
?
Storage Locations
Activity :
Plant should be copied from SAP standard company 0001 (as creation of Plant needs creation of a lot of tables).
 Note: Before copying it is important to define one Plant otherwise it would copy all the German plant
name, add, currency, etc.
o Define locations [ OX09 ]
Define Location OX09
• A location allows a plant to be classified according to spatial or situation criteria.
• Locations are used for informative assignment only. You can only use locations to structure a
matchcode or as parameter criteria in reporting. You cannot derive any functionality from locations in terms of
hierarchies, etc.
• The following master data objects can be assigned to these locations:
? Asset master records of Asset Management / Pieces of equipment
? Functional locations / Work centers
? Production resources / Tools
Business areas /
Sales Org / Distribn
Channels
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
64 by Lawrence Rebello
o Define copy delete check divisions [ OVXB ] [goto next i.e. SD & copy from
templates]
Define, Copy, Delete, Check Division OVXB
• The division is one of the organizational units in Sales & Distribution that is used to group material and services.
(eg motorcycles, spare parts, services, etc)
• It is also required for business area account assignment for logistics transactions in Financial Accounting. The
area for the material is determined via the plant and the division defined in the material master record.
• A division can represent a product group, for eg, one can restrict price agreement with a customer to a certain
division or can conduct statistical analysis by a division, etc.
• Creation of a material is specific to a set of “Plant, Division, Sales Organization & Distribution Channel”.
• Sales & distribution
o Define copy delete check sales organization [ OVX5 ] [structure/templates]
IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Sales & Distribution
Define, Copy, Delete, Check Sales Organization OVX5
• Sales organization is an organizational unit in Logistics which groups the enterprise according to the
requirements of sales & distribution. A sales organization is responsible for distributing goods and
services, therefore it is also liable for the sold product and responsible for the customer’s right of
recourse.
• The sales organization is also used to take for example, a regional, national or international sub-division
of markets into account.
• A Sales organization is specific to a Company code. However, one or more Plants can be assigned to
one Sales organization.
• A Sales organization has its own customer and material master data as well as its own conditions and
pricing.
• All items in a sales & distribution document, that is, all items of an order, delivery or a billing document
are specific to a Sales organization.
• A Sales organization is the highest summation level (after the Client level) for sales statistics with their
own statistics currency.
A Sales organization cannot share any master data with other sales organizations. The master data must be
created separately. The data for a distribution channel or a division can, however, be created for several
distribution channels or divisions.
Activity:
Copy from SAP standard Sales organization 0001 (as creation of sales organization contains lot of
tables).
Parameters are name, address (Indian) & calendar (99 – Intl calendar).
o Define copy delete check dist channel [ OVX1 ]
Define, Copy, Delete, Check Distribution Channel OVX1
• A Distribution channel can be allocated to one or more Sales organizations. In turn, one or more plants can be
allocated to a Distribution channel.
• A Distribution channel has its own master data for customers or materials as well as own conditions and
pricing.
• All items of a sales document is specific to a Distribution channel. The entire sales document is therefore
entered for a distribution channel.
• This organizational unit is a means thru which saleable material or services reach the customer. And is used to
? Define responsibility
? Achieve flexible pricing, and
? Differentiate sales statistics
Activity:
Copy from SAP standard Distribution Channel 01 (as creation of sales organization contains lot of tables) Parameters are
only name but no address.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
65 by Lawrence Rebello
o Maintain sales office [for service] [ OVX1 ]
o Maintain sales group [for service] [ OVX4 ]
• Material management
o Maintain storage locations [goods stored for delivery] [ OX09 ]
IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Material Management
Maintain Storage Locations OX09
• Storage Locations are specific to a Plant and there may be one or more storage locations within a plant.
• It is possible to store material data specific to a storage location.
• Stocks are managed only on a quantity basis and not on a value basis at storage location level. Physical inventories
are carried out at storage location level.
Activity:
Copy from SAP standard Storage Location 0001 (as creation of sales organization contains lot of tables)
Parameters are name and address.
o Maintain purchasing organization [N/A] [ OX08 ]
• Logistics execution
o Define copy delete warehouse no [N/A]
o Define copy delete shipping point [ OVXD / EC07 ]
IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Logistics – Execution
Define, Copy, Delete, Check Shipping Point
• Shipping point is place from where goods are finally transported for delivery. Shipping point is
defined for transportation scheduling and delivery scheduling. It can be a loading ramp, a mail depot, or a rail depot. It
can also be, for example, a dedicated group of employees responsible only for organizing urgent deliveries.
• It is a physical place and should be near to the delivering Plant. One or more shipping points can be
assigned to a Plant and vice-versa.
Important parameters :
Loading time: Loading time is the difference between goods issue time/date and Loading time/date. Options available
are:
• No loading time
• Route-dependent loading time
• Route-independent loading time, and
• Default from shipping line
Pick-pack time: Pick-pack time is the difference between material availability time/date (after being issued) and loading
time/date. Options available are:
• No Pick-pack time
• Route-dependent Pick-pack time
• Route-independent Pick-pack time, and
• Default from shipping line
Departure zone: Departure zone is defined based on region where delivery originates from i.e, where shipping point of a
delivery is located and the place it has to go. SAP automatically proposes a transportation route based on departure
zone, country of origin / destination, shipping conditions and transportation group.
Activity:
Copy from SAP standard Shipping Point 0001 (as creation of sales organization contains lot of tables).
Parameters are name and address.
o Maintain loading point
o Maintain transportation planning point
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
66 by Lawrence Rebello
IMG/ES/Assignment
IMG > Enterprise Structure > Assignment
Here various organizational units as defined above are assigned to higher organizational units.
Activity :
Financial Accounting
Assign Co code ? Credit control area
Logistics – General
Assign Plant ? Co code
Sales & Distribution : Assign
Sales org ? Co code
Dist channel ? Sales org
Division ? Sales org
Setup sales area ? Combination of SO, Distr Channel & Div
 Note: Sales area is a not given any separate name, it is just a combination (SO, DC & Div), which defines the
distribution channel a sales organization uses to sell products from a certain division. Each sales document is assigned to
exactly one sales area, and this cannot be changed later.
Sales area ? Credit control area
Sales org & Dist channel ? Plant
 Note: In case of copying from SAP standard, it may happen that the target org unit are assigned to other existing
org units incl SAP standard units and vice versa. Here it becomes necessary to clear unwanted assignments from both
places.
 Note: In FI assignment screen is presented in ‘Table’ form while in case of SD, Logistics, etc it is presented in
‘Tree’ form.
Logistics – Execution
Assign Shipping Point ? Plant
 Note: While copying from 0001, you may end up with multiple shipping points, which can be cleared by IMG >
LE > Shipping > Picking > Determine Pick Loc > Assign Pick Loc : DELETE unwanted assignments & go back to
assignment of SP. Unwanted SP can now be deleted.
To clear problem of SP determination:
IMG > LE > Shipping > Basic Shipping Functions > SP & GRP Determination > Assign SP – DEASSIGN and DELETE as above.
Shipping condition problem:
IMG > LE > Shipping > Define Shipping condition by sales doc type : select sales doc type as ‘OR’ & Shipping Condition as ‘01’.
The above would normally happen when 0001 is copied & all associated SP will be assigned. These multiple SP create a problem at
Sales Order creation (VA01) & Outbound Delivery (VL01N).
• Financial accounting
o Assign co code to company
o Assign co code to credit control area [ OB38 ]
• Controlling [only if necessary]
o Assign co code to co area [ OXO6 ]
o Assign control area to operating concern
• Logistics – general
o Assign plant to co code [ OX18 ]
• Sales & distribution
o Assign sales org to co code [ OVX3 ]
o Assign dist channel to sales org [ OVXK ]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
67 by Lawrence Rebello
o Assign div to sales org [ OVXA ]
o Setup sales area [ combination of SO & div] [ OVXG / OVXM ]
o Assign sales office to sales area [ OVXM ]
o Assign sales group to sales office [ OVXJ ]
o Assign sales org & dist channel to plant [ OVX6 ]
o Assign sales area to credit control area [ OVFL ]
• Logistics execution
o Assign shipping point to plant [ OVXC ]
 Note:
o While copying from 0001, you may end up with multiple shipping points, which can be cleared
by LE/Shipping/Picking/Determine Pick Loca/Assign PL - DELETE unwanted
assignments & go back to assignment of SP. There you will now be able to delete unwanted SP.
To clear problem of SP determination [ OVL2 ] -
LE/Shipping/Basic_Shipping_Functions/SP&GRP_Determination/Assign SP -
DEASSIGN and DELETE as above. Shipping condition problem
IMG/LE/Shipping/Define_Shipping_condition_by_sales_doc_type select sales doc type [ZOR] &
enter SC 01. The above would normally happen when 0001 is copied & all associated SP will be
assigned. These multiple SP create a problem at VA01 & VL01N.
• IMG/SD/Master data
o Define common dist channel [IMG/SD/Master Data - common master data in DC Div should be
defined & assigned to a co code. Master data forms the basis for SD processing. Precisely maintained data
simplifies & accelerates the operations procs in daily business.}
IMG > Sales & Distribution > Master Data
Define common Distribution channel (& Division )
Here condition data and customer & material master data defined in one Distribution channel (or Division) can be
assigned to other distribution channels (or Divisions) also. However this sharing is under one sales organization and not
cross sales org.
Note: Even if there is only one distribution channel, this IMG step is important.
 Activity:
Sales org Distr Chl DChl-cond DChl-cust/mt
0001 01 01 01
(similarly for Division)
o Define common divisions
• IMG/ES/Assignment/Consistency Check
o Check Enterprise Structure for S & D. Execute & clear all errors.
IMG > Enterprise Structure > Consistency Check
Consistency check is done for ensuring if all assignments regarding enterprise structure in sales & distribution (only) is
proper. If there is any error SAP points those errors in this IMG function. In case of any error (in allocating organization
units) it is recommended to correct errors before proceeding with further IMG activity.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
68 by Lawrence Rebello
SAP/Logistics/Material Management/Material
• Create general MM01 immediately / MM11 schedule
 Note:
o Use OMSY for cur yr dates. Year has to be closed under MM, so that year can be current etc. To
change dates. LogGen/MatlMaster/Tools/Initialise_Period MMPI / MMPV. In case all screens do not
come up for MM01, LogGen/MatlMaster/BasicSettings/MatlTypes/Define Attributes of Matl Types,
click FERT & select the screens you want. DO NOT TOUCH WH.
Create General (Material) MM01
[SAP Menu > Logistics > Material Management > Material Master > Material]
• Material is created w.r.t Industry type (eg FMCG, Pharma, etc) and Material type (eg raw mat, finished goods,
spare parts, services, etc)
• Change number: Creating a material with a ‘change number’ allows SAP to
 Make changes effective from a date or on some parameter (eg serial no)
 Keep log and documentation of changes made, etc.
• A Material can also be copied from some other existing material.
• Required views (for master data entry) can be selected for each material created based on their industry &
material type.
• Material is created specific to a Plant & Storage Location.
• Select Organisational Levels [top butt] for Sorg, DC,Div
• Select views & data : screens
o Basic data 1
• Base unit G
• Division
• Matl group [with & without tax]
• Gross wt
• Net wt
• Wt unit
• Gen Item Cat Group - NORM
Important minimum settings:
Basic Data 1:
Base Unit of Measurement gram, kg meter, etc
Material Group (defined earlier) to group mat/services with similar attributes (01)
Division Product division
GenItmCatGrp Item category defined for sales doc processing
(Item category is defined to determine whether a sales activity is distr channel dependent, packing dependent,
delivery process required or not say, services, that don’t require delivery processing, etc. Define NORM here)
Weight specifications gross wt, net wt, weight unit, etc.
o Basic data 2
• DG dangerous goods [ not reqd, but if entered, may cause probs ]
o Classification - not required do not enter
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
69 by Lawrence Rebello
o Sales org 1
• Base unit G
• Sales unit EA [on exit define EA=nG]
• Division
Sales Org 1:
Base UoM gm, etc (come auto, as defined above)
Division Product Div (come auto, as defined above)
Sales Unit EA (each), DZ (dozen), etc
(on exiting this screen, it asks to define 1 EA = n UoM)
Material Group 01 (come auto, as defined above)
o Sales org 2
• Gen Item Cat Group – NORM
o Sales general / plant
• Shipping data 0001 on pallets
• Availability check 02 Individual Requirements.
Sales–Gen / Plant:
Availability check 01 (individual requirement)
(this function specify SAP whether and how to check mat availability and generate requirement for Material
Planning)
Base UoM, gross wt, net wt comes auto (as defined above)
Transportation Group 0001 (on pallets)
Loading Group 0001 (on crane)
(specific transportation and loading requirement group that can be allocated to many materials must have been
defined earlier.)
 Note: “Sales : General/Plant” data is also relevant for sales & distribution but is valid for respective
delivering Plant.
o Foreign trade export
• Country of origin IN
• Region 10 Karnataka [o/w while saving a message reg foreign goods]
Foreign Trade Export
Country of origin Country from where material is bought
Region of origin(optional) Region of country (as mentioned above)
(in case of national goods if this is not defined, SAP gives a message as foreign goods require some certificate
as per IMPEX procs)
o Sales Text - n/a
o MRP1 [mat requirement plan]
• MRP proc PD/ND
• MRP controller 001
• Lot size DY [dynamic]
• Ordering Costs 100
• Storage Costs Indicator 1
MRP1 (Material Requirement Planning)
MRP type PD (activates MRP)
Lot size DY (dynamic)
MRP Controller group responsible for MRP
Ordering cost as desired
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
70 by Lawrence Rebello
o MRP2
• Proc type X inhouse, external prodn, both etc
• Schedule Margin Key 000
• [Message of 0 prodn inhouse is ok.]
MRP2
Procurement type X (E-inhouse, F-external, X-both etc)
Schedule margin key 000
(key that determine the float required for scheduling an order)
o MRP3 - forecast requirements
• Periodic indicator M monthly
• Availability check 02 Indl requests
• Pl conv factor 1 PL Plant [only if reqd]
MRP3
Period Indicator M (monthly)
(period in which material’s consumption values and forecast values are managed)
Availability check 02 (comes auto, as defined above)
Planning conv factor eg. 100 g = 1 kg, etc
(if there is a difference in UoM in present material and UoM of MRP)
o MRP4 n/a
MRP4
Forecast model D (constant)
Historical periods any (past periods used for forecasting)
Forecast period any (future periods for forecasting)
Initialization X (by system), M(manual)
Tracking limit amount by which forecast may deviate
Model selection used to initialize forecast based on a model
(T – Trend, S – Seasonal fluctuation, A- Both trend & seasonal fluctuation)
Selection Procedure
(1 – SAP will look for trends/seasonal fluctuations first and then use a relating forecast
model, 2 – use all forecast model)
o Quality management n/a
o Forecasting
• Historical periods 60
• Forecasts 12
• Forecast model D constant
• Control data initialization X [by system]
• Tracking limit [ 4.000 ], analytical model [ 2 ]
o Work scheduling n/a
o Plant data/storage1 n/a
o Plant data/storage2 n/a
o Warehouse mgmt 1 [do not configure]
o Warehouse mgmt 2 [do not configure]
o Accounting1
• Currency INR
• Cost price xxxx
• Cur period 03 1998
• Current valuation M BLANK
• Valuation class 7920 [for finished goods FERT]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
71 by Lawrence Rebello
• Price control S std price [will not be allowed if valuation category in
general data is filled up]
• Price unit 1 moving avg price
• Prev period 02 1998
• Total stock, total value
• Valuation class 7920 [if left blank, MB1C error]
• Prod stk val class 7920
• VC Stock val 7920
Accounting 1
Base UoM g (come auto, as defined above)
Currency INR (come auto, as defined above)
Current period
Division 01 (come auto, as defined above)
Valuation Class 7920 (for Finished Goods)
Price control S (standard cost) – used to value inventory
(will not be allowed if ‘valuation category’ in the same screen is selected)
Standard price as desired
Valuation class for Sales order 7920 (standard cost)
Valuation class for Projected stock 7920 (standard cost)
 Note: With the above minimum settings, a F/G material can be created.
 Note: Data other than specifically mentioned above are also relevant and valid for respective
……………………… organizational units.
o Accounting 2 plant stock
o Costing 1 n/a
o Costing 2 n/a
• SAP/Logistics/MaterialManagement/InventoryManagement/Environment
o Stock MMBE check stock
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
72 by Lawrence Rebello
• SAP/Logistics/SD/MasterData/BusPartners/Customers/Create
o VD01 S&D
• On selection SOLD TO PARTY - Screens
• General data
• Recon a/c 140000
• Trans payment 0001
• Sales area data, sales office, group etc
• Address
• Control data
• Marketing
• Unloading points
• Export data
• Contact persons
• Partner Functions [ enter SP, BP, PY, SH as sold to party, bill to,
payer & ship to with number INTERNAL ]
You should have already created a customer under FD01, & entered the co
code data, as the above are linked to a sales area, and not co code. [VD01 –
sales areas, XD01 all areas]
• Shipping point - only complete delinery, unlimited tolerance
• Billing document
o Inv date 99 [intl]
o Inco terms EXW WORKS
o Payment terms 0001 Immediate
• Acct assignment group 01 domestic revenues
SAP/Logistics/SD/MasterData/Agreement/CustomerMaterialInformation
• VD51 create [ to substitute technical material with brand name. VD51 will work after
VD01]
Create Customer Material Info Record VD51
[SAP Menu > Logistics > SD > Master Data > Agreements > Customer Material Information]
Any material with a technical name (as created under MM01) can be substituted with a “brand name”
 Note: VD51 will work only after a customer has been created.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
73 by Lawrence Rebello
INTEGRATION SALES & DISTRIBUTION WITH FI
• IMG/SD/BasicFunctions/AcAssignment-Costing/Revenue A/c Determination
o Check master data for Ac Assignment
 Material AA group 01 trading groups [mfg], 02 performances [ser]
 Customers AA group domestic,foreign, affiliated [CC]
INTEGRATION OF SALES & DISTRIBUTION (SD) WITH FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (FI)
IMG > SD > Basic Function > Account Assignment / Costing > Revenue Account Determination
Check Master data for Account assignment (Revenue Determination)
Material Account Assignment group & Customer Account Assignment group:
• SAP uses this parameter (group) when creating an accounting document from a billing (sales)
document. In case of each of these, one ‘alphanumeric’ key can be defined which can have upto ‘two’ characters and a
description.
• Revenue accounts have been sub-divided into FI and CO, hence account groups have to be defined
in co-ordination with FI & CO.
• Example Account groups can be:
Material 01 Finished Products (FERT)
02 Packaging material (VERP), etc
Customer 01 Domestic Revenues
02 Foreign Revenues, etc
• make sure that account group keys are entered in the Material master and Customer master record.
o Define dependencies for revenue a/c determination
 Display, create, change - field catalogue [ N/A ]
o Define access sequence & a/c determination types
 Maintain access sequences
• KOFI A/c determination
• KOFR
o Define A/c determination types
 KOFI
 KOFR
Define Access sequence and Account determination types
Maintain Access sequences for Account determination: SAP standard Access sequence for Account determination is
available with key “KOFI”.
Define Account determination type: Here condition types can be defined to be used by Access sequences (as defined
above). For simplicity sake, define a condition type “KOFI” (Account determination with CO) & “KOFK” (Account
determination with CO) and assign it the access sequence KOFI (SAP standard – as defined above).
Note: In Account determination procedure, under ‘requirement’ field, KOFI will be assigned “3” i.e, without CO Acct
assignment, and KOFK will be assigned “2” i.e, with CO Acct assignment. (this 2 & 3 must have been defined earlier
somewhere else.)
Note: Both KOFI & KOFK shall be within same step sequenced by ‘counter’ 1 & 2.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
74 by Lawrence Rebello
o Define and assign A/c determination procedures
 Billing Type F2 - Proc KOFI00
 Control Data KOFI 3 / KOFK 2
 Cash Allocation A/c Key EVV cash clearing
Define and Assign Account determination Procedure
Define Account determination procedure: Here a procedure is defined which SAP uses to check the sequence (steps)
in which ‘determination types’ (as defined above) are to be used for revenue determination. SAP standard procedure
is available with key “KOFI00”.
Assign Account determination procedure: Procedure (defined above) is allocated to ‘Billing types’ (eg Invoice, Credit
Memo, etc) for which a corresponding account determination is to be carried out.
o Define & assign a/c keys
 ERL, ERS, EWS, MWS
Define and Assign Accounting keys
Accounting keys, when assigned, link the condition types (determination types) to the respective G/L accounts.
These are defined in co-ordination with FI. SAP standard accounting keys are:
ERF freight revenues
ERL revenues
ERS sales deductions
EVV cash settlement
MWS sales tax
o Assign A/cing key
 ZWMP01 ERL Revenue, MWS Discount/Taxes
o Assign GL A/c’s [ create for 005 ] [ VKOA ]
 001 cust grp/mat grp/A/c key
 Application V
 Condition KOFI
 COA HPCL
 S ORG HPCL
 A/c Key
Assign G/L Accounts
In standard SAP settings, 5 types of tables contain different combinations for SD interface with FI where a relevant G/L
account must be assigned :
Table Description
001 Cust Grp / Mat Grp / Acct key
002 Cust Grp / Acct key
003 Mat Grp / Acct key
004 General
005 Acct Key
• ON THE FA SIDE
• IMG/FA/GLA/BT/Integrate/S&D [ VKOA ]
o Prepare revenue a/c determination [same as SD 001,2,3,4]
o Carryout document summarization for sales & distribution
Common combination of Application V,
Cond type for Acct determn KOFI, Chart of
Accounts INT, Sales Org 0001 are
common in all these tables. Combination
varies only on cust grp, mat grp and acct
key.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
75 by Lawrence Rebello
PRICING PROCEEDURE
• VOK0 - maintain pricing
o Header - pricing porceedure copy from WMP001 to ZWMP01
o Customer pricing procedure 1 std, 2 std+tax
Condition Type MWST as under :
Access sequence MWST
Cond Class D Plus /minus A
Calc type A
Cond Cat D
Rounding rule BLANK
Manual entries Blank
Group cond On
Header cond On Amount/perc On
Item cond On
Text det proc Taxes Text id 0001
o SD does not generate taxes. – in MWST add condition thru VK11 – in ZWMP01, condition MWST must have
Reqt 10 [plant is set] & at AltCBV 16 [net value – this makes tax on net value i.e. exclusive. In FICO all taxes
are incl]In case you want to analyse why taxes not calc, analyse at VA01, dbl click qty / conditions / analysis. In
case VFX3 reports that a taxcode SA etc is missing, the same can be created in FA Global, so that taxes are
calculated.Tax probs VOK0 / Acc Seq MWST - for Access No 8 [Departure Country/ Destination Country]
Requirement 8 [Export business exclusive on] and condition type MWST [VOK0 / VK11] created for taxcode A1.
Tax Probs SD/Basci Func/Taxes/Plants Abroad/Assign GL Ac to Ac Key / goto table ……………………………
005 AppliCondType COA Sorg Act Key GL A/c
…………V KOFI HPCL HPCL MWS 175000 Regionwise taxes
possible thru county code, but MWST does not support it. You may have to explore USTX etc. County can be
set at plant & customer a/c.
o A/c keys ERL Revenue, MWS TAX, ERS Discount
PRICING PROCEDURE
 Note: An old version transaction code VOK0 is quite useful, as it displays all functions related to
defining, populating and assigning pricing procedure in one screen only (by header menus).
Header > pricing procedure
Define Pricing procedure V/08
SAP has standard pricing procedures for many a cases, yet if a different procedure has to be created, an existing
procedure can be copied and changes be made via condition types to suite the requirement in hand.
 Note: It is recommended that copy be made by prefixing ‘Z’ to the original procedure.
SAP standard pricing procedure for Product Catalogue is WMP001 which (incorporates taxes in pricing) but it has
condition type MWST i.e. only I/O taxes, which we will copy to ZWMP001 and incorporate various condition types for
excise duties and sales taxes that we defined in FI.
 Note: WMP001 does not have any condition type for discounts and other considerations (which are
mainly defined and populated in SD) which can of course be added but for simplicity sake, we will proceed with
simple ‘base amount’ and ‘taxes’ only (which have been defined and populated in FI).
 Note: For taxes, check the following setting:
Reqt 10 i.e. Plant is Set
Alt Cond Base Value 16 i.e. Tax on Net i.e. base amount
Header > Pricing procedure > Customer Pricing Procedure
Customer Pricing Procedure OVKP
1 Standard
2 Standard incl Sales tax
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
76 by Lawrence Rebello
o Header - condition type / definition
 Copy from PR00 to ZPR0
Condition Type ZPRO as under :
Access sequence PR02
Cond Class B Plus /minus Blank
Calc type C
Cond Cat Blank
Rounding rule Blank
Manual entries B
Header cond On Amount/perc On
Item cond On
Pricproc Zwmp01
Scale basis C
Check value A
Qty conversion On Pricing date Blank
Text det proc Price Text id 0001
 Set entries from Manual priority to Auto priority
o Header - condition type / Access sequence
 Accesses
 Fields
o Header - pricing procedure/proc determination
 Ensure co has the relevant pricing procedure ZWMP01
o Header - environment / maintain condition / create [TC-VK11]
 Enter condition type
 Select material with release status
 Material
 Rate i.e. sale price
 Unit i.e. INR
 Per i.e. 1
 UOM ie EA
 Calc Type i.e. C Qty
 Valid - from / to
Condition must exist for a particular material to process sales order.
Condition must exist for a particular tax code at the country and domestic
business level for correct taxes.
Header > Condition Types > Condition types & Access sequences
Maintain Condition Types and Access Sequences V/06 & V/07
Normally SAP standard condition types and Access sequences (say MWST) will be available in both FI & SD (in SD, there
is table for each condition “Create Condition Tables” besides the “Define Condition Types” function, the latter being same
as in FI).
As we have defined our condition types (JT1, JT2, etc) and access sequence (TAXINM) ourselves, it has to be ensured
that the condition types and access sequence and all relevant Account keys are made available in SD also.
Populate the pricing procedure with relevant condition types and accounting keys.
Header > Pricing Procedure > Procedure determination
Assign Pricing procedure to Sales Area (a comb of SO, Distr chl, Div) OVKK
Header > Environment > Condition > create/change
Associating Material with condition type VK11
Enter condition type, select Material with release status, enter material name and other relevant detail, validity from/to.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
77 by Lawrence Rebello
INITIAL STOCK ENTRY
SAP/Logisticsl/MM/InvMgmt/GoodsMovement/GoodsReceipt/Other
• MB1C - create initial stock of material
o Movement type 561
o Entry into unrestricted use
o Doc date posting date
• Stock MMBE check stock
• IMG/FA/Global/Document/PostingPeriods/Open&ClosePP
o OMSY material management on co codes
o MMPI to initiallise posting periods [for materials]
o MMPI does not work in 4.70. Use MMPV & close period by period.
DATA ENTRY – Initial Stock
[SAP Menu > Logistics > MM > Inventory Management > Goods Movement > Goods Receipt ]
Enter other Goods : Initial Stock MB1C
Activity: Movement Type 561 i.e. entry into unrestricted use
Check Stock MMBE
Displays an overview of stock, consumption, balance, etc data.
Material Management view on Co codes OMSY
Displays open period for material posting for a company code.
Initialize Open periods MMPI / MMPV
Initializes open period for material posting which had earlier been closed.
 Note: This function would delete all future records (i.e., from the date of initializing till date) for the concerned
material which might be existing in the system.
Initial stock entry [DO NOT COPY WH, OR DEFINE IT FOR MM01] Sometimes MB1C
gives an error – product class FERT does not exist / consistent etc. Reason FERT is not
defined for updating in IMG/CO/PCC/PCPlanning/Mat_cost_estimate_with_qty_stru/
Settings_for_qty_stru_control/Material_data/Check_attributes_of_mat_types/ select
matl & left Qty/Value updating & FERT g
You may have to incorporate valuation group OMWD
A/c determination - MM/Valu&A/cAssignment/A/cDeter/Wizard [ not recommended ]
A/c deter w/out wizard - configure auto postings [use options/simulation/input mode]
If a/c’s are blank, enter relevant a/c’s manually for procedures UMB, BSX, PRD,GBB etc
MB1C – FERT – 7920 - 561
Proc PK A/c Dr PK A/c Cr
UMB gain/loss reval 83 232500 93 282500 D/C, V/C
BSX inv posting 89 792000 99 792000 V/C
PRD cost price diff PRA 86 231500 96 281500 D/C, G/M, V/C
GBB offsetting entry BSA 81 799999 91 799999 D/C, G/M, V/C
VAX 81 893010 91 893010 @ @ @
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
78 by Lawrence Rebello
SALES ORDER & BILLING
• SAP/LOG/SD/SALES
o VA01 - Order [2 change, 3 display] sales order first created with open status
[ ZMIL tc VOV8 ] [ F2 tc VOFA ]
 Complete details of sold to party, inco terms, material & qty
 Check Taxes [ Dbl Click Qty, Conditions]
 Save
o Sold to party does not exist – when customer was created under FD01, create from VD01 / in VA01 use create
button, & re enter the VA01.In case of Business Area, ensure BA assignment in all LG, SD,LE & complete data
comparison under Log General. Create a new order type under
IMG/SD/Sales/Sales_Documents/SDHeader/DefineSDTypes create newAssign sales area to SD Types
IMG/Basic_Function/AA&Costing/AssignGLAccounts [140000, 140030 if former does not work]In case you
want to analyse why taxes not calc, analyse at VA01, dbl click qty / conditions / analysis.
Sales Order ZMIL as under :
SD Document Cat C
No range int assig 01 Item no increment 10
No range ext assig 02 Sub item increment 10
Check division 2 Item division On
Probability 100 Read info record On
Output Aplication V1
Screeen sequence grp AU Display Criteria UALL
Incompletion Proc 11 Fcode for overw scr UER1
Transaction Grp 0
Doc Pric Proc A
Delivery type LF
Shipping conditions 01
Dlv rel billing type F2 CndType line items EK02
Order rel billing type F2
InterComp bill type IV Payment guar proc 01
Payment card plan type 03
Checking type 01
Propose delivery date On
SALES ORDER & BILLING
[SAP Menu > Logistics > Sales & Distribution > Sales]
Create Sales Order VA01
Sales Order is created with reference to a ‘sales area’. Type of Sales order (i.e. Standard order, dr/cr Memo,
etc) option is there.
Sales order is first created with open status (ZMIL).
Activity:
? Details of Sold-to-Party, Enco terms, etc
? ‘Check Taxes’ will show the taxes details (to ensure that condition types defined and populated is
ok)
? Save
Change Sales Order VA02
Display Sales Order VA03
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
79 by Lawrence Rebello
• Shipping & Transportation/Outbound Delivery
o VL01N - outbound delivery order [2 change, 3 display] If storage loca not entered at
MM01, you have to enter it here. Problems of shipping point / condition clear as above. SC 01 [std]. In case GL
A/c 893010 not existing error, goto FS00 & create with reference.
o Enter storage location and pick the goods
o In picking the goods are blocked for a customer.
o Post goods issue [ MM & FI are affected ]
OUTBOUND DELIVERY
[SAP Menu > Logistics > Shipping & Transportation > Outbound Delivery]
Create Outbound Delivery (with ref to Sales order) VL01N
Activity:
Enter storage Location and Pick Goods
In Picking goods are locked for Customer
Post Goods issue (FI & MM are affected after posting)
 Note: In case of PR00 missing error, create thru a separate session, dbl click qty in the order, go to
conditions, update and carryout new pricing.
 Note: After delivery but before billing, the price can be changed thru VA02 & carryout new pricing.
Create Outbound Delivery (without ref to Sales order) VL01NO
Change Outbound Delivery VL02N
Display Outbound Delivery VL03N
• In case of PR00 missing error, create thru a separate session, dbl click qty in the order,
goto conditions, update and carryout new pricing.
• After delivery but before billing, the price can be changed thru VA02 & carryout new
pricing.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
80 by Lawrence Rebello
• BILLING
o VF01 create billing document. The delivery order comes up auto.
o Save
o In case of Foreign Trade Error : S&D/Foreign Trade Customs/Control Foreign Trade Data in MM & SD
Documents /Import Screens in Purchasing Documents : HPCL Import Data should be BLANK. S&D/Foreign
Trade Customs/Basic Data for Foreign Trade/Define Comodity Codes /Import Code Nos by Country : There
should be no entry for IN.
o In case of no doc no range, create the doc no range. [ FBN1 ]
o In case of Billing problems – no a/c docs use VFX3 at SAP/LOG/SD/Billing/Billing Doc and release biling doc
for a/cing by clicking flag 7 . In case it is unsuccessful, a message will appear to go to notes at top header.
o In case of wrong reco a/c, 140000 is the normal reco a/c [img/s&d/basic functions/account assign
costing/reco acct determination/assign GL a/c’s][ OV64 ]. Using 140030 will stop postings to the Customer
A/c. Use [img/s&d/billing/billing documents/define billing types] [ VOFA ], GoTo Billing doc type F2
[defined in img/s&d/sales/sales doc header/define sales doc[sales order] types - VOV8], and ENSURE
ONLY RECO A/C IS ON . In case Acc Det Cash settlement is on, the posting will go to a GL a/c instead of a
customer a/c.
o VF02 the billing doc comes up auto. View the accounting entries.
Billing Document F2 as under :
Billing type F2
No range int assig 19 Item no increment Blank
SD document category M
Transaction group 7 Statistics On
Negative posting No
Branch/Head Office Custo mer/Payer/Branches
Cr memo w/val dt No
Invoice list type LR Rel for rebate On
Cancellation type S1
Account determ proc KOFI00
Doc pric proc A
Acc det rec acc KOFIAB
Acc det cash set Blank
Acc det pay cards A00001
Output deter proc V10000 Application V3
Item output proc Blank
Output type RD00
Header partners FK
Item partners FP
Text deter proc 03
Text determ proc itm 04
BILLING
[SAP Menu > Logistics > Billing > Billing Document]
Create Billing Document VF01
Delivery order comes up automatically, save, and it will be posted in SD & FI
Change Billing Document VF02
Display Billing Document VF03
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
81 by Lawrence Rebello
INTEGRATION MATERIALS MANAGEMENT
• IMG/MM/Valuation & A/c Assignment
o A/c determination wizard [DO NOT COMPLETE]. You make configurations
relevant to transactions in Inventory Management & invoice verification [for
automatic postings to GL a/c in Financial Accounting & Cost Accounting]
o You do the above, with/without the wizard or a combination of both
o The wizard always reads the existing customization settings first. These are
displayed as defaults & form the basis for further adjustments.
o Pre-requisites co code, plant, material types
o Select material type used FERT - finished goods. Check g only material types
in use & be careful when you uncheck a material type. If a material type is
unchecked, you cannot post to that material type.
o Activate purchase a/c mgmt Y/N
o Activate purchase a/c mgmt for co codes
o Assign chart of accounts
o Assign plants to groups - all plant or co codes in the same group will post
identically
o Examine different material types - SAP assumes that inventory related a/c’s will
differ by material type. However some a/c postings like freight may not differ by
material. Hence if you select ”Yes”, it would mean that even non – material types
like freight are material type dependent.
o Select a/c postings
o Maintain valuation classes - ideally you should have one valuation class per
material type.
o Maintain inventory accounts - stock a/c nos to be filled up. Internal processing
key BSX. BSX rule for valuation is always set “ON”. BSX rules for dr/cr & a/c
modifier is always set “OFF”.
o Maintain dr/cr rule : in MM there are transactions & events that may be posted
to the Expenses/Revenue a/c or to Price Differences. This a/c is either dr or cr
depending on whether then transactions or event requires a correction to your
disadvantage [DR] or in your favour [CR]. You can setup two a/c’s, so that a DR
is posted to one & a CR to another. Checking a checkbox g will set the DR/CR
rule “ON” for the corresponding internal process key. The process keys are :
 Cost [price] differences PRD
 Exp/rev from stock transfer AUM
 Exp/inc from revaluation UMB
 Offsetting entry for inventory postings GBB
 Exp/rev from consignment mat consumption AKO
o Maintain MM Transactions - start with the 1
st
incomplete transaction [no green
mark] & work your way down. If you are unsure of an a/c, leave it blank, &
change later. By entering corresponding nos to each transaction for a material
movement, you are assigning a/c nos to the internal process keys. Depending on
its rules, some process keys may have more than one a/c no. in this case the
wizard takes you to a detail screen.
o Final Screen - DO NOT COMPLETE [o/wise the wizard will auto a/c assign,
and a lot of other users will be affected]
• Account determination without wizard
o Define valuation control [ OMWM ]
 Group code active
o Group together valuation areas
 Val group code 0001
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
82 by Lawrence Rebello
 Val area plant
o Define valuation classes
 A/c category reference
 Valuation class [ OMSK ]
 Material type/A/c category reference [ OMS2 ]
o Define A/c group for movement type
 One complete table contains cols
 Movement type
 Special stock
 Val update
 Consumption
 Val string
 Counter
 Tran event key
 A/c modifier
 Check up assignment
• Purchase a/c management
o Activate purchase a/c in co code
o Calculation of value for purchase a/c - whether receipted value of purchase
with/without delivery costs
o Separate a/cing documents for purchase a/c postings - define whether the
system should create 2 separate FI docs for stock & purchase a/c postings or for
invoice & purchase a/c postings
 Goods receipt doc 1
• Purchase a/c DR
• To GI/IR clearing a/c [goods inward, invoice receipt etc]
 OR
• Purchase a/c DR
• Freight a/c DR
• To GR/IR clearing a/c
• To Freight clearing a/c
 Document 2
• Purchase offsetting a/c &
• Stock/price diff a/c
 Invoice receipt
• Purchase a/c
• To GR/IR clearing a/c / vendor a/c
 For delivery costs
• Freight a/c
• To Freight clearing a/c
o You can use only 2 documents if the purchase a/c is posted at the receipt value,
o/wise the difference between GR/IR clearing a/c and the purchase a/c would
result in a balance not being equal to zero. In std SAP config, only one a/c doc is
created.
o Activate separate a/c doc in val area.
o Create new doc type for separate doc - define a new doc type for the 2
nd
a/c
doc. The doc type must be different from the doc type for goods receipt [GR,WN]
and invoice receipts [IR].
o Assign a no range to the document
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
83 by Lawrence Rebello
o Configure no range for new doc type
• Inventory management
o Assign a new doc type to inventory management trans. This includes all
transactions that generate goods movements with reference to purchase orders
i.e. MB01, MB04,MB0A & purchasing trans [beginning with ME* & ML*] You must
also assign the new doc type for automatic movements.
• Invoice Verification
o Configure Doc type for separate Purchasing a/c doc
o Assign the new doc type to logistics invoice verification transactions.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
84 by Lawrence Rebello
ASSET ACCOUNTING
• Organisational Structure [ OA08 ]
o Check country specific settings
 LVA low value assets
 AUC assets under construction
Post net book value, capitalize Auc, w/o downpayment
ASSET ACCOUNTING
IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Organizational Structure
Check Country specific settings
SAP has pre-configured Assets Accounting for most of the countries but 4.6c version is not available with country-India
version for assets accounting. All country specific settings get assigned to the company, once the (SAP specific) Chart of
Depreciation is assigned to the Company code.
However 4.7 version is available with country-India settings.
(double click and you get into the following parameters)
Max value for LVA posting: If certain value is specified here, any asset below this value, irrespective of its asset class, will
get posted to the LVA assets and not to their respective class.
Net Book value for depr changeover: SAP changes the method of depr once ‘net book value, gets below this amount. In this
case, depr key must be defined with ‘changeover method 3’.
Post net book value: If this is selected SAP doesn’t post gain/loss on disposal of assets. It is instead posted (for net book
value of the asset) to ‘revenue clearing from asset sale’ – not used in India. (but mandatory in France)
Capitalize AuC w/o Down payments: While capitalizing an asset under construction, SAP ignores down payments made to
the construction company, if this is selected.
• Copy reference chart of dep / dep areas [ EC08 ]
Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation / Depreciation areas
Chart of Depreciation
The chart of depreciation is a list of depreciation areas arranged according to business and legal requirements. The chart of
depreciation enables you to manage all rules for the valuation of assets in a particular country or economic region.
SAP provides country-specific charts of depreciation with predefined depreciation areas. These charts of depreciation serve
only as a reference for creating your own charts of depreciation, and are therefore not directly accessible in the SAP system.
When creating a chart of depreciation, you have to copy the reference chart of depreciation.
o Specify description - change desc
o Copy delete depreciation areas
 Book dep, IT dep etc
 Real dep areais posted to GL, unlike IT dep which is not posted
 Negative values in assets are allowed
 Proportion of depreciation – if the divisor is 2, ½ the value is considered
for dep etc.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
85 by Lawrence Rebello
Depreciation Areas
Depreciation area is set up to handle depreciation for a particular purpose say, tax depr, book depr, cost accounting depr,
etc.
Depreciation area can be ‘real’ or ‘derived’.
→ ‘Real’ depreciation area is which get posted to G/L accts and reflected in financial statements P&L a/c and B/S
(book depr), statutory reporting (tax depr) or other internal management reporting purposes (cost accounting
depr).
→ ‘Derived’ depr area is one which derives its value form real depr and is used in cases where additional or special
depreciation is allowed.
Each depr area belongs to at least one ‘chart of depr’, but other depr area can also be defined in any such ‘chart of depr’ so
that values of one area can be taken over by other area. For e.g.
01 Book Depreciation
15 Tax Balance Sheet
20 Cost Accounting Depreciation
parameters:
Book Depr Tax Depr Cost Acct Depr
Real depr area indicator on on on
(this indicator ‘on’ means SAP will store these values in database)
Posting in G/L a/c indicator 1 0 3
o Assign COD to co code [ OAOB ]
o Specify number assignment across co codes [ AO11 ]
 Use co code for assignment of no ranges
Specify number assignment across Company Codes
In SAP, assets are created with ‘Main Asset No’ under which many assets are created with sub-numbers. It is possible to
define ‘Main Asset No’ across various Company codes. If this is done valuation can be done by main asset no which shall
include data for all sub-nos irrespective of its location.
However if no such setting is desired, same co code (i.e. ‘ABCD’ if configuring ABCD) must be assigned to the company
code being configured.
• Asset Classes [ DO NOT COMPLETE ]
o Generate asset classes from GL a/c’s
 Select APC [acquisition & prodn costs]
 Checking the APC indicator will generate an asset class
 Enter default a/c’s for all a/c determinations [825000]
o Specify A/c determination - suffix for VA [value adjustment] is 010. Hence if
Bldg = 2000, accum dep is 2010 [199990 clg asset acqui]
o Create screen layout rules - as porposed by system
o Define no ranges interval - as proposed by system [ AS08 ]
o Define asset classes - [ OAOA ]
o Specify COD dependent screen layout / account assignment
 Normally not reqd, unless you want these control specs to be country
specific i.e. COD dependent.
Double click for setting the
parameters
Post assets in
G/L real-time
No values are
posted in G/L
Only depr posted
in G/L
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
86 by Lawrence Rebello
IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Organizational Structure > Assets Classes
Generate Assets Classes from G/L accounts (1 to 1)
Here Asset classes are generated in a 1 to 1 relationship to G/L accounts. The system enters ‘Account determinations’, ‘Screen
layout rules’ and ‘Number ranges’ in the asset class as control parameters.
 Note: Carrying out this step is not mandatory. Generating Asset classes from G/L accounts is an optional step
and can be used to simplify the creation of asset classes.
 Note: Alternatively, Asset classes can be defined or copied without the help of G/L accounts using the step
“Define asset classes”. Copying classes is useful for adding to Asset classes, already generated from G/L accounts (using the
current step). Additional account determinations, Screen layout controls and Number ranges, in case of alternative method,
can be defined in the section “Organizational Structures”.
SAP supplies example asset classes.
Activities:
A Wizard guides through the 7 different navigation steps. Asset classes are not generated until saved.
 Note: If a wizard is not run or any change is desired after it has run, next 4 IMG activities – ’specify account
determination’, ‘create screen layout rules’, ‘define number range intervals’ and ‘define asset classes’ – assumes importance.
(configuration in following steps are meant for Plant & Machinery)
Step 1 Enter chart of accounts and the chart of depreciation.
Step 2 Whole list of G/L accounts appear, out of which G/L accounts that are APC (Acquisition and Production Costs) balance
sheet accounts, i.e. Assets, are selected. SAP creates Assets classes (similar to the G/L a/c no in description), for those
G/L accounts that are selected as APC accounts. (as in 7
th
step, asset class automatically appears)
Step 3 Enter G/L accounts for Expense-ordinary depreciation, and Asset retirements – revenue clearing, loss or gain for
all account determinations. (In a later step however, one can change these accounts for each account determination).
Step 4 System asks for suffix for VA accounts (Value Adjustment i.e. depreciation accounts) ‘10’ will result in acc deprn as
11010 for asset class 11000.
 Note: The system prepares an account determination and corresponding accumulated depreciation for each
APC account, with a description that is the same / similar to that of the given APC account. (as shown in the 4
th
step
i.e. suffix for VA accounts)
account determination 11000 (comes auto) G/L a/c is also 11000
accumulated depreciation 11010 (comes auto)
Step 5 A number range interval is defined for each APC account. And one can change the number range intervals as needed:
• Change the limits of the number ranges.
• Specify whether the assignment of the main asset number should be external or internal.
01 000000010000 000000019999 external - ‘off’
 Note: SAP recommends internal number assignment. However, one can define the number range intervals, for
example, so that the first characters of the asset number agree with the first characters of the APC account number.
Step 6 The system creates a screen layout control for each APC account.
Screen layout 1100
Note: When the APC account has a number that is at most 5 characters long, the system automatically assigns the
account number as the key for the screen layout control. If the account number has more than 5 characters, the 5-character
key for the screen layout control has to be entered manually. Field groups for optional entries can be entered in the asset
class.
Step 7 The system creates an asset class with the same name as each APC account. Here the following parameters are added
to the asset classes:
• Asset Class 11000 (comes auto)
• Specify type of the asset class
0 without AuC / LVA / CLVA
1 asset under construction
2 low value asset
3 collective low value assets
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
87 by Lawrence Rebello
• Specify the default depreciation key and the default useful life for each depreciation area.
You can add to this information for more depreciation areas in a later step.
 Note: The function for generating asset classes can be used more than once. The system uses the following logic when
this function is used again:
• First, the system checks whether the company code is already in production status. If it is, then the system creates,
based on the selected G/L accounts selected, only asset classes, account determinations and so on that were not yet
created. Any existing asset classes are not changed; nor are they deleted and created again.
• If the company code is not yet in production, the system checks whether assets already exist for the existing asset
classes. If not, the system deletes the existing asset classes and generates them again.
• If assets do exist, the system checks if there are also transactions for the assets. If there are no transactions, the
following options are available:
? Delete all asset classes and their assets, and generate them again
? Only add new asset classes
? If transactions exist for the assets, then you can only add new asset classes
Specify Account Determination
Account determination determines the ‘reconciliation account’ in G/L ledger i.e. the G/L account to which a transaction for asset will
be posted and also its off-setting entry.
 Note: An asset class must have one Account determination. Normally it bears resemblance with the G/L account
it refers to.
 Note: However an Account determination can be used by several asset class, if it uses the same chart of
accounts and is posted to the same G/L account.
Activity:
A name is given to the Account determination but no properties are given at this stage.
Acct determn for Plant & Machinery (Asset class) 11000 G/L a/c is also 11000
Screen Layout for Master Record
FSV are defined for ‘required’, ‘optional’ and ‘suppressed’ fields.
Activity:
A name is given to the screen layout but no properties are given at this stage.
Screen Layout for Plant & Machinery 1100
Define Number Range Interval
Here ‘main number’ range for Assets are defined. There is no separate range for sub-numbers, these can be internally or externally
assigned.
(same features as document no ranges, also see concepts stated in wizard stage)
Activity:
01 000000010000 000000019999 external - ‘off’
Define Asset Classes
If Asset classes were not generated earlier form G/L accounts, these can be defined here one by one.
Activity:
Define an Asset class 11000 Plant & Machinery (double click to get inside settings)
Important settings:
Account determination 11000
Screen layout 1100
Number Range 01
External sub-number ‘no’ SAP recommendation
All these variables as defined in earlier
steps now available for assignment
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
88 by Lawrence Rebello
ASSET A/C INTEGRATION WITH GENERAL LEDGER
• Define how dep areas are posted to GL
o 0 no values posted
o 1 post assets in GL realtime
o 2 post assets periodically to GL
o 3 only depreciation posted
IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Integration with General Ledger
Define how depreciation areas post to General Ledger
Here G/L a/c posting indicator is set for each depreciation area defined. Parameters available are:
0 no values are posted in General Ledger
1 post assets in General Ledger real-time
2 post assets periodically in General Ledger
3 only depreciation posted in General Ledger
Activity:
Book Depreciation 1 post assets in General Ledger real-time
Tax Depreciation 0 no values are posted in General Ledger
Cost Accounting Depreciation 3 only depreciation posted in General Ledger
 Note: Book depreciation, earlier given parameter 1 i.e. post assets in General Ledger real-time, cannot be
changed here while other depreciation areas can be given some other parameter, if desired.
• Assign GL a/c’s
o Choose an allocation – select COA, choose a/c allocation, select any one Acct
Det
o Define acquisition/retirement a/c’s for COA [dbl click desc]
 Acquisition 11000 M/c & Equip
 Contra A/c for acq 191400 clg acqui
 Retirement Clg a/c 825000 Clg Asset Disp
 Gain 820000 Rev Asset Ret
 Loss 200000 Loss Asset Disp
 Loss w/o Rev 200000 “ “ “
o Define depreciation accounts for COA [dbl click desc]
 Ord Dep 11010 ADP M/c & Equip
 Exp A/c 211130 Dep M/c & Equip
Assign G/L Accounts
Here for each Account Determination defined earlier, G/L accounts are assigned for transactions relating to
acquisition/production, retirement, and profit/loss on disposal of assets for each depreciation area.
Activity:
Account Determination 11000
Define Acquisition & retirement accounts:
Depreciation area 01 Book Depreciation double click to get inside settings
Assign G/L accounts for “Acquisition account assignment” and “Retirement account assignment”
Define Acquisition & retirement accounts:
Depreciation area 01 Book Depreciation double click to get inside settings
Assign G/L accounts for “Ordinary depreciation account assignment” and “Unplanned depreciation account assignment”
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
89 by Lawrence Rebello
• Specify posting key for asset posting
o 70 DR 75 CR for asset posting
o 40 DR 50 CR for GL a/c posting
Specify posting keys for Asset posting
Here keys for asset posting in Asset register as well as G/L accounts are defined.
Note the settings:
Asset Management posting group ANL
Procedures (double click to set posting keys) dr cr
Additional accounts for asset accounting ANC 40 50
Asset posting ANL 70
75
G/L a/c posting from asset posting ANS 40 50
Change Field Status Variant of the Asset G/L accounts
Mainly standard settings (posting keys) and those which have already been defined earlier (assignment of FSV to Company
code). However changes required specific to asset accounts can be made here regarding ‘required’, ‘optional’ or
‘suppressed’ fields.
• Change FSV of the Asset GL a/c’s
o Change FSV for posting keys
 DR 40,70 must have reversal CR 50,75 for GL & Assets
• Assign input tax indicators for Non-Taxable Acquisitions : Input tax & Output Tax [
OBCL ]
• Specify Fin Stat Version for Asset Reporting - specifies the key which identifies the
B/S & P&L version.
• Posting depreciation to general ledger
o Specify document types for posting of dep [AF]
IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Integration with General Ledger > Post depreciation to General Ledger
Specify document type for posting of Depreciation
Define Document type: SAP has provided standard settings
AF Depreciation posting
Specify doc type for posting of depreciation: Assign AF to ABCD
o Specify intervals and posting rule [dbl click desc]
 Smoothen - remaining dep spread evenly
 Catchup - arrears of dep updated
 Monthly - period interval 001 i.e. no of periods between 2 dep runs
Specify Intervals and posting rules
Here intervals for depreciation posting is defined i.e. monthly, half-yearly or yearly for each depreciation area. Selection
should be made along with correct ‘period interval’ i.e. no. of periods between two consecutive depreciation posting.
Activity: double click each depr area to set intervals
Depr area interval period bet interval (months)
01 Book Depreciation monthly 1
15 Tax Depreciation yearly 12
 Monthly calc is annual deprn / 12
 Note: One can also assign depreciation to cost centers, allow posting of imputed interest, revaluation, etc in this
IMG activity.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
90 by Lawrence Rebello
o Co account assignment
 Assign cost centers – for dep posting
 Post to internal order - as per asser master record
o Other posting settings
 Post interest - imputed interest in addition to depreciation
 Post revaluation - revaluation of APC [acquisition & prodn costs] & dep [
[when planned life ends] i.e. dep after useful life
VALUATION
• Specify COD [ OAPL ]
• Depreciation areas
o Define depreciation areas - 01 Book Dep
IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Valuation > Depreciation area
Define Depreciation areas and area type
SAP standard settings are available:
Depr area Area type
01Book Depreciation 01 valuation for trade B/S
15Tax Depreciation 03 valuation for tax B/S
20Cost Acct Depreciation 07 cost account valuation
o Specify area types
 01 Valuation for trade balance sheet
• Specify transfer of APC values / valuation adoption from another dep area. A dep area
can only adopt values from an area which has a smaller key than itself. Therefore no
transfer is possible to area 01. hierarchy is maintained i.e. 03 can adopt values from 01
and not vice versa.
Specify transfer of APC values
In SAP asset values of one depr area can be used by other areas.
SAP has defined 01 i.e. Book Depreciation area as standard for other depreciation area (all real depr areas) i.e. all other
areas derive their Asset B/S values (APC values) from depr area 01.
Only exceptions are – derived depr areas and areas for revaluation & investment support.
 Note: Some other depr area can be made ‘base depr area’ in this IMG activity.
 Note: ‘Ref area’ for 01 i.e. Book Depreciation area is ‘00’ and is not open to be changed.
• Specify transfer of depreciation terms [similar to transfer of APC values]
Specify transfer of Depreciation terms
Similar to above, depreciation terms (i.e. depreciation keys, useful life, etc) of one depr area can also be used by other depr
areas, and in such a case, one need not / cannot maintain depreciation terms other than that of reference area in asset
master record.
 Note: ‘Ref depr area’ must be smaller that the ‘dependent depr area’.
 Note: ‘Ref area’ for 01 i.e. Book Depreciation area is ‘00’ and is not open to be changed.
Any change in reference depr area will not automatically be updated in dependent depr area unless “identical” is kept ‘on’.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
91 by Lawrence Rebello
• Determine Depreciation areas in the Asset Class
o Select asset class & depreciation area
o Depreciation key
o Use – useful life
o Per - useful life periods [if useful life = 7, periods = 6]
o Index - index series for replacement values
o Layout - screen layout
Determine Depreciation Area in Asset Class
Generally, the assets in an asset class use the same depreciation terms (depreciation key, useful life). Therefore, you do not
have to maintain the depreciation terms in the asset master record. Instead, they can be default values from the asset
class.
SAP normally comes with standard settings for country specific requirements.
Note the settings:
Asset Class 11000 Plant & Machinery
Depr Area 01 Book Depreciation
Ch of Depr only off if this is ‘on’, new assets can’t be created in this class.
negative value off
LVA check 0 no maximum amount check
1 value based maximum amount check
2 quantity based maximum amount check
Minimum / Maximum life assets with min life below this level are not allowed in this
asset class
Life period (wherever used) no. of months in case of fractional life
Depreciation key DG30
Useful Life years over which assets under this class are to be depreciated
 Note: ‘Useful Life’ is a mandatory field (irrespective of FSVs) except when depreciation key is
0000. SAP needs it to calculate depreciation. However if some depreciation method is used which is independent
of the useful life, one can put very high value say, 100 years in this field.
• LVA check - 0 no max amount check
o 1 value based max amount check
o 2 check max amount with quantity
IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Valuation > Amount specification (Company code / Depreciation area)
Specify maximum amount for low-value assets
Specify LVA classes: Here each Asset Class is assigned a LVA parameter.
Note the settings:
0 no maximum amount check
1 individual management i.e. SAP checks value of each asset in this class for max LVA
2 collective management i.e. several LVA assets are grouped and compared with the max LVA amount
Specify amount for LVA: Maximum amount for LVA is defined for each depreciation area.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
92 by Lawrence Rebello
• Amount specifications [value based check]
o Specify max amount for LVA & asset class
o Specify rounding off of Net Book Value & Dep - net book value at year end
rounded off to whole
o Specify changeover amount – for changeover to the key defined in the dep key
o Specify memo value for Dep areas - a value exists even though the planned
expected useful life has already been exceeded
• Fiscal year
o FYV - specify other version on Dep area level. Reqd only in exceptional
situations
• Shortened Fiscal Years -Define reduction rules for shortened FY for ordinary & spl dep,
interest & revaluation, because in a shortened FY, it is generally necessary to reduce
dep in proportion to the reduction in the length of the fiscal year. [Maintain Dep Key –
refer DEP/Val Methods/Dep Key]
• Use of half months in the co code - mid month - date which specifies the middle of a
period i.e. 15 days
IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Valuation > Fiscal Year
Use of half months in Company Code
Using this function, one can calculate depreciation in these company codes on the basis of half months or half periods.
Half months can only be used with calendar fiscal year versions.
Define weighting of periods
This options can be used in case of seasonal industry, where assets are only used for part of an year and hence
depreciation needs to be accounted for in those active period only, for financial statements to reflect true operational
performance. Depreciation is still taken for whole year, only it is weighted in active months only.
This option is mainly exercised for management analysis purposes and not for statutory compliance purposes.
• Define weighting of periods
o Specify areas for individual period weighting - indicator can be set for
UNEQUAL depreciation, a requirement in seasonal industries.
o Weight periods in FY version - choose a FY
o Period - after which dep is calculated or incase of retirement, upto which dep is
calculated
o WT prop - weight proportion - normally for all periods dep is equal, but if a
value is entered for this period dep = relative wt / total weights
• Currencies
o Define dep areas for foreign currencies
o Specify the use of parallel currencies - 10 = co code currency
• Group Assets
o Specify dep areas for group assets - indicator for managing group assets
o Specify asset classes for group assets - indicator – class entirely consists of
group assets
• Go to SAP menu
o Create a vendor FK01 - remember to complete reco a/c’s [next scr]
o Create an asset – sap/ac/fa/fixed assets/asset/create AS01 [AW01N - asset
explorer]
 AS01 - asset class
 General - description, sr no, qty
 Time dependent - leave blank
 Allocation - evaluation [components]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
93 by Lawrence Rebello
• Integration of assets & equipment
o Equipment no - part of a big asset, made up of smaller
assets
 Origin – country, vendor etc
 Leasing – type, base value, lease payments
 Dep areas - dep key, useful life, periods, op dep start – date if not no
dep calc
o SAP/Fixed assets/postings/acquisitions
 External acquisitions
• F-90 with vendor
o Posting key 31 CR vendor 70 DR asset
o Tran type for 70 is 100 ext asset acquisition
• F-91 clearing offsetting entry - for clearing payment to vendor
[after entering asset entries as above, enter the bank entry &
process open items][It is advisable to enter 50, 113100 & save the
asset first before bank entry, so that an open item appears for the
vendor. If not previous open items must exist to process the bank
entry.]
• ABZON - acquisition with automatic offsetting entry [could be
used for uploading asset w/out vendor][MULTIPLE ASSETS
ALSO POSSIBLE. The asset must have been created, and no
vendor/taxes will be calculated. Provision for existing/new asset.
Business area entry essential if defined]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
94 by Lawrence Rebello
DEPRECIATION
• Ordinary Depreciation
o Determine dep areas - values should be –ve or 0
o Assign a/c’s - choose a/c allocation & a/c determination
o Define unit of prodn [UOP]
 STCK default UOP - total units are for the whole year.
 Period unit - units produced in a period – month. For more than 1 year,
define units for all the years. Based on the useful life, dep/yr is calculated
& then broken up in a year based on UOP.
IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Depreciation > Ordinary Depreciation
Determine depreciation areas
Here depreciation areas are selected for ordinary depreciation. Also +ve or –ve sign is allowed for each depreciation area.
In normal procedure, ordinary depreciation is selected with “negative and zero values allowed” (double click depr area).
Assign G/L Accounts
In this step, G/L accounts are defined for Chart of Accounts / Account determination (Asset Class) / Depreciation area.
G/L a/c for Accumulated depreciation (B/S)
G/L a/c for Depreciation expense (P&L a/c)
Define Unit of Production Depreciation
If useful life of any asset is more dependent on the no. of units produced, depreciation can be calculated based on no. of
units produced in each FY, if total no. units is defined in this activity for the asset concerned.
• Valuation Methods
o Dep key - calculation methods
 Define base methods [normally 0008]
• Reduce useful life at FY end
• Dep with curb NO [if yes, after useful life of 10 years, 11=1/11,
12=1/12 etc]
• For multilevel base method choose EXPLICIT [0012] method.
After changing key, remember to activate. In AW01N to see dep of
2
nd
year “comparisons”.
IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Depreciation > Valuation Methods > Depreciation Key > Calculation Method
Define Base Methods
SAP standards (0001 – 0031) are available and sufficient to be used. Normally, 0008 is used.
Settings (0008 - % from remaining life calculated from depr conversion date) :
Reduce useful life at FY end ‘off’ if ‘on’, system reduces useful life so that it always
coincides with the end of Fiscal Year
Treatment of end of depreciation
Depr after planned life end ‘yes’ continue depr even after end of useful life
Depr below NBValue zero ‘no’ if ‘on’, continue depr even after NBV is zero
Curb ‘no’ if ‘on’, depr is calculated at rate 1/extended life for
each extended year after the useful life has expired,
else at the same rate i.e. 1/useful life.
Can only be selected if ‘depr after plnd life’ is on.
 Note: For multilevel base method choose EXPLICIT [0012] method, so that the system does not calculate depr,
and therefore no errors. After changing key, remember to activate. In AW01N to see depr of 2
nd
year “comparisons”.
 Define declining bal methods
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
95 by Lawrence Rebello
• Declining factor – dep % resulting from useful life etc X factor for
DB dep The multiplication factor is used in determining the
depreciation percentage rate for declining-balance depreciation.
The system multiplies the depreciation percentage rate resulting
from the total useful life by this factor.
• Max % age - will override factor above
• Min % age - keep as 0
Define Declining Balance method
settings:
method declining factor maximum % minimum %
001 say, ‘x’ 25 0
 Define max amount - specify max amounts
 Define multi level methods – validity start options
1 From capitalization date
2 From ord dep start date g
3 From spl dep start date
4 From orig acqui date of AuC
5 From changeover year
• Select levels
• Acqui year - upto which valid
• Year - no of years 2,5 [i.e. 1
st
2 them 3]
• Per - validity periods in cal months
• Rem Life - leave blank. Set this indicator to determine the
periodic dep %age, based on the remaining life.
• Reduct - reduction of base value by an entered %age rate
• Dep by fiscal year = Yes [if checked]
• For every level/phase, there should be a changeover method/phase
that is relevant. To change useful life USE AS02
• Phases e.g 004  10.000/5.000/2.500 as 1/2/3 below
1. From start of dep
2. Changeover within planned life
3. Changeover after end of useful life
Change methods - change method to a different phase
• 0 - no auto changeover
• 1 - C/o when SLD high
• 5 - C/o at end of useful life
changeover %age rate - %age of acquisition value at which
system changes the calc of dep
• Maintain Period control methods
o Acq – period control used for acquiring transactions in year of
capitalization.
o Add - period control for additions or subsequent transactions
o Ret - retirement
System uses the factor defined here to
calculate declining balance dep rate.
However if max rate is defined, this
factor is ignored by the system
Normally
kept zero
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
96 by Lawrence Rebello
o Trn - transfer postings
o Values
 01 Pro rata start date
 02 Pro rata upto mid period
 03 Pro rata at mid period
 04 First yr half dep value
 05 Year start date [Austria]
 06 At start of year
 07 at mid year
 08 at end of year
Maintain dep key
 Select dep key and go to assignments of calculation methods. DG30 -
VWDV thru copy [activate]
• Assignment of calculation methods [left]
• Phases - Phase - the duration of dep is divided into different
phases
 1 from start of dep
 2 changeover within planned life
 3 changeover after end of useful life
• Base method of calculating dep
 1 0007 ord % after end of life
 2 0011 ord % from useful life
 3 0017 ord imm dep after end of life
• Decl method of calculating dep
 1 004 3.0/30%/0%
 2 001 0/0/0
 3 001 0/0/0
• Prd cont period control
 1 002 04/06/02/02
 2 003 01/06/02/02
 3 003 01/06/02/02
• Multi level method
 1 002 0%
 2 001 0%
 3 003 APC any life
• Change method - changeover to a different phase when SL dep
is high, when net book value reaches a particular level
 1 1 c/over when SL dep is hich
 2 5 c/over after end of useful life
 3 -
Period control
 Maintain Period control
• Enter & select – individual period version will be g in pro rata at period
start date
 Define calender assignments - specify period
 Define time dependent period controls
• Define dep keys with T/D period control
o Assign T/D period control to dep keys. Select co code & enter valid upto,
period control key for acq, addl acq, retirement & transfer
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
97 by Lawrence Rebello
 Generate period controls
o Enter FYV & calender yr & generate.
Integration AA with PM - plant maintenance
• Master data
o Automatic creation of equipment master records
o Specify conditions for synchronization of master data - you specify for asset
class, whether auto equipment records [PM] be created, & whether both get
updated simultaneously.
Transactions
• Acquisitions
o Define transaction types for acquisitions
• Define transaction types for acquisitions
• Limit TT [displayed] to dep areas
o Define A/c assignment category for Asset PO
o Specify asset class for clearing asset from PO
o Assign A/c’s
o Allow downpayment TT in asset class
o Define validations
• Retirements
o For taxes create ET [exempted tax], update GL thru FS00 to accept all taxes.
The a/c’s are at assign a/c’s above. Tax will then not be calculated at retirement.
o Gain / Loss Posting - if gain/loss posting is on, an asset has to be created to
hold such gain/loss. If it is kept off, it goes to the GL a/c
• IMG/FA/AA/Trans/Retirements/Define TT for Retirement
• Select TT, details & gain/loss M [off]
o Assign a/c’s - where a/c’s are assigned for gain/loss, the same are posted to the
GL & not kept in the asset concerned.
SAP/A/c/FA/Fixed Assets
• Posting
o Acquisitions
 F-90 with vendor
 F-91 clearing offsetting entry
 ABZON acq/with auto offsetting entry. [new asset, master data]
o Retirement with revenue
 F-92 with customer [01 DR select customer TT 260
 Posting key 50 CR a/c 825000 TT 260 ]
 Click asset retirement curr yr Ret & enter on screen to go to next screen,
complete asset no & enter text. Header doc display for a/c entries
 ABAON asset sale w/o customer
o Asset
 AS01 create Asset
 AW01N explorer to check posting in Dep posted / planned [green button
posted period]
 S_ALR_87012347 doc extract to check entries
 ABST a/c reco for AA/GL diff
 Info system for asset balances
• SAP periodic processing
o SCMA schedule manager
 Create a task list [top header/tasklist/create]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
98 by Lawrence Rebello
• Enter name of task
• Enter desc, calender etc & save
• Tasklist appears in the tasklist
 Change task list [top]
• Right click on task list
• Create task
o Enter desc, program/transaction, start time etc
 Select task & execute IN BACKGROUND [TOP HEADER]
• Enter output device [LP01], title & enter
• Click immediate & save
• Background job is scheduled
• System/Services/jJobOverview/execute [sm37]
• Click jobname & view spool [xxx]
 Depreciation Run { Depreciation run is supposed to generate a session, because batch input
in g ON in document type AF [dep posting]. If it is set off, the posting will take place. Keep the spool
on which comes up by default, and view the spool through own spool requests. No need for any
special params. Go by defaults. }
 AFAB execute - has to be executed period by period
 Choose period, go top program & execute in background F9
 LP01
 Enter AUTHORISATION [ USER ]
 Click immediate
 Save [RABUCH00_FIU]
 System/Services/jJobOverview/execute [SM37]
 System/Services/Batch input/sessions/process.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
99 by Lawrence Rebello
ASSET DATA TRANSFER
Legacy Data Transfer Using Microsoft XL
Along with the Data Transfer Workbench, the SAP R/3 Asset Accounting component also offers the
option of transferring legacy asset data using Microsoft? Excel. This method is especially suited for
transferring small datasets, such as a few hundred fixed assets. The amount of data you can transfer
using this method is limited by the maximum number of rows in your Excel version.
PREREQUISITES
The first step is to load or manually enter the legacy asset data and values from your legacy system into
an Excel sheet. The data transferred to the R/3 System has to be in a specified form. In order to ensure
that the data transfer is carried out correctly, you should adhere to the following guidelines when creating
the Excel sheet:
SAP recommends that you set the Standard Excel format for the entire document before
you enter any data. Dates, however, can also be entered using the Custom Excel format.
The Excel spreadsheet consists of two parts (see the example below).
• In the header (blue in the example), you specify the type of data you want to transfer for your
assets, for example, the company code, description, and so on.
• In the asset section you enter the individual assets and their values.
The Excel worksheet has to contain cells for the legacy asset number, company code, asset class and
capitalization date, and values have to be supplied in these cells for each asset. The same applies for any
required entry fields that are defined in the asset class in the R/3 System.
You might want to prepare for the data transfer, although the organizational structures of
your enterprise have not yet been specified (for example, the description of a company
code is not decided). In this case, you enter variables for the missing information, for
example, company code XXXX. Before carrying out the data transfer, you can then use
the Replace function in Excel to replace the variable with the correct value.
HEADER
In the header, you first specify the field descriptions to be transferred. The first 5 rows in the Excel
worksheet are reserved for this header information. You are not allowed to use them for asset master
data or asset values.
The fields are organized in record types. Enter these record types in the first column of the worksheet.
The next columns should contain the field descriptions assigned to these record types. SAP recommends
the following structure:
USE OF RECORD TYPES
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
100 by Lawrence Rebello
Record
type
Used for… Is assigned to tab page during field
assignment (see below) …
0 Identifier (legacy asset number); record type 0 is
reserved solely for the number of the asset from the
legacy system, and is not allowed to be used for any
other purpose. The system needs the identifier if
there are errors, in order to assign them to the correct
assets.
Header data
1 Asset master data, general data and inventory data Header data
2 Posting information, time-dependent data Time-dependent data to Leasing
3 Depreciation areas, cumulative values, posted values Depreciation areas, cumulative
values, posted values
4 Transactions Transactions

If you do not need certain record types (for example, record type 4), then you can omit
them when creating your Excel worksheet.
ASSET SECTION
Enter the asset values below the header data. You have to enter the asset data in the Excel worksheet so
that it corresponds to the structure of the field descriptions in the header.
For example, you specify in the header for record type 1 that the company code is in
column B and the asset class is in column C.
The system then recognizes the field contents of all fields of record type 1 in column B as
company codes and in column C as asset classes.
Therefore, you have to make sure that for each asset, which is in a row specified as
record type 1, that its company code is always in column B and its asset class in column
C.
Fields that have leading zeroes in the R/3 System (for example, company code 0001), have to have
leading zeroes in this format. Always enter the asset class with 8 places and leading zeroes (for example,
00001000).
EXAMPLE OF STRUCTURE OF XL WKS
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
101 by Lawrence Rebello
In record type 3 (depreciation area data) always supply the depreciation area name (such as 01) first.
In record type 4 (transactions) you have to enter the sequential number and the depreciation area in the
first two fields. The sequential number is used to keep different transactions separate from one another.
REPRESENTING TRANSACTIONS

Record type Seq. number Area Transaction
Type
Amount Posting date
4 1 01 100 5000 01.01.97
4 1 02 100 4900 01.01.97
4 2 01 100 1000 01.01.97
Features
Field Assignment between XL & R/3 [ Mapping ]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
102 by Lawrence Rebello
In the R/3 System, you assign the field descriptions of the Excel worksheet cells to fields in R/3 (for
example, CoCd to company code). In the initial screen of the transaction, you choose whether you want
to use an already existing field assignment or if you want to create a new one. To choose an existing field
assignment, select the one you want and choose Start with field assignment. To create a new field
assignment, choose Create field assignment .
Some Excel versions issue a message at this point in a dialog box. The message states
that there is a large amount of data in stored temporarily, and asks if you want this data
to be available to other applications. Choose No.
You make the field assignment by selecting a row in the Fields of file table and selecting its
corresponding field on the Fields of asset master record tab pages, and then choosing the Assign
pushbutton. The system does not check if the assignment is logical. However, you can assign each field
to exactly one other field. Certain assignments are mandatory. You have to assign the old asset number
(from the legacy system). In addition, you have to assign the asset class, company code, capitalization
date, and any required entry fields (see above) in the R/3 System.
The system lists only those field descriptions that are defined in the header section of the Excel sheet.
These are sorted according to their record type (0, 1, 2 and so on). The asset master data fields that can
be completed in the R/3 System are split up on various tab pages. See the Use of Record Types table
(above) for the valid assignments.
Before the data transfer, the system displays a dialog box, in which it asks if the field assignment should
be saved. However, you can also still save the field assignment after the data transfer (Saved
assignments pushbutton). In this way, you can carry out a number of data transfers that always follow the
same pattern. You thereby only have to carry out the mapping and conversion once. It is saved in your
saved field assignment and can be used again in the future.
In the Excel sheet in the above graphic, the assignment of header in f ormation to table
field in the R/3 System would look like this:
Comp Code – company code
Asset Class – asset class
Tr Type – transaction type, and so on
SETTING THE DATE FORMAT
Choose Settings ? Date format to specify whether the date uses American format (MM/DD/YY or
MM/DD/YYYY), ISO format (YYYY-MM-DD), European format (DD.MM.YY or DD.MM.YYYY), or SAP
format (YYYYMMDD). Dates in your Excel sheet have to have the same format.
TRANSFER OF FIXED ASSETS
During a test run (choose Test run ) the system lists any errors that occur, without actually starting the
legacy data transfer.
During a production run (choose Assets ) the system creates new assets using the values from the
Excel worksheet. It supplies values to their fields based on the assignments you made. To display master
records of assets that were created successfully, choose Details of return message .
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
103 by Lawrence Rebello
Any incomplete or incorrect data that could not be used to create assets can be displayed in a separate
Excel worksheet (choose Export errors to file).
ACTIVITIES
Start the legacy data transfer program in Customizing for Asset Accounting. Choose Asset Data Transfer
? Legacy Data Transfer Using Microsoft? Excel.
Legacy data transfer using Microsoft Excel. TC – AS100
• You must have the legacy data in an Xl file.
• The cols after that have to be matched to SAP like CO Code etc.
• When all the SAP fields are matched you can upload.
• Legacy data cols will have to be changed to be recognizable by SAP.
• Alternatively you can use BDC.
[some tips] – convert all cells to text.
Asset Data Transfer
Set Co Code Status 2 i.e. test co with data transfer allowed.
Specify Sequence of Dep Areas - 01 must be first.
Date Specifications / Last Closed Fiscal Year – must be followed for Asset data upload in
Capitalisation date [seq 2], o/wise date errors. Thereafter an asset can be uploaded backdated,
also ensure PP is open.
The INPUTS can be reduced, so that assignment is easier like
0 no change
1 no change, QTY & UOM can be added
2 blank cctr, plant, mfg, loca
3 blank cumul apc, cumul dep
4 DOES NOT WORK
Controlling
[ OB13 ]
MAINTAIN CONTROLLING AREA
• IMG/ES/Definition/Controlling [ OX06 / OK19 ]
Legacy Asset No Identification Feature
Dep Area Real Dep Area
Dep Key Depreciation Key
Dep Start Dep Calc Start Date
ULin Period Planned useful life in periods
Use Life Planned useful life in years
Real Area Real Dep Area
Current Sequence No of Asset Line
Items in Fiscal Year
Value Date Reference Date
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
104 by Lawrence Rebello
o Maintain CO area [ OKKP ] -
 IMG/CO/General CO/Organisation
 Create new entry & then copy. DO NOT COPY COA. Creating new allows you to use your COA
instead of INT.
 Enter CO area
 CO area same as co code
 Curr type 10
 Currency INR
 Cur & val profile BLANK
o the CO area is the highest level in which you can create reports, since master
data & COA are stored here. That is why, once a COA is stored it cannot be
changed. Therefore, do not copy CO area before creating GL a/c’s [first create
thru maintain CO area and then copy, otherwise you will have to make do with
INT COA]. When you assign all co codes to one CO area, you need to ensure
that all the co codes have the same no of posting periods [FY variants], and the
same COA. However the co codes can have different currencies. [cost center
hierarchy / select & activate components [left]. At the bottom there is an option
for variances, which must be checked g otherwise variances will not be
calculated.This option is in General Controlling]
o Copy delete check CO area [ through structure, templates ]
o Maintain CO area - select & details [to change CO area OKKS][when you
activate components/control indicators, you cannot activate ProfitAnalysis, unless
you create operating concern]
• Assignment
o Assign co code to CO area [ OB62 ]
• IMG/CO/General CO/ [ OKKP ]
o Organisation : The definition of the organizational unit is one of the most
important activities when introducing the SAP system. According to the
complexity of your organizational structure & the components with which you
work, you must first analyse the outcome that determining organizational units
has on the other SAP components. The complete representation of a complex
organizational structure should first be discussed with a consultant.
o Maintain CO area/No ranges/Versions : In other settings there is a cost center
hierarchy. If the hierarchy is not created, create it here. Enter Std Hier name, and
the system will create it. [cost center hierarchy / select & activate components
[left]. Keep Profit Center OFF. At the bottom there is an option for variances,
which must be checked g otherwise variances will not be calculated]. TO
MAINTAIN NO RANGES [ KANK ]
COST ELEMENT ACCOUNTING
[create a CCTR first] [ KS01 ] [ Change CO Area – OKKS ]
There are 4 types of cost elements
1. Primary - must be a GL a/c
2. Secondary - can be User defined
3. Direct Posting
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
105 by Lawrence Rebello
4. Indirect Posting
• Master Data
o Create cost element [800000 & 893010]
 Create primary cost element - screens  [ KA01 ]
 Basic Data :
• C Ele Cat 11 Revenue
• Attribute [n/a] FMW Fixed / Material
• FP Fixed / HR
• FPW Fixed / HR/ Effective Payment
 Indicators
• Record quantity M
• UOM EA
 Default AA cost center - select [ if necessary create a C Ctr first from
IMG/CO/CCA/Master Data/Cost Centers]
 History
o Secondary Cost Element - [ KA06 ]
• C Ele Cat 43 internal activity allocation / use 42 for Asst.
COST CENTER ACCOUNTING
• Activate Cost Center A/cing in CO area
o Select co & activate components [left] [screen similar to CO area , versions etc]
• SAP/Ac/CO/CCA
o Master data/ Standard Hierarchy [OKKS to change CO area]
 OKEON change - @ [enter]
• Right click on Std Hierarchy & create groups
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
106 by Lawrence Rebello
• Create cost centers
• Save
• Activate
• Save
• Planning
o KP04 select planner profile [use SAPEASY a simple profile, and copy so that
defaults can be entered] Use F4 then create new, skip & dbl click CCA &
following menu appears.
o IMG/CO/CCA/Planning/Manual Planning/Define UD Planner Profiles - better to
copy from an existing one as detailed above
o Select & left
 General CO
• CuDK currency dist key 1=equal 3=dist by %age
• QtDk quantity dist key
 Layouts for CO
• Deflt Default params
• Overw params can be overwritten
• Integrated XL planning with XL as frontend
• File description
• Select & enter default params
• Version 0 from 1 to period 12
• Fiscal year 2004
• Form based [in form based, all elements are depicted, and you
can choose. In free you decide]
• Assign button top
• Cost & Activity Input
o KP06 change KP07 display
o Enter & variables & top left overview - you can enter data like direct
production cost 416100, 417001. [overview screen will not open unless 800000
& 893010 have been defined as cost elements & cost center details entered in
the cost element].
o Top left butt gives 12 period dist
o Top left 2
nd
butt , back for totals & save
o Using KP04 before KP06, gets the version, from to periods etc by default. Enter *
at cost center & cost element to go to the next screen.
o Ensure that both plan & actual data are in the same year [especially if it is a
calender year and the cost center exists as on that date ]
o Earlier plan amounts were entered. To enter actual figures, create AAM thru
FKMT equivalence type i.e. specify %ages, so that later amounts can be
distributed auto. Use F-02 [FB50 requires complex posting to bring up AAM],
clear tax problems if any
o On saving for question “Edit all items” enter screen by screen
o Enter text where reqd
o Bank value date
o TT 50 for total amount
o S_ALR_87013611 for comparisions [ from to period will give plan data for the
whole year. For meaningful comparisions, ensure period is relevant]
• Redistribution IMG/CO/CCA/Act Posting/PE Closing/Distribution
o Define distribution [okks – set CO area]
 Create actual dist [ KSV1 ]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
107 by Lawrence Rebello
 Cycle any name
 Starting date 8 type text
 Top left button, attach segment [details of cost centers], segment name
any & screens
 Segment header 40% to redistribute [ receiver tracing factor – use fixed
%age , variable portion gives errors.]
 Sender receiver - sending cost center to receiving cost center
 Sender values
 Receiver tracing factor [ 100 % ]
o KSV5 for distribution i.e. redistribution [SAP/CO/CCA/PE Closing/Single
Function/Allocation]
o S_ALR_87013611 to view
• Assessment IMG/CO/CCA/ActPosting/Period end closing/Assessment [allocation to, but
for a secondary CCtr. For primary use distribution]
o Specify receiver types for assessment
o Create assessment cost elements [cafe, material03] [ KA06 ]
 Top left master data  screens
• Basic data - cost element category - assessment 42
• Indicators
• Default A Assig USER1 CCtr becomes a sender
o Define allocation structures [ KSES ] { not required }
 New entries
 Assignment [create new]
• Source from Cele to Cele
 Assessment cost element
• New entries CAFETERIA [F4]
 Settlement cost elements
• Receiver category CTR
• By cost element g
o Maintain assessment
 Create actual assessment / change [ KSU1 ]
• Cycle UD bpacyc
o Iterative
o Attach segment
 Segment UD bpclasgeg screens 
 Segment header
• Assessment C Ele CAFE
• Allocation stru VA [ enter either CEle/VA
but not both ]
• Receiver rule Fixed %ages
 Sender / receiver
• Cost center from to
• Cost ele from to
 Receiver cost center from to
 Sender values
• Share in % 50 etc
• Act Vals g Plan Vals 
 Receiver tracing factor - cost ctr USER2 enter
%ages [for all receivers]
o SAP/CO/CCA/PE Closing/Single Function/Allocation
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
108 by Lawrence Rebello
 KSU5 assessment · [F8]
 S_ALR_87013611 to view
INTERNAL ORDERS
IMG/CO/IO
• Activate order management in CO area
o Select & left
 Activate components / control indicators
 Assignment of co codes
• Order master data
o Define order types
 Order cat 01 internal order[CO] screen 
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
109 by Lawrence Rebello
• Order type UD [MKTG]
• Settlement profile 20 internal [ use settle to CCTR with orig CEle
]
• Plan profile - general [Obj Class Inv for Assets]
• Functional area [like SD,MM etc] M
• Business area [for consolidation]
• Archiving time 3 months [removes data from actual DB & stores
offline for better space management]
• Co partner active will produce a total record M
• Control indic Classi, Commit Mgmt, Revenue Postings on.
• Status profile : Release status will allow posting to cost center [no
need to release later on]
• Order layout 0030 or blank.
• Print form M
• Save [no range not maintained error message is OK]
 Maintain no ranges for orders [the following applies to No ranges for
settlements also]
• Click groups [top button - maintain]
• The internal order created earlier is unassigned
o Position cursor on I/o
o Click on top button right [select]
o Position cursor on target group [prodn]
o Click on top center button [element group]
• The unassigned I/o will be assigned
• IMG/CO/IO/ActualPostings/Settlement
o Maintain no ranges for settlement documents
o Maintain settlement cost elements
 Create primary settlement cost element [Create 500000 CElem cat 22 ext
sett for Assets.]
 Change Primary/Secondary settlement cost element
 Create secondary settlement cost element  screens
• Basic data
o C Ele Cat 21 Settlement
o Default AcAssign Cost Ctr HPCLCOSTS
 Maintain allocation structures VA
• Assignments [select VA/ 00 & click assignments]
o Source 400000 – 650300 [separate for Asset]
o Assessment cost elements SETUP
o Settlement cost elements
 Receiver category CostCtr [FXA for Assets]
 By cost element  [leave blank]
 Settlement cost element IORCOELE [IO cost
ele][secondary cost element defined above] [ 500000
for Assets i.e. with 22 ]
 Maintain source structure 7
• Select & top left
o Assignments - select 70 & left
o Source [new entry] separate for Asset]
o Cost element from to [group leave blank]
 Maintain Settlement Profiles
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
110 by Lawrence Rebello
 Enter Alloc & Source Stru with default obj type FXA for Assets & valid
receiver CCTR/Fixed Asset reqd/ GL optional.
• SAP/Ac/CO/IO/Master Data/Special Functions/Order
o KO01 create Type 0722
 Co code BPCL plant BPPL
 Obj class overhead
 Release [right button][will not come if release immediately selected
earlier]
 Settlement rule [top][w/out which IO will not work]
• Cost CTR, Receiver DIRPRCOST, %age ---- Sett Type FUL
• From 1/2003 to 4/2003 etc LEAVE BLANK
 Top header Goto settlement params [F8]
• Allocation structures VA / 00
• PA trf structure [profitability analysis][FI - Direct a/c assig FI/MM]
N/a
• Source Stru. Use 7 [enter Asset value date ]
• Save - [order no created]
• IO/Planning/Cost & Activity Inputs Planner profile ZSAPEASY
o KPF6 change [use form based]
o Enter plan data & save
o Enter actual values F-02 & GL item fast entry [top butt] for I/Orders. Mention I/o
for all 40, but not for 50.
o Clear tax probs if any, bank value date, enter text etc.
o Save document
o S_ALR_87012993 to view
• SAP/Ac/CO/PE Closing/SingleFunction/Settlement
o KO88 settlement
o IO no last created comes up by default [enter asset value date]
o Enter settlement period [004 for 4] and posting period as relevant.
o  [F8] [ AW01N to see Asset ]
o View cost center comparision - S_ALR_87013611 [as after settlement, amount
must go to C Ctr]
ACTIVITY BASED COSTING
• IMG/CO/ABC - there should be a CO area & a cost ctr existing
• Activate ABC in CO area
o Activate components - ABC components active for analytical & integrated
calculation
o Assignment of co codes
• Maintain Std Hierarchy for CO area - assign std hierarchy defined under master
data/business process [ enter the Std Hier defined in Co Area ]
• Master Data / Bus Processes - Maintain std hierarchy of Bus process [like CCtr] right
click & create Bus Proc. [ CPH4N ] [ enter only basic data ]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
111 by Lawrence Rebello
• Templates / maintain templates [ not required ]
o Create template - activation conditions [active]
o Change template
o Display template
o Environment BPP [bus planning process]
o Object type Cost element
o Object template
• Assign templates for Bus Process [packing etc] screens  [ not reqd ]
o Basic data
o Organization
o Attributes
o Allocation
o Templates
o History
• Planning / maintain versions
o Create authorization groups for versions
o Maintain settings of version in controlling area
 Settings by fiscal year [integrated planning on for FY 2005]
 Version 0, plan g Act g Legal Valuation
 WIP/RA g Variance g
 Auth group, ref version n/a
• SAP/Ac/CO/ABC/Planning
o KP04 set planner profile [SAPALL] [ use ZSAPALL 1-D01 with CEle ]
o F4, create new, skip, dbl click ABC &
o IMG/CO/ABC/Planning/Manual Planning/Def UD Plan Profiles - copy SAPALL
 ZPCLABC & enter defaults
o Select & left
• Cost / Activity/Process/Inputs
o CP06 change - bus processes with cost elements as GL a/c’s & top left
overview
o Enter plan fixed / variable costs & dist key 1 [equal dist]
• S_ALR_87011760 plan / actual comparison
• FB50 actual postings - enter bus process in screen [ use screen variant from top
header edit ]
• S_ALR_87011761 plan/actual costs - to check variances
• You can also use Dist/Asst under ABC/PEClos/Dist etc.
PROFIT CENTER ACCOUNTING
[OMSY to open Fin Year]
• IMG/CO/PCA
o Basic settings
 Set controlling area
o Controlling area settings
 Maintain CO area settings - field for dummy P Ctr wil be blank, but as
soon it is defined, it should be displayed
 Std hierarchy as per your CO area.
 Elimination of duplication / Int Bus Vol M [keep off]
 Local currency
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
112 by Lawrence Rebello
 P Ctr currency
 Legal Valuation
 Control Indicator [active]
o Master data / profit center
 Maintain P Ctr groups. After creating the group, go back to maintain CO area setting and put
the group in the tree, o/w P Ctr will not accept the group, and you will have to make do with the
hierarchy.
 Create dummy P Ctr
 Maintain profit center [under group created] screens
• Basic data
• Indicators
• Co codes
o PCA/Basic settings/CO area settings
 Activate direct postings - set control param for actual data - new entries
- line / online g
 Plan versions
• Maintain plan version
o Plan version 0
o Settings for P Ctr
o New entries
o Online g line item g TP0 [transfer price]
o Exch rate type “M”
• Adjust line items [no action]
 Analyse settings
 Update basic settings - check all correct ?
o MM01 create material
 Costing 1 scr profit center - enter with Qty structure g & no costing
off M .
 Costing 2 - Planned price & dates
o IMG/CO/PCA/Assignment to profit centers
 Check assignment
• Top – assignment monitor IKE4
• Material [ensure job is run etc]
• Assigned materials - material created assigned to P Ctr
o MB1C - initial stock [do not copy/assign WH as it creates a problem in MB1C]
o VOK0 - pricing for new material if reqd
o VA01 - sales order
o VL01N - pick & post goods issue
o VF01 - Billing
o FB15, FD10N, FD11 to view
o VF02 - A/cing documents
o IMG/CO/CEA/MD/CE
 Create cost elements WRT 800000 & 893010 for them to appear in PCS
reports
o PCA/Transfer Prices
 Basic settings for Pricing n/a
• Condition types
• Pricing procedures
• Transfer price variants
 Advanced settings for pricing n/a
• Define price dependencies
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
113 by Lawrence Rebello
• Define access sequences
• Define condition exckusions for groups
• Define pricing reports
 Profit planning
• Define permitted a/c’s [to appear in PCA]
• 800000 sales
• 893010 cost of sales
 Actual postings
• Maintain automatic a/c assignment
• C/E 800000 PC BPTRANS Mandatory 3
• Can also enter 893010 with CCTR.
o SAP/CO/PCA/Planning
 7KEP set planner profile zSAP800 [ Layout 8A-101 ] PC groups
[centralized]
o SAP/CO/PCA/Planning/Costs/Revenues
 7KE1 change
 7KE2 display
 Version 0 1-12 2003 2005
 Co code Pc Gr A/c etc
 Overview [enter] 8
 PCtr, Amount, Dist, INR etc
 Enter costs/revenues - equal dist etc [ cr –ve for 800000 & 893010 for
cop etc ]
o Since sales are booked thru VF01, after entering plan amounts, variances can be
viewed thru SAP/CO/PCA/InfoSystems/ReportsForPca/InteractiveReporting
S_ALR_87013326
PROFITABLILTY ANALYSIS
There are 2 types of profitability analysis : Costing based & Account Based [see end]
• IMG/CO/PA/Structure/DefineOpConcern
o Manitain Op Concern - Screens _
 Select create button [ ignore the warning message ]
 Name operating concern.
 Select Costing Based.
o Save
 Data structure / Create
• Charecteristics [ to see ] Value Fields[to see]
• Customerwise Sales Qty
• Cust Groupwise Sales Value
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
114 by Lawrence Rebello
• Materialwise COGS
• Material Groupwise Discounts
 Characteristics
• MATKL Matl Group click τ
• KUNNR Customer click τ
• KMKDGR Customer Group
• VVGRW Group weight
 Value Fields
• VVIQT Invoice Qty
• VV010 Revenue
• VV020 Qty Discount
• VV030 Customer Discount
• VV040 Material Discount
• VV060 Other Rebates
• VV070 Cash Discount
• VV110 Accrued Freight
• VV140 COGS
 Save
 Select Activate Button
 Select Back Arrow
 Select YES for “Do you want to generate Op Concern Environment ?” [
Status Green = Active ]
 Attributes
• OC Currency = INR
• Select Co Code Currency = INR
• Fiscal Year = K4 [ensure same fiscal yr in FI]
 Save [o/w assignment not possible]
 Environment - activate client specific Part
• IMG/ES/Assignment/CO/Assign CO area to OP Concern
• IMG/CO/General Controlling/Organisation
o Maintain CO area
 Activate components
 If activation is in display mode uses KEKE to activate.This will happen
only after Assignment to Op Concern as above.
o Maintain versions 0
 Settings in op concern – weekly [ no option ?? ]
• IMG/CO/PA/Structure/DefineOP Concern
o Maintain characteristics [key fields]
 Chars created earlier [ MATKL etc ]
o Maintain value fields
 Created earlier [ VVIQT etc ]
o Define profitability segment characteristics
 Operating Concern – 00BP
 Select Costing Based
 Enter
 Save
• IMG/CO/PA/Master Data
o Maintain characteristics values [top button all chars on/off]
 Clicking on a char = maintain values
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
115 by Lawrence Rebello
o Char hierarchy [to structure your products / customers]
o Define char derivation - derivation lets you find values for certain chars
automatically based on known values of other chars, where these chars are
logically dependent on one another
 Derivation rule - country key, sales orgn, dist channel, division & plant -
source & target
• Valuation / Valuation Strategies
o Define & assign valuation strategy [create new if necc with PA]
o PV REC Plan Ver Val Strat
o 1 A 0 BPV
o Point of valuation PV 1  Real time
o Record  A - incoming sales order
o Details [left]
o Assign valuation strategy
• Setup valuation using Matl Cost Estimate
o Define access to std cost estimate
 Costing Key 001 Costing variant PPC1
 Costing version 1 Period [template ] 012.2003
 Cost estimate is executed w/o date
• Define access to actual costing matl ledger
o Costing key 002
o Valuation view - profit center valuation / [use legal valu o/w prob later]
o Type of valuation - only transfer total cost
o Plant 00BP period 012.2003
o Valuation field allocation 00BP ERLOS / VV010
o Assign costing keys to products 001,002 [ legal valu problem ?? ]
o Assign costing keys to material types 001,002
o Assign costing keys to any chars n/a
o Assign value fields ERLOS / VV010
• Setup conditions & costing sheets
o Define condition tables [create top button]
 502 [ selected field co code ] & GENERATE
o Define access sequences
 BP01, 10, Table 502, Co Code / Customer / Material
o Create condition types & costing sheets
 Define type, prices & price
 Separate pricing proc for CO [ZWMP01]
 Steps counter ZBPR
 100 00 ZBPR
 Condition records however do not appear [xxx]
o Assign value fields
 Ctype Value Field
 ZBPR ERLOS / VV010
o Define pricing reports - P1
 Cost ctr, co code, header [key field & text] rest – item level [only key field]
• Planning
o Initial steps
 Maintain version 0
 Settings in Op concern [transfer to Sop – create char groups]
o Assign qty fields
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
116 by Lawrence Rebello
 SD Qty Field COPA Qty Field
 Order qty Sales Qty
o Planning framework
 Setup planning framework 00BP General O/View
 Aids for Changeover to the Planning Framework
• Create planning level from planning layout ZPLAN
• Display Planner Profiles
o Create your planner profile [ use change butt ]
o Manual entry of Planning data
 Define planning layout / Create
• Save
o Setup trans based top down dist
 Define value field assignment
• Value field same as ref field
 Define dist profile [BDI]
• Dist level
o Receiving char PRCTR [profit Ctr]
• Flow of actual values
o Initial steps
 Characteristic groups
• Maintain char groups [see top]
• Assign char groups for assign screens
• Assign char groups for line item screens
 Value field groups
• Maintain value field groups
• BPVF [only value fields Rev, Gross sales, freight etc]
• Assign value fields for line item screens
o Transfer of incoming sales orders
 Assign value fields SD  COPA
• Condition Type Value Field
• PR00 VV010
• KP00 pallet dis VV020
• KA07 cust dis VV030
• KA00 sales promotion VV060
• ZF00 accrued freight VV110
• VPRS cost VV140
 Save
 Assign Qty Fields SD  COPA
• SD Qty Field COPA Qty
• BRGEW VVGRM gross wt
• FKIMG VVIQT invoice qty
 Activate transfer of incoming sales orders
o Transfer of billing documents
o Order & Project settlement
 Define PA transfer structure for a settlement
• PA Trf Stru FI
• Assignment line 50 [revenues]
• Source cost element 800000 to 805000
• Value fields ERLOS / VV010
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
117 by Lawrence Rebello
 Assign PA Stru to settlement profile 00BP
 Activation of Profitability Analysis
• IMG/CO/PA/Flow of Actual Values/Activate PA
o Select thru position & 2
• IMG/CO/PA/Flow of Actual Values/Initial Steps/Define No ranges
for Actual Postings
o Select Op Concern
o Select maintain groups
• Save
 IMG/FA/Global Settings/Document/Line Item/Controls/Maintain FSV
• Select FSV [0001]
• Dbl Click FSG [G004]
• Dbl click Addl A/c Assignment [PgDn]
• Profitability segment ¸ required / optional.
• Save ′ enter
• Select G001 & dbl click
• Dbl click Addl A/c Assignment
• Profitability segment ¸ required / optional.
• Save
o IMG/CO/PA/Flow of Actual Values/Direct Postings from FI/MM
 Maintain PA transfer stru for direct postings
• Select FI [stru] Financial A/cing
• Dbl click assignment lines
• Select 10 direct cost from FI
• Dbl click source
• From 400000 to 499999
• Dbl click value fields
• Select new entries
• Select Value fields [QTY/Value] 1 [fix] VV140 [value field]
• Save
• Select τ . [back arrow]
• Select 20 direct revenues from FI
• Dbl click source
• From 300000 to 399999
• Select Value fields [QTY/Value] 1 [fix] VV010 [value field]
• Save
o Posting of transaction in FI [F-02]
 40 cash 113100 8 amt 100000 BA BPCL des = sales posting
 50 sales 800000 8 amt “” “” BA BPCL des = +
 Select profit segment ′ [arrow]
 Select @ [continue ]
 Save
 To see line item list display A/c/CO/PA/Info System/Disp Line Item List [
KE24 – Actual ]
• Cur type 10
• Rec Type B dir FI posting
• Period 012/2004
• Co Code HPCL
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
118 by Lawrence Rebello
• Customer 2704
• Execute & list appears.
 To see the report
 A/c/CO/PA/Info System/Execute report [ KE30 ]
 Dbl click IDES 50 actual data
• Sales org 1000
• From 1.02.00
• To 12.02.00
• Plan/act ind = 0
• Execute
 Goto navigate [menu] ′ switch drill down
 Select customerwise.
 Navigate ′ switch drill down.
 Select actual data.
[There seems to be a confusion between direct FI & incoming sales order. It is better to be clear
about what PA you want to achieve before starting to avoid disappointments]
PRODUCT COST CONTROLLING
What are the material types ?
1. Raw Material ROH - Account Groups
2. Stores & Spares ERSA
3. Packing Material VERP
4. Finished Goods FERT
5. Trading Goods HAWA
6. Semi – Finished Goods HALB
7. Services DIEN
You have to create under material master just like GL Master in FI.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
119 by Lawrence Rebello
Material Master :
• Purchase View - Views are nothing but areas or different screens.
• Sales View
• Accounting View
• Costing Views
• MRP View
• Production View
• Quality View
Product Costing is used to valuate Finished Goods at Standard Price.
Cost Sheet :
Raw Material xxx qty from BOM x price as per matl master
RM Overhead xxx %age of RM above
Personnel Cost xxx
Manufacturing Cost xxx
Mfg Overhead xxx
Cost of Goods Mfg
Admin & SD xxx
Cost of Goods Sold xxx
Personnel Power
Dept A ′ B ′ C ′ D
[routing means how many depts. Or product runs]
Power Cost 100,000 Depts are called
No of Hrs 10,000 work centers in PP
Per Hr 10 In work centers we assign
Cost center.
Yarn 2hrs x 10 = 20
ProYarn 6hrs x 10 = 60
All done in 1000 Co Code
Basic Settings
Log/MM/Matl Master/Material/Create General – immediately
MM01
• Material WSLFG
• Material Type Finished Goods
• Material T – F100
• Industry Sector Mech Engg
• Select Orgn Levels
o Plant 1000 8 [enter]
• Select top right button
• Select Accounting 1 View
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
120 by Lawrence Rebello
o Price control S Standard
o Std Price 200
• Select top right button
• Select Costing 1 view
o Select g with qty structure
• Overhead group = SAP10
• Select Costing 2 view.
• Save
Creation of Raw Material
• Material WSLRM1
• Industry Mech Engg
• Matl Type Raw Material
• Material T-T300
• Select Organisational Levels
o Plant 1000 8 [enter]
• Select top right button - Acounting 1 view
o Valuation Cost 3000
o Mov Avg Price 50 Rs
• Save
• Material WSLRM2
• Industry Mech Engg
• Matl Type Raw Material
• Select Organisational Levels
o Plant 1000 8 [enter]
o Des WSLRM2
• Select top right button - Acounting 1 view
o Valuation Class 3000
o Avg Price 25 Rs
• Save
Creation of Work Center [in production planning]
Log/Prodn/Master Data/Work Centers/Work Center/Create CR01
• Plant 1000 work center & cost center will be same
• Work Center Test5 [any name]
• Work Center Cat 0001
• 8 [enter]
• Working Hamburg Test5 work center
• Select costing tab ′ date = 1.1.03
• Cost Center Test2
• Machine 1419
• Save
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
121 by Lawrence Rebello
Creation of Routing [routing means how many depts or product runs]
[logic ′ this product goes thru how many depts.]
Log/Prodn/Master Data/Routings/Standard Routings/Create CA01
• Material WSLFG
• Plant 1000
• Group 50000002
• 8 [enter]
o Usage 1
o Status 4 [released general]
• Select Operations Button
• Operations Work Center
• 0010 Test5
• Dbl Click 0010 operation
• Machine 120 mins
• Save
Define Costing Sheets :
IMG/CO/PCC/PCPlanning/Basic Settings for Material Cost/Overhead
Define Costing Sheets
• Select COGM [cost of goods manufactured]
• Dbl Click costing sheet rows
• Select 10 raw material
• Dbl Click base
o Controlling area 1000
o From Cost element 400000 to CE 410000
• Select 20 Material O/h
• Dbl Click overhead rate
o Position ′ enter
o Give OH type 2 OH type
• Select 60 Prod Cost
• Dbl Click base
o CO area 1000
o Select new entries
o From CE 416200 to CE 416200
• Save
CREATION BILL OF MATERIAL
Log/Prodn/Master Data/BOM/Material BOM/Create CS01
• Material WSLFG
• Plant 1000
• BOM Usage 1
• 8 [enter]
• Item Item Category Comp Unit
• 0001 L WSCRM1 PC
• 0002 L WSCRM2 PC
• Save
CREATION OF SECONDARY COST ELEMENT
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
122 by Lawrence Rebello
A/c/CO/CEA/c/Master Data/CE/Indiv Proc/Create KA06
• Cost Element 620001 [any no can be given]
• Valid from 01.04.00 [Co Area WSL]
• 8 [enter]
o Name machine hour rate
o Element Cat internal activity allocation 43
• Save
• Co Area 1000
• Save
CREATION OF ACTIVITY
A/c/CO/CCA/MD/Activity Type/Indiv Proc/Create KL01
• Activity Type 1419 [can be any no or name]
• Valid from 01.01.00 8 [enter]
• Name machine hours
• Description machine hours
• Activity unit H
• CCtr category *
• Act Type Cat 1
• Allocation CE 620001
• Save
CREATION OF COST CENTERS
A/c/CO/CCA/MD/Cost Centers/Create KS01
• Cost Center Test2 [any name or no]
• Name Test2 cost center
• Description Test2 cost center
• Person responsible A
• C Ctr Category 1
• Hierarchy Area H1
• Co Code 1000
• Bus Area 1000
• Save
CREATION OF COST CENTER GROUP KSH1
• Cost Center Group Testall [any name]
• Testall Testall
• Test2
• Save
PLANNING FOR COST CENTER FOR POWER ELEMENT KP06
Version = 0
From Period = 10 [for next month]
To period = 10
Fiscal Year = 2003
Cost Center = Test2
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
123 by Lawrence Rebello
Cost Ele to = 499999
Select » from based
Select overview screen
Cost Element Plan Fixed Cost
416200 100000
Save
CHANGE ACTIVITY TYPE PER PRICE PER PLANNING
[giving no of hrs required]
Controlling/CCA/Planning/Activity/Output Price/Change
Version = 0
From Month = 10
To Period = 10
Fiscal Year = 2003
Cost Center = Test2
Activity Type = 1419
Select » from based
Select overview screen
Activity Plan Activity
416200 100000
Save
PRICE CALCULATION [to get per hr cost calculation]
Accounting/Controlling/CCA/Planning/Allocations/Price Calc
[TC – KSPI]
Select Cost Center Group = Testall
Select no bus processes = g
Version = 0
Period From = 10
To Period = 10
Fiscal Year = 2003
Test Run = g
Detail List = g
Execute
Select back arrow
Yes
TO CHECK WHICH COSTING SHEET IS TO BE ATTACHED TO COSTING VARIANT
IMG/Controlling/PCC/Material Cost Estimate with Qty Structure/Define Costing Variant
[TC – OKKN]
Select Position Button
Costing Variant = PPC1 [std cost estimate]
Select PPC1 ′ select details button
Select valuation variant button
Select overhead tab = costing sheet = COGM
Save
GOODS RECEIPT / PRODUCTION RECEIPT [in MM]
Logistics/Matl Mgmt/Inv Mgmt/Goods Movement/Goods Receipt/Other
[TC – MB1C]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
124 by Lawrence Rebello
Document Date = 23.07.03
Posting Date = 23.07.03
Movement Type = 521
Plant = 1000
[enter] 8
Material Qty SLOC
WSLFG 1 0001
Save
TO CHECK THE MATERIAL MASTER TO SEE VALUES ARE UPDATED OR NOT
Material = WSL
Plant = 1000
Accounting 1
CREATION OF COST ESTIMATE WITH QTY STRUCTURE
Accounting/CO/PCC/PCPlanning/Material Costing/Cost Estimate with Qty Structure/ Create
[TC – CK11N]
Material = WSLFG WSLRM1 = 50
Plant = 1000 RM2 = 25
Costing Variant PPC1 10 % = 7.5
Costing Version 1 Power 2x5 = 10
8 [enter] 92.5
8 [enter] Cost Element Total Value
620001 10
400000 50
400000 25
629900 2.10
655100 7.50
94.6
Save
Goto Material Master MM03
Select Costing 2 View
PRICE UPDATE
Accounting/CO/PCC/PCPlanning/Material Costing/Price Update
[TC – CK24]
Posting Period= 9 2003 ′ Select marking release
Co Code = 1000 ′ Select CoCode 1000
Plant = 1000 ′ Costing Variant PPC1
Material = WSLFG ′ Costing Version 01
Execute ′ Save
′ Select Back Arrow
′ Select Release Button
When you do marking, the price as per Costing will be the future price.
When you do releasing, cost estimate price will become current price.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
125 by Lawrence Rebello
Then current price will become previous price & new cost estimate price will become future
price.
COST ESTIMATE WITHOUT QUANTITY STRUCTURE
Accounting/CO/PCC/PCPlanning/Matl Cost Planning/Cost Estimate Without Structure/ Create
[TC – KKPAN]
Material No = WSLFG
Plant = 1000
Costing Variant = PPC1
Costing Date = 31.12.99
Valuation Date = 01.01.03
Enter 8
Category = Material
Resource = WSLRM1
Plant = 1000
Qty = 1 PC
Enter 8
Category = M
Resource = WSLRM2
Plant = 1000
Qty = 1 PC
Enter 8
Category = E
Resource = Tets2
Plant = 1419 [activity]
Qty = 2 H [hrs]
Enter 8
Save
Marking & releasing [ we are avoiding PP completely]
Same as price update.
Implementation Phases
Implementation Stages :
ASAP is a PC based solution recommended by SAP for implementation planning and for use in
an R/3 System implementation. ASAP optimizes time, quality & efficient use of resources. ASAP
integrates 3 components
1. The ASAP Roadmap
2. Tools
3. R/3 Service & Training
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
126 by Lawrence Rebello
The ASAP Roadmap – which delivers a process oriented, clear & concise project plan to
provide step by step direction throughout the R/3 implementation, which consists of 5 phases.
1. Project Preparation / Scoping
2. Business Blueprint
3. Realization
4. Final Preparation
5. Go Live & Support
Tools :
Implementation Assistant
Question & Answer Database [QADB]
Implementation Guide
Profile Generator
Transport System
R/3 Business Engineer
Project Estimator – helps drawing up a project plan.
Concept Check Tool
Accelerators - industry specific solutions [ RRR i.e. Ready to Run R/3 ]
Sample Implementation Project Plans
SAP Ref Structure & Sub Structure fo ASAP – IMG link, which allows direct navigation
from BPML to IMG related activities.
IDES the model R/3 Company
Project Related Knowledge :
ASAP Project Management
ASAP Change Management
Risk Analysis
Review
R/3 System
An R/3 transaction is a sequence of dialog steps that are consistent in a business context and
that belong together logically. When an R/3 transaction is executed, all individual dialog steps
are performed and the data entered in the transaction is updated in the database. From the
viewpoint of the database, this is a conversion from one consistent state to the next.
After a user accesses a transaction, the R/3 system starts a query from the application level to
the database level. This query is performed in SQL [structured query language] the language
compatible with most database systems. The scope of SQL enables the full functionality of the
database system, including all vendor-specific enhancements to be used.
R/3 User Front End
Application Component Middle Layer
ABAP Dictionary Middle Layer
Relational Database Backend
Project Preparation
The primary focus of Phase I is getting the project started, identifying team members &
developing a high level plan. This process continues with customer interaction through a QADB,
thereby enabling knowledge of the customers process and facilitating of the AS IS Document
which is the DELIVERABLE of this phase. Customer sign off on the AS IS is a must.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
127 by Lawrence Rebello
The project preparation is instrumental in generating the AS IS document. This document
captures all the proceses “AS IS”. This becomes the deliverable and input for the next stage.
The project plan, resources etc are done through a project estimator. In the course of capturing
the proceses, a sandbox client can be set up to demonstrate to the customer. As to how SAP
will function [ look & feel ].
Business Blueprint
Understand the business goals of the company & to determine the business requirements
needed to support these goals.
The Business Blueprint captures all the processes “TO BE”, which has taken the information
from the “AS IS” document, & after GAP ANALYSIS, SANDBOX demo etc, USER SIGNOFF,
generated a “TO BE” deliverable, which forms the basis for the implementation.
Realization
To implement al the business & process requirements based on the Business Blueprint.
Customize step by step in two work packages, Baseline & Final Configuration.
The implementation takes off in a Development Box, which is an independent and insulated
server. All configuration done on any earlier SANDBOXES, are reconfigured on the DEV Box.
This configuration is transported to the Test Integration/Implementation Server, where the data
is loaded & testing & integration point tests take place. Data transports are always from the Dev
Box to the Test Server, & not vice versa. If any modifications are done on the Test Server in the
course of testing, they have to be redone on the Dev Server.
Final Preparation
Complete testing, end user training, system management and cutover activities. Critical Open
issues are resolved. Upon the successful completion of this phase, business in the R/3
Production Server can be run. After all testing is done, compile documentation, user training and
signoff.
Go Live & Support
Transition from a project oriented, pre-productive environment to a successful & live productive
operation.
Go Live & Early Watch : The Go Live check is for just before you cut over to live operation. It
tests whether the system is suitably configured for the requirements. In early watch sessions,
SAP spots potential performance problems early & suggests suitable corrective measures.
Remote Consulting : In remote consulting sessions, SAP consultants log into your server at
convienent times, trying to analyse & solve problems in your system from their desk.
Img – Implementation Guide
The IMG acts as a checklist of the customizing activities that an enterprise should complete for
a SAP system implementation project. The IMG is hierarchally structured.
From a project IMG, you can work on customizing transactions, project documentation, cross
project documentation and project management information.
Industry specific customizing is the name given to the installation of the default customizing
parameters in the IMG that relate to a certain industry. You can transfer industry specific master
data structures to the system by using a CATT which is also integrated in the R/3 system.
CATT’s are provided for industry specific businesscases defined by SAP. Industry business
solutions are integrated in the Business Framework as Business Components. The
implementations of the system can also be ready to run R/3 [RRR] system solution. The main
feature of this system is the complete delivery of hardware and software allowing you to rapidly
install the R/3 system.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
128 by Lawrence Rebello
ABAP Dictionary
The ABAP dictionary contains the field definitions that are defined in the standard SAP system.
While online, the system uses the definition of the table fields in the ABAP dictionary to check
the format of the users field entries. The check on R/3 application level guarantees data
consistency before the data is transferred to the database.
Business Object Repository
Where SAP Business Objects are maintained. A SAP Bus Object is the representation of a
central bus object in the real world like an employee, sales order etc. Methods [application
programs] are used to modify the attributes [characteristics that specify a bus object] e.g change
employee address, promote employee. A bus object in a BOR can have many methods from
which one or several are implemented as BAPIs.
Business Application Programming Interface
A BAPI is basically an entry gate to the R/3 system, which R/3 offers access to business data &
processes. A BAPI is assigned to one & only one bus object. Business components interact in
the Business Framework Architecture via open BAPIs.
Architecture :
SAP Bus Component FI, HR etc
Bus Objects Sales Orders
BAPIs Create Sales Order
Client Components Sales component on an external w/station
Sample FI Configuration Sequence
ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE
1. Create Company Company TATABP created.
2. Create Co Code .Company Code TTBP created
3. Assign Co Code to Co TTBP assigned to TATABP
4. Create Bus Area TTBN, TTBS, TTBE, TTBW, TTBC created for
North, South, East, West, Central India
5. Maintain FYV Fiscal Year Variant V3 [ TC – OB29 ]
6. Assign Co Code to FYV TTBP assigned to V3 [ TC – OB37 ]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
129 by Lawrence Rebello
7. Create COA CAIN [ TC – OB13 ]
8. Assign Co Code to COA TTBP assigned to CAIN [ TC – OB62 ]
9. Define A/c Groups Groups copied N/A as already existing in CAIN
[ TC – OBD4 ]
10. Define Retained Earnings A/c 11610000 [ TC – OB53 ]
11. Define PPV Posting Period variant TATA [ TC - OBBO ]
12. Assign Variants to Co Code TATA assigned to TTBP [ TC – OBBP ]
13. Open & Close Posting Periods Posting periods opened 2000-10 [ TC – OB52 ]
14. Define Doc Types & No
Ranges
No ranges copied from 0001 as none present in
IN01 [ TC – OBA7 ]
15. Define Tolerance groups for
GL
Tolerance Gr TATA defined [ TC – OBA0 ]
16. Define Tolerance Groups for
employees
Tolerance Gr “” defined [ TC – OBA4 ]
17. Define FSV Field Status Variant TATA defined
18. Assign Co Code to FSV TTBP assigned to TATA [ TC – OBC5 ]
19. Global Parameters Checked Global Parameters [ TC – OBY6 ]
Propose fiscal year, -ve postings allowed, default
value date ON.
20. Maintain Controlling Area TTBP CO area & STD HIER [ TC – OKKP ]
Fiscal Year from 2003
CCA active, AA IS ON, PA, ABC NOT active
PROFIT CENTER ON
21. Maintain Versions COPY 0, Select settings for each Fiscal Year,
Enter CO area & select fiscal year
22. Maintain NO Ranges GROUP INSERT, create no range, select element
COIN, Target TTBP & assign [ TC – KANK ]
COST CENTERS
23. Create default cost center DEFTATABP [ TC – KS01 ]
24. Create Cost Element UOM KL [ TC – KA01 ] PRIMARY
COST OF RM TRF 51000000
COST OF PROD FACT 49000000
COST OF FIN GOODS TRF 52100000
COST OF FIN GOODS SOLD 50200000
SEMI FIN GOODS TRF 51100000
MFG SAL & WAGES 55010000
SALES – DOMESTIC BASE SALES
REALISATION 40010000
UOM KL [ TC – KA06 ] SECONDARY [Celem
category 43 internal activity allocation]
SETUPCOSTS for setup prior to production
LABOUR DIR for labour costs
MACHINECST for machine costs
25. Create Cost Center Groups &
Cost Centers
[ TC – OKEON ]
TTBP - STD HIER
DEFTATABP - Default Cost Center
TPLS Silvassa Plant Gujarat
TPLSL1 - Lane 1
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
130 by Lawrence Rebello
TPLSL1BOS Base Oil Storage
TPLSL1PUR Purification
TPLSL1BLN Blending
TPLSL1FIL Filter Press
TPLSL1CAT Cattle Tank Storage
TPLSL1AFM Auto Fill Machine
TPLSL1QC Quality Checks
TPLSL2 - Lane 2
TPLSL2BOS Base Oil Storage
TPLSL2PUR Purification
TPLSL2BLN Blending
TPLSL2FIL Filter Press
TPLSL2CAT Cattle Tank Storage
TPLSL2AFM Auto Fill Machine
TPLSL2QC Quality Checks
TPLT Patalganga Plant Gujarat
TPLU Paharpua Plant West Bengal
TPLV Tondiarpet Plant Tamil Nadu
TPLW Ballabhgarh Plant New Delhi
TPLX Hoskote Plant Karnataka
CREDIT CONTROL AREA
26. Create Addl Bus Areas TTB1, TTB2, TTB3 created
27. Create Credit Control Area TTCC created
28. Assign Credit Control Area to
Company Code.
Assigned
FI-MM INTEGRATION
29. Purchase Quotation
30. Purchase Requisition
31. Purchase Order
32. Automatic Posting Procedures
[OBYC – can be accessed thru
Config Auto Postings in
MM/A/C DETER W/O
WIZARD] [ with WIZARD,
valuation account creates a
problem ??]
ME51 – no integration
No integration
ME21 – no integration
BSX – inventory posting configured
[Rules based on valuation modifier, valuation class]
[Account Assignment – Valuation modifier,
Valuation Class, Gl a/c]
7920 GL 24300000 – Fin Prod: Prod & Purch for
sale
[Posting Key 89/99]
BSD – inventory posting
7920 GL Dr 58012000 Other losses matl
7920 GL Cr 45500000 Other Gains matl
WRX – GR/IR clearing A/c
Posting Key 86/96
GL 13110100 Ext Proc Dom
GBB – offsetting entry inv posting
FOR 7920 – General Modification AUF,AUA,
VAX, VBR, PK 81/91,GL 50200000 Cost of Fin
Goods Sold
FI-SD INTEGRATION
1. Automatic Posting Procedures GBB –offsetting entry inv posting
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
131 by Lawrence Rebello
[OBYC – can be accessed thru
Config Auto Postings in
MM/A/C DETER W/O
WIZARD]
FOR 7920 – General Modification AUF,AUA,
VAX, VBR, PK 81/91,GL 50200000 Cost of Fin
Goods Sold
2. Assign GL A/c’s TC VKOA
Table 001 Cust Grp/Mat Grp/ Act Key
Copied from CACN TTSO
Table 002 Cust Grp/ Act Key
Copied from CACN TTSO
Table 003 Mat Grp/ Act Key
Copied from CACN TTSO
Table 004 General
Copied from CACN TTSO
Table 005 Account Key
Copied from CAIN 0001
Cond Type KOFI, Sales Org TTSO, AAGR for Cust
& Mat, Act Key ERL, GL A/C
51010100 Sales Product 1
Act Key MWS [taxes] GL A/c 24638000
TAXES
3. Check Calc Proc Already defined
4. Assign Country to Calc Proc Assigned
5. Maintain Tax Proc [TC – FTXP]
6. Define Tax Jurisdictions IN01 – IN32 defined
7. Define Tax Codes A1 output tax jur code IN10 – Karnataka LST 12%
defined CST FIELD NOT ACCESSIBLE as in
condition type JIP1,2 JIN1,2 level 1 was preset
instead of level 2. [ Acc seq TAXJ is ok?]
8. Tax Rates IN01 Andhra Pradesh LST 11.00 / CST 4.00
IN02 Arunachal Pradesh 11.50/4.00
IN03 Assam 11.25/4.00
IN04 Bihar 12.00/4.00
IN05 Goa 12.25/4.00
IN06 Gujarat 12.00/4.00
IN07 Haryana 13.00/4.00
IN08 Himachal Pradesh 13.50/4.00
IN09 Jammu & Kashmir 13.50/4.00
IN10 Karnataka 12.00
IN11 Kerala 11.50/4.00
IN12 Madhya Pradesj 11.00/4.00
IN13 Maharashtra 12.00
IN14 Manipur 10.00/4.00
IN15 Meghalaya 10.00/4.00
IN16 Mizoram 10.00/4.00
IN17 Nagaland 10.00/4.00
IN18 Orissa 11.00/4.00
IN19 Punjab 12.50/4.00
IN20 Rajasthan 12.00/4.00
IN21 Sikkim 10.00/4.00
IN22 Tamil Nadu 12.00
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
132 by Lawrence Rebello
IN23 Tripura 10.00/4.00
IN24 Uttar Pradesh 11.00/4.00
IN25 West Bengal 12.00
IN26 Andaman & Nicobar Islands 10.00/4.00
IN27 Chandigarh 11.00/4.00
IN28 Dadra & Nagar Haveli 10.00/4.00
IN29 Daman & Diu 10.00
IN30 Delhi 10.00
IN31 Lakshwadeep 10.00/4.00
IN32 Pondicherry 10.00/4.00
9. Define Tax Accounts [TC – OB40]
JIN1 Act Key MWS GL 13113400
JIN2 Act Key MW3 GL 13113410
JIP1 & 2 Act Key NVV
10. Tax in Customer [TC – XD01]
SD/Basic Functions/Taxes/
Define Tax Relevancy of Master Records : In
customer taxes, create NEW JIN1 0,& 1 for exempt
& fully taxable, similar for JIN2.
Define Tax Determination Rules : In country IN,
change sequence 1,2 to JIN1,2. This will ensure
JIN1,2 in VD01.
ASSET ACOUNTING
11. Org Stru / Check country
specific settings
[TC – OA08 ] No Changes
12. Copy COD EC 08 OIN copied to TTBP
13. Assign Input Tax indicator for
Non – Taxable Transactions
OBCL A0, and V0 assigned.
14. Assign COD to Co Code OAOB - assigned [if u skip 11, assignment will
not take place]
15. Specify No Assignment across
Co Codes
AO11 no change
16. Specify A/c Determination No changes
17. Define No Ranges AS08 01 to 06 defined
18. Define Asset Classes OAOA no change
19. Assign GL A/c’s AO90 Plant
& Mach 20000
30000 Furnitures………………...
20200000 - acqui & prodn costs
21400000 - contra acqui
58190000 - loss on ret w/o revenue
21500000 - clearing a/c asset sale [xxx]
58190000 - loss on asset sale
45100000 - gain from asset sale
20210000 - ord acc dep
57000000 - exp dep mfg
20600000 - acqui & prodn costs
21400000 - contra acqui
58190000 - loss on ret w/o revenue
21500000 - clearing a/c asset sale [xxx]
58190000 - loss on asset sale
45100000 - gain from asset sale
20610000 - ord acc dep
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
133 by Lawrence Rebello
31000 Vehicles………………...
32000 Hardware………………...
57200000 - exp dep admn
20700000 - acqui & prodn costs
21400000 - contra acqui
58190000 - loss on ret w/o revenue
21500000 - clearing a/c asset sale [xxx]
58190000 - loss on asset sale
45100000 - gain from asset sale
20710000 - ord acc dep
57100000 - exp dep sales
20500000 - acqui & prodn costs
21400000 - contra acqui
58190000 - loss on ret w/o revenue
21500000 - clearing a/c asset sale [xxx]
58190000 - loss on asset sale
45100000 - gain from asset sale
20510000 - ord acc dep
57200000 - exp dep admn
A/C DETERMINATION NOT SAVED as on
07/08/04, started saving on 10/08/04
ACTIVITIES [ FOR PP ]
20. Actiivate ABC in Co Area TC – OKKP activated
21. Maintain Std Hier for Co Area TC – OKW1 assigned
22. Create Activity Type TC – KL01, SETUP, LABOUR & MACHINE
[A/c/Co/CCA/MD/ActType/IndvProc/Create]
Activity type MIN, CCtr Cat F prodn
Atyp Cat 1 Manual Entry, manual alloc
Price Indicator 1 Plan price auto based on activity
Output unit MIN minutes
23. Create Price Planning TC – KP26 [A/c/Co/CCA/Pl/ActOutPrices/Change]
AR & AP
24. Define A/c Groups [Cust] Preset
25. Create No Ranges [Cust] XDN1 - created
26. Assign No Ranges to Cust A/c
Groups
Assigned
27. Define A/c Groups [vendors] Preset
28. Create No Ranges [vendors] XKN1 - created
29. Assign No Ranges to Vend A/c
Groups
Assigned
30. Check doc types OBA7 - preset
31. Define Posting Keys OB41 - preset
32. Default values OBU1 - preset
33. Define a/c’s for Cash Discount
taken
GL 44310000
34. Define a/c’s for lost cash disc GL 44310000
35. Define a/c’s for over / under
payments
GL 58160000
36. A/c’s for exch rate diffs 13110000, 24430000
37. A/c’s for rounding diffs 58242000
38. A/c’s for bank charges Trans BSP GL 56000000
39. Posting Keys for Clearing Outgoing Payment
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
134 by Lawrence Rebello
Customers 05/18
Vendors 25/38
GL 40/50
Incoming Payment
Customers 08/15
Vendors 28/35
GL 40/50
Credit Memo
Customers 02/11
Vendors 21/32
GL 40/50
Transfer Posting with Clearing
Customers 07/17
Vendors 27/37
GL 40/50
40. HOUSE BANKS
41. Define House Banks House Bank SBI
Branch Churchgate
Swift 123456
Bank Number 11111
Bank Key SBI
A/c Id SBI
Bank A/c No 11111
Alt A/c No 55555
GL 24520000
Discounts 30000000
42. Setup Co Codes for Payment
Transactions
TTBP Tolerance days 3, Vendors FP, Customers
FPJ
43. Setup Paying Co Codes TTBP, min amt for o/p 10.00 INR, 1 b/e per due dt
44. Payment Methods per country IN INR preset.
45. Payment Methods per Co
Code
TTBP C cheque 9,999,999.00 inr
E cash 9,999,999.00 inr
T bank tr 9,999,999.00 inr
46. Bank determination for
payment transactions
Ranking order 1 for C cheque
Bank A/c’s SBI 25420000
Available amounts 9,999,999,999.00
Value Date 9,999,999.00 3 days
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
135 by Lawrence Rebello
47. Number ranges for cheques 100001 - 100100 lot 101 TC – FCHI
48. DUNNING
49. Define Dunning Area TTBP [dunning notices not yet defined ???]
50. Define Dunning Keys Preset.
51. Define Dunning Procedures TC – FBMP create new proc & copy from 0001
After defining/copying the texts, the above error
[48] disappears.
52. Define Interest Rates [ To be done after defining interest indicator. ]
53. Dunning TC – F150 after passing some entries in TELCO
customer, dunning params were saved and run.
54. INTEREST Configured on [ 23/08/2004 ]
55. Define Int Calc Types T1, T2 for item and balance @ 10 % defined for
TTBP.
56. Define No Ranges for Int forms Preset
57. Def A/c Bal Int Calc T1 & T2 defined
58. Def Ref Int Rates T1 & T2 defined
59. Define Time Based Terms Defined
60. Enter Interest Values 10% for T1 & T2
61. Interest Posting Recd 44020000
Paid 56000000
Checking Sample FI Configuration Sequence
1. SCC4 Locked
2. OX02 View Company Code - TTBP
3. OBY6 View Co Code Global Data - TTBP
4. OB45 View Credit Control Areas - TTCC
5. OX06 Overview Co Areas - TTBP
6. OX10 View Plants - TPLA - TPLX
7. OVXB View Divisions - LD Lubricant Division
8. OX09 View Storage Locations - TPLA – TSA1 st loc for TPLA
9. OX08 View Purch Orgn – TCPO, TCPS – TCPX
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
136 by Lawrence Rebello
10. OVX5 View Sales Orgn – TTSO
11. OVXI View Dist Chanels - CS, DS, ST
12. OVX1 View Sales Offices - 19 sales offices
13. OVX4 View Sales Groups – Cust Sales Gr, Dist Sales Gr
14. OVXD View Shipping Points - 23 shipping points.
15. OB29 Fiscal Yr variants - V3 12 + 4
16. OB13 COA - CAIN
17. OX06 Controlling Area – Basic Data
18. OKKP Controlling Area – General Controlling
19. OX01 Purchasing Org Assigned to Co Code – Only CPO assigned
20. OB62 Assign COA to Co Code CAIN - TTBP
21. OB37 Assign FYV to Co Code V3 - TTBP
22. OX19 Co area - Basic Data
23. OB45 View Credit Control Areas - TTCC
24. OB01 View Cr Risk Mgmt Categories
25. OB02 View Cr Mgmt Cr Representative Groups
26. OB45 Repeated ???
27. OB38 Assign Co Code to CCA TTBP - TTCC
28. 0KE5 EC-PCA Controlling area settings NOT CONFIGURED
29. OX10 View Plants
30. OX18 Allocation Plants – Co Code 23 plants
31. OX09 View Storage Locations
32. OVXD View Shipping Points - 24 shipping points
33. EC07 Create Shipping points – created 24 shipping points
34. OX08 View Purch Orgn - 1+6 PO defined.
35. OX01 Purchasing Org Assigned to Co Code – Only CPO assigned
36. OX17 Plants - Purch Orgn 6 PO assigned
37. OME4 Purchasing Groups – 4 groups RM, Pack, Consu, Addl defined
38. OVX5 Sales Orgn TTSO defined
39. OVXA Sales org – Divi TTSO - LD.
40. OVXI Dist Channels CS, DS, ST
41. OVXG Sales Area SO - DC – Div TTSO, CS,DS,ST, LD.
42. OVX1 View Sales Offices
43. OVXM Sales Area – sales offices 19 assigned
44. OVX4 Sales Groups CSG, DSG
45. OVXJ Sales Offices to sales Groups 19 assigned
46. OVX3 Sorg - Co Code TTBP - TTSO
47. OVX6 Sorg Dist Chan to Plant TTSO
48. OVXK Dist Channel – Sorg TTSO - CS,DS.ST.
49. OVXC Ship Pts – Plant 23 assigned.
50. OVXB View Divisions LD lubricant div
51. OVFL Sales area to Credit Control Area - TTSO,CS,LD,TTCC
52. OAOA SETUP ASSET CLASSES - preset
53. OBC4 Field Status Groups
54. OBC5 Assign Co Code to FSV TTBP - TATA
55. OB53 Retained Earnings A/c 11610000
56. FSP1 Edit GL A/c COA data.
57. FSP2 Edit GL A/c COA data.
58. FSP3 Edit GL A/c COA data.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
137 by Lawrence Rebello
59. FS01 Edit GL a/c Centrally
60. FS02 Edit GL a/c Centrally
61. FS03 Edit GL a/c Centrally
62. FS04 Central GL A/c Changes
63. FS05 Edit GL a/c Centrally
64. FS06 Edit GL a/c Centrally
65. FBL3 GL A/c Line Item Display
66. FB03 Display Document
67. OBD4 GL A/c Groups
68. FSS1 Edit GL a/c Co Code Data
69. OMWM Valuation Control
70. OMWD A/c Deter for Valuation Areas - Valuation Grouping Code NOT
DEFINED NOT ASSIGNED
71. OMSK A/c Cat Ref Val Classes
72. OMSY MM view on Co Codes open for per 6/2004
73. OMS2 Material Types - preset
74. MMNR Material Master No Ranges [very small intervals]
75. OMS1 Units of Measure Groups - NO ENTRIES
76. OMSF Material Groups. G01 – G05
77. OVZC Customer No Ranges – Defined.
V-03 - V-09 Customer Master - No Entries
78. OVT0 Customer A/c Groups - preset
79. OVS9 Customer Groups - Industry & Retail
80. OBB8 Terms of Payment 0001, 0002
81. OBA4 “ “ defined for TTBP
XD01,2,3,4 [RFDABL00 ??]
82. OMSG Vendor A/c Groups - preset
83. OMSJ Vendor No Ranges - defined
84. OBA3 Tolerance Group TATA defined.
XK01,2,3,4,5,6, FK02,3,4,5,6 Vendor SAIL1 ?????
85. OKEO Std Hierarchy - CC group - defined & assigned.
86. KS01 Create Cost Center - created.
87. KA01 Create Cost Element - created
88. KA02 Change Cost Element
89. KA03 Display Cost Element
90. KA04 Delete Cost Element
91. KA05 Display Change Documents
92. KA06 Create Secondary Cost Element
93. KL01 Create Activity Type
94. KL02 Change Activity Type
95. KL03 Display Activity Type
96. KL04 Delete Activity Type
97. KL05 Display Change Documents – Activity Type
98. KP26 Change Activity Type / Price Planning.
99. KP27 Display Activity Type / Price Planning
100. KSBT Activity Type Price Reports
101. KO01 Create I/o [not in use]
102. KO02 Change I/o [not in use]
103. KO03 Display I/o [not in use]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
138 by Lawrence Rebello
104. KO04 Order Manager
105. KOK3 Collective Display for I/o
106. KO12 Change Overall Planning
107. KO13 Display Overall Planning
108. KO22 Change Original Budget
109. FD24 Credit Mgmt Changes [Cr Co Area]
110. FD32 Cust Credit Mgmt Changes [Cr Co Area]
111. FD33 Display Cust Credit Mgmt Changes [Cr Co Area]
Advanced Planner & Optimiser [Supply Chain Planning &
Optimization]
Provides a complete suite of supply chain planner applications, based on SAP’s live cache
technology which allows forecasting, planning & optimizing to be executed in realtime. SAP
APO is a separate SAP solution with its own release cycle. Each of SAP APO components like
Demand Planning can be implemented as a standalone product or as an integrated part of the
business framework.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
139 by Lawrence Rebello
Global ATP [available to promise] :– matches supply to demand on a truly world wide scale,
and gives customers reliable delivery commitments by means of both realtime checks &
sophisticated simulation methods.
Production Planning & Detailed Schedules : - optimizes the use of resources & creates
accurate plant by plant production schedules in order to shorten prodn life cycles and respond
rapidly to changes in market demand.
Supply Network Planning :- matches purchasing, production & transportation processes to
demand, and balances & optimizes your entire supply network.
Demand Planning :-
Identifies & analyzes patterns & fluctuations in demand, and creates accurate dynamic demand
forecasts.
Supply Chain Cockpit :-
Models, monitors & manages your supply chain with a specially designed GUI. The supply chain
cockpit provides users with a birds eye view of all activities & applications.
SAP LES [logistics execution system] :-
Is part of SAP’s unique Supply Chain Management initiative, and lets you create links between
the production, procurement, storage, distribution, transportation, sales and service processes.
It helps keep customers happy, staff productive and decision makers informed. It means real
time data for decision making, simulation and planning.
SAP B2B Procurement Solution : -
Enables open, full cycle, inter enterprise procurement, and covers all processes from creation of
a requisition, with or without catalogs, to the payment of the invoice. All end users are able to
purchase goods and services straight from their desktops, leaving purchase departments free to
focus on strategic purchasing operations. Using this compelling b2b procurement solution,
companies can streamline their requisition & indirect procurement processes, and cut the
overall cost of procurement, while providing the purchasing department, with visibility and
control across the entire procurement chain. SAP b2b procurement includes the creation &
maintenance of requisitions, purchase orders & reservations with or without catalogs, approval
& rejection, desktop receiving and service entry support, status & tracking, invoicing &
performance reporting functions.
SAP BIW [bus info warehouse]
Enables analysis of data from operationsl R/3 applications or any other bus applications,
including external data sources such as databases, online services and the internet. SAP BIW
supports OLAP and is particularly suited for processing large volumes of operational & historical
data.
MYSAP.COM
MYSAP.COM is a comprehensive, open, e-business solutions environment, comprising of
portals, industry specific enterprise applications, internet applications and services, as well as
XML based technology – all of which combine to enable companies to participate in the Internet
economy. The bus objective of mYSap.com are to empower people to create value, and enable
one-step bus transactions. MYSAP.com places the internet at the center of SAP’s activities. It
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
140 by Lawrence Rebello
leverages all of SAP’s key assets, including its extensive product portfolio, customer base,
partner community and expertise in integrating business processes.
In the old economy, integration meant business process integration. In the new
economy, it requires integration of processes between enterprises. ERP made SAP R/3 a
worldwide standard system. Since 1996 SAP R/3 has been e-commerce capable. SAP products
incorporated business technology for the future allowing customers to be ready for the future
without system change for the new economy, where the requirement is for collaboration more
than working together. Processes, where many users participate and can be executed
simultaneously as a one step business.
Sap focus earlier was company created, now it is market centered [via the internet]
where mySAP.com places the internet at the center of SAP’s activities. It leverages all of SAP’s
key asets including its extensive product portfolio, customer base, partner community and
expertise in integrating business processes. MYSAP.com is the collaborative environment
providing personalized business solutions on demand.
WorkPlace:- consists of links inside & outside a company’s boundaries. Links can be
made to
Non mySAP components - Ext systems using open internet standards.
MySAPcomponent - classical & new web based R/3 transactions [R/3
standard system, new dimensions, industry solutions],
reports [BIW reports with BW 2.0a], Knowledge WH
contents
MYSAP.com internet services - mySAP.com marketplace
Any internet or intranet web sites.
Key Benefits of a Workplace
Access to all necessary internet & external services through one screen.
Seamless integration in mySAP.com environment.
Protal is tailored to users role in the company.
Single sign on access to all services.
User friendly web browser interface.
Access via the Internet anytime, anywhere.
Workplace is an application on a users desktop that co-operates with a web browser &
provides a personalized, role specific view on the entire business world. This business
world includes market places, applications, services and content provided by a company
over the Intranet or other companies via the internet.
Marketplace portal is a place on the web where communities can exchange goods and services
electronically. The mySAP.com marketplace is a public business portal hosted by SAP. Anyone
who sells or buys can participate in the mySAP.com marketplace. It is not for just SAP
applications or SAP customers. The mission of the mySAP.com marketplace, is to engineer
business collaboration across enterprises via the internet. The main components of mySAP.com
marketplace include :
MyHome : - personalized homepage for the registered user with favourites from the
mySAP.com web site.
Communities : - content rich data organized along the vertical & horizontal industries
supported by SAP.
One Step Business : - portion of the site where users can browse merchant web sites
and procure products and services.
Services : - internet services are available for the user to which he can subscribe.
Key Benefits of the marketplace : -
Personalized home page available for registered users.
Streamlined business process flow with one step business.
Access to a broad scope of suppliers.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
141 by Lawrence Rebello
Reduce costs ofinteraction with external partners
Content rich communities available for better decision making & to interact with other
business professionals.
Direct access to value add internet services.
Miscellaneous : PLEASE DO NOT EXPERIMENT
Report Painter
Report Painter allows you to create reports using data from SAP application components, which you can
adapt to meet your individual requirements.
Many of your reporting requirements can already be met by using the standard reports provided by
various SAP application components. If these SAP standard reports do not meet your reporting needs,
Report Painter enables you to define your specific reports quickly and easily.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
142 by Lawrence Rebello
Report Painter fulfills a function similar to Report Writer, but is easier to use. Most of the functions found
in Report Writer have been built into Report Painter; however, you do not need to be familiar with all
Report Writer concepts (such as Sets) in order to use Report Painter.
When executing a Report Painter report, it is displayed by the system in Report Writer format. You thus
have access to the same functions as for Report Writer reports defined in the same way, and can
combine Report Painter and Report Writer reports together in a report group.
Report Painter uses a graphical report structure, which forms the basis for your report definition and
displays the rows and columns as they appear in the final report output.
To facilitate report definition, you can use many of the standard reporting objects provided by SAP (such
as libraries, row/column models, and standard layouts) in your own specific reports. When you define a
Report Painter report you can use groups (sets). You can also enter characteristic values directly.
Advantages of Report Painter include:
• Flexible and simple report definition
• Report definition without using sets
• Direct layout control: The rows and columns are displayed in the report definition as they appear
in the final report output, making test runs unnecessary.
For comprehensive information on the Report Painter, see the SAP Library, under Financial Accounting
→ Special Purpose Ledger → InfoSystem / Report Painter Reports
Report Variants
Creating Report Variants :
1. From the menu bar, choose System → Services → Reporting.
2. In the Program field, enter the report name. (If you do not know the name, see Finding the Name
of a Report You Want to Execute.) as explained below :
Choose System → Services → Reporting.
The report selection screen appears.
Choose Utilities → Find Program. Or, choose the possible entries icon for Program,
and select an entry from the dropdown list box.
The report search screen (ABAP Program Directory) appears:
In the Program field, enter any part of the report name that you know, plus any wildcards
( * or + ), as needed. * = multiple chars, + = 1 char.
Choose Execute.
A list of reports appears.
Place the cursor on the report name, and choose Choose. Or, double-click the report
name.
Choose Program → Execute. [ using back till variant screen, the program name will be in
the box ]
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
143 by Lawrence Rebello
3. From the menu bar, choose Goto → Variants.
4. The ABAP Variants initial screen appears
5. In the Variant field, enter a name for this variant, and choose Create. You can use any
combination of characters to create the variant name except for special characters, such as the
percent sign (%) or dollar sign ($).
The selection criteria screen for the report appears.
6. Enter values in the selection criteria input fields.
7. Select attributes [ top button ] enter description & save.
Displaying Available Report Variants :
1. From the menu bar, choose System → Services → Reporting.
2. In the Program field, enter the report name.
3. From the application toolbar, choose Overview of variants.
4. All the variants attached to the report appear.
5. To view the contents of the variant, place the cursor on a variant and choose Variants → Display
values.
6. To use the variant, highlight the variant and choose Execute with variant.
7. The system displays the selection screen for the report, complete with data.
Using Report Variants :
1. From the menu bar, choose System → Services → Reporting.
2. In the Program field, enter the report name.
3. Choose With variant.
4. In the Variant field, enter the desired variant. To obtain a list of available variants, choose the
possible entries button.
5. To execute the report with the variant, choose Execute.
The system displays the selection screen filled with data.
WorkFlows : PLEASE DO NOT EXPERIMENT
• Configuring a WorkFlow
o Create a Simple Oraganisational Unit
In this section you will create a simple organizational structure. You will notice that this is not just a
technical representation but also reflects the way a company handles organizational management.
• There are direct relationships between the different
objects.
For example: A position is assigned to an organizational unit. The position is described by a job
and a user is assigned to this position.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
144 by Lawrence Rebello
• The positions and the relationships also have validity dates.
For example: A position can be created in advance so that it is valid from the beginning of the
next month. A user can be assigned to this position for the next sixth months leaving it vacant
after this date. The vacancy can be filled at any time by the system administrator.
As you can see, this makes it very easy for the workflow administrator to keep the organizational structure
up-to-date, and to maintain the assignments and reorganizations in advance so that they automatically
come into effect at midnight on the appropriate day.
Tip: Never delete positions, users, or any other organizational unit. Use the validity date to delimit the
existence of the organizational object. This is easy and ensures that the reporting and auditing work
consistently.
This tutorial shows you how to create an organizational unit from scratch.
• First Step in Creating the Organizational Plan
• Specify Validity of the Main Organizational Unit
• Description of the Main Screen
• Create a Hierarchy of Organizational Units
• Create an Organizational Sub-Unit
• Create Positions
• Create Positions (Part 2)
• Describe the Position
• Search for a User
• Select a User
• Assign the User to the Position
• Determine the Validity
• The Organizational Unit Is Complete
• First Step in Creating the Organizational Plan
o SAP/Tools/BusWF/Dev/DefTools/OrgMgmt/OrgPlan/Create [ PPOCW ]
• Specify Validity of the Main Organizational Unit
All organizational objects have a validity period. This allows you to set up an organizational object in
advance. It also allows you to specify a termination date. Later, if there is an organizational reshuffle this
termination date can be brought forward.
The organizational unit is only valid for this duration. Later, if it is assigned to a workflow task no agents
will be found outside this validity period.
The default is to start immediately and terminate in the year 9999 - in other words forever.
• Description of the Main Screen
The maintenance screen is divided into four frames.
1 Maintenance frame. This frame displays the main object and its relationships - in this case the new
organizational unit that you are creating. TOP RIGHT
2 Detail frame. This displays the detailed information about the organizational object selected
in the maintenance frame. You can switch between different types of detailed information (views)
using the tab strips. MIDDLE RIGHT create as Org Unit BOOKDEPT & Desc as ORG UNIT FOR
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
145 by Lawrence Rebello
BOOK
3 Search criteria frame. This frame is independent of the maintenance frame and the detail frame. It
allows you to search for new objects which can be displayed or linked to other objects. LEFT TOP
4 Search results frame. The results of the search based on the search criteria frame is displayed
here. An object can either be dragged and dropped into the maintenance frame in a relationship (such as
a user to be assigned to an organizational unit) or displayed in the maintenance frame by double-clicking
on it. LEFT BOTTOM
The blue arrow buttons ( ) are used to navigate back and forth between the views that you have
displayed. For example, while you are displaying the organizational unit you may search for another
organizational unit to compare them. Double-clicking on the new unit will display it in the maintenance
frame. Choosing the blue "back" arrow will return to view the original unit. Do not confuse this with the
undo button ( ), which undoes changes made up to the last save.
The frames can be resized by stretching their frame outline and the detail frame can be eliminated (or
recovered) by clicking on its title bar.
Do not forget to regularly save the data ( ).
• Create a Hierarchy of Organizational Units
Top Left NEW ORGN UNIT becomes ORGN UNIT FOR BOOK after Save of Right
Middle i.e. detail frame.
• Create an Organizational Sub-Unit
The list of object types that can be created depends on the original object selected.
An organizational object can be assigned:
• Subsidiary organizational objects
• Positions
• Tasks (single step tasks used in a workflow)
• Workflows (meaning that anyone assigned to the original organization has the authorization to start
this workflow). Normally you create a workflow from the Workflow Builder rather than this screen.
Select orgn unit by double clicking on it.
• Create Positions
Type in a description of the new orgn unit [ e.g. Southern Division ], and create an addl orgn unit.
Save the changes you have made so far.
Select one of the orgn units & create positions for it usingthe create button again.
• Create Positions (Part 2) & Describe the Position
This time select position and dbl click
Enter a description for the position e.g. Reader1, & JOB as BookReader.[ or assign a JOB using F4 ]
• Search for a User
Assign an existing user to the position, by searching for a user.
• Select a User & Assign the User to the Position
Enter thesearch criteria & find users matching. Drag & drop the user chosen into the
postion [ Reader1 ] in the frame on the right i.e. Task Assignment Frame.
• Determine the Validity Accept the default.
• The Organizational Unit Is Complete Now you have assigned a user to the position and you can
continue this for other positions. Your organizational unit is now complete.
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
146 by Lawrence Rebello
ASSIGN AGENTS
Start the Customizing Transaction
• Select Task-Specific Customizing for Workflow
• Expand the Application Hierarchy
• Select the Application
• Task List
• Make the Task a General Task
• The Tasks Have Been Classified
• Select Event Activation: USE IMG/BasisCompo/BusMgmt/SAPBusWF/ Perform Task Specific
Customizing
• GOTO Log Gen/Log Basic Data/Bus Partners/Vendor Master & assign agents to tasks FA LO-
MD-BP-VM.
• Select the tasks shown in the chapter description, and make the task a general task using the
ATTRIBUTE button.
• Select General task in the dialog box.
• Choose Edit / Refresh Index to refresh the buffers.
ACTIVATE EVENTS
Select Event Activation
• Activate the Event
• All Events Activated
• Return to the application hierarchy & select event activation to activate the event
linkage for this WF.
• GOTO Log Gen/Log Basic Data/Bus Partners/Vendor Master & activate event linking FA- LO-
MD-BP-VM.
• Select one of the events & use activate icon. Repeat for other events.
• Your WF will now start automatically. All the events have been activated. Whenever a
vendor is blocked, this workflow will automatically start. Since the tasks are general tasks,
everyone in your system will receive the work items in their inbox, whenever this occurs.
The belowmentioned are not part of the above.
IMG/BASISCOMPO/BUSMGMT/SAPBUSWF/
• Maintain Std Settings [ SWU3 ]
o Automatic Customization
o Test RFC Destination
o Start Verification Workflow
• Bus Workplace [ SO01 ]
IMG/FA/ARAP/BusTrans/Release for Payment/
• Create Workflow Variant for Release for Payment
• Assign Company Code Workflow Variant for Release for Payment
• Define Release Approval Groups for Release for Payment
• Define Release Approval Paths for Release for Payment
• Assign Release Approval Paths for Release for Payment
FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling
147 by Lawrence Rebello
• Assign Release Approval Procedure for Release for Payment
• Define Relevant Document Types for Release for Payment
• Define Users with Authorization to Release Payment
Schedule Manager - SCMA
• Create a task list [top header/tasklist/create]
o Enter name of task
o Enter desc, calender etc & save
o Tasklist appears in the tasklist
o Change task list [top]
 Right click on task list
 Create task
• Enter desc, program/transaction, start time etc
o Schedule a task for a particular date and time.
 Return to Scheduling [TOP]
 Select Task, right click & simulation of scheduling
 Enter planned run date
o Select task & execute IN BACKGROUND [TOP HEADER]
 Enter output device [LP01], title & enter
 Click immediate & save
 Background job is scheduled
 System/Services/jJobOverview/execute [sm37]
 Click jobname & view spool [xxx]
o You can also create a RUN SCHEDULE from
IMG/FA/GLOBAL/DOCUMENT/RECURRING ENTRIES/ DEFINE RUN
SCHEDULES & ENTER RUN DATES. These can be incorporated in a schedule
manager as tasks & then executed.

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

ROADMAP
Week 1 :
Introduction Enterprise Structure To SAP, view and understand the overview file. Define Company, Company code & Assign the same. Maintain Fiscal Year Variant, Posting Period Variant, Document Number Ranges, Document Type, Posting Keys, Field Status Variants & Groups & Assignment of the same wherever necessary. Create a simple Chart of Accounts, Assign the same, Edit GL A/c’s, Enter Transactions, Post with reference, Account Assignment Model, Recurring Document and Batch Processing, Document Parking and Document Extract. Understand the Closing concept, Close the company created, view the Balance Sheet, Accounts, carry forward balances to the next year, and view the Retained Earnings Account. Create a company encompassing all features of the SAP standard company 0001, create a COA in line with the INT COA, Assign as necessary, Edit Gl A/c Collectively, Enter Transactions, Post with reference, Account Assignment Model, Recurring Document and Batch Processing, Document Parking and Document Extract. Create GL A/c for Cash Journal, Document Types, Number Range Interval, Setup Cash Journal, Business Transactions, and Posting. Understand the concept of a non-jurisdictional Tax Proceedure, Condition Type, Access Sequence, Account Key, Tax Codes, Input / Output Tax, Calculation and Posting. Jurisdictional Tax Proceedure will be configured independently by the student at this stage. Create Customer Master Records, raise invoices, receive incoming payment, assign and clear open items, Down payment request, creation and clearing, Maintain Terms of Payment. Instalment Payment terms to be configured independently by the student. Define Dunning Area, Dunning Keys, Dunning Proceedure, Dunning Notices. Define Interest Calculation Types, Number Ranges, Arrears Interest Calculation, Interest Run and Posting. Balance interest to be configured independently. Create Vendor Master Records, Input Tax, raise bills, create outgoing payments. Understand the concept of WT, Basic Settings, Calculation and Postings. Extended WT will be configured independently by the student. Define House Banks, Outgoing Payment Configuration, Number Ranges for Cheques, and Bank Reconciliation. Automatic Payment Run to be configured independently. Understand the concept of foreign currency translations, enter exchange rates, valuate open items at closing with reversals. Define Credit Control Area, Valuation Level, Plant, Location, Division, Sales Organisation, Distribution Channel, Storage Location, Shipping Point and Assignment of the same. Define Common Distribution Channel and Division. Check Enterprise Structure for Sales and Distribution. Understand integration concepts, and assign GL A/c’s. Create material, initial stock entry, check stock of material. Understand the concept of pricing procedure, condition type, access sequence, account key, proceedure determination, and maintenance of condition records. Create Sales Order, Outbound Delivery, Billing Document, Accounting Entries. Understand Organisation Structure, Chart of Depreciation, Depreciation Areas, Asset Classes. Define and Assign GL A/c’s, Posting Keys, Field Status Variants, Tax Indicators. Create Asset, acquire with / without vendor [ opening balances ]. Understand Depreciation Keys. Understand Acquisitions, Retirements, Depreciation Run and Posting. Understand Legacy Data Upload using Microsoft Excel. Maintain Controlling Area, Assign the same and maintain number ranges Create Default Cost Center, Primary Cost Element, Secondary Cost Element Activate Cost Center Accounting in Controlling Area, Maintain Standard Hierarchy, Create Cost Center Groups and Cost Centers, Select Planner Profile, Cost and Activity Input, Enter Plan and Actual amounts, Generate Variances, Redistribution and Assessment of Primary and Secondary Cost Elements across Cost Centers.

Simple Chart of Accounts Period End Closing

Week 2 :
International COA

Cash Journal Taxation

Week 3 :
Accounts Receivable Dunning Interest

Week 4 :
Accounts Payable Std Witholding Tax House Banks Foreign Currency Translation

Week 5 :
SD/MM definition, assignment, and integration Create Material [FERT] Pricing Proceedure Sales Order & Billing

Week 6 :

Asset Accounting Integration Asset Data Depreciation Transactions Legacy Data Upload

Week 7 :

Controlling Cost Element Accounting Cost Center Accounting

1

by

Lawrence Rebello

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

FI - Notes :
SM01 : LIST OF ALL TRANSACTION CODES SM04 : TO DISPLAY OTHER USERS SM12 : TO CLEAR LOCKS SM35 : TO PROCESS SESSIONS SE09 : TO RELEASE TRANSPORT REQUESTS [sap/tools/abap ………….workbench/overview/transpost organizer] SE11 : FOR DATABASE TABLES SE17 : TO ANALYSE TABLE ERRORS SE38 : ABAP EDITOR & ALL OPTIONS TO GENERATE , EXECUTE ETC. SHDB : Batch Data Communication SBWP : Business Workplace [ for SAP Mail etc ] SEARCH_SAP_MENU : TO SEARCH FOR MENU PATH THRU TRAN CODES Some Commonly Used Terms : IDES International Demonstration Evaluation Server ASAP Accelerated SAP [ systems, applications and products ] CIN Version Country India Version LSMW Legacy System Migration Workbench CATT Computer Aided Testing Tool BDC Batch Data Communication CRM Customer Relationship Management SEM Strategic Enterprise Management BIW Business Information Warehouse KM Knowledge Management BOR Business Object Repository SQL Structured Query Language GUI Graphical User Interface RFID Radio Frequency Identification APO Advanced Planning Optimiser EAI Enterprise Application Integration IDOC Intermediary Document EDI Electronic Data Interchange ALE Application Link Enabling - used to distribute data [master & tran] across different systems BAPI Business Application Programming Interface ABAP Advance Business Application Programing Language LES Logistics Execution System BPML Business Process Master List OLAP Online Analytical Processing ATP Available to Promise B2B Business to Business OSS Online Support System BADI Business Add In CMOD Customer Modification ERP Enterprise Resource Planning EWS Enterprise Wide System BPR Business Process Re Engineering SME Small & Medium Enterprises

2

by

Lawrence Rebello

DO NOT COPY AT THIS STAGE. • TO CHECK GLOBAL SETTINGS . DEFINE / DELETE / CHECK COMPANY CODE : • Edit company code data [ OX02 ] : Create your co code. etc. Branches & Offices can be configured. Chart of Accounts. IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Financial Accounting • DEFINE COMPANY : Define company. IMG > Enterprise Structure > Assignment > Financial Accounting Assign Company Code to Company All the company codes which were under one group are assigned to the Group. Note: If in run-time. eg: K4 Type : JAN –DEC 1 . The purpose is to assign common variables defined at the Company level to the company codes also and for consolidated reporting purposes. SAP has provided various fiscal year variants. and o other organizational units. IMG/ES/ASSIG/FA : ASSIGN COMPANY CODE TO COMPANY : Assign the company created under 1 to the company code created under 2. SAP adjusts the months that fall in next calendar by “an year shift variable of -1”. use SM12 transaction.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE : • In “Definition” stage. eg.  3 Note: In case of fiscal types which are different from calendar year.    • Note: While saving. such activity will be locked for editing. To unlock.[ OBY6 ] • IMG/FA/GLOBAL SETTINGS/FISCAL YEAR .12 V3 Type : APR-MAR 1 . enter address etc.r. which though falling in next fiscal period will be reflected in the accounts of preceding fiscal only. Branches & Offices under this group. date of change made. It is to put in existence a Company with all its addresses and other details. A lot of data or SAP implementation variables can be defined at the Company level and shall be applicable to all the Subsidiaries.[ OB29 ] IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Fiscal Year Fiscal year variant is maintained at the company code level.t tables changed. hence only assignment is needed. a ‘Customizing Request’ Organizer prompts up – This stores changes made by every individual configuration w. Changes made can be viewed via Header > Utilities > Change Request Organizer (available only inside an IMG screen) Note: Any In-house Document (created by any user on the same client) can be recalled entering ‘*’ in the Reference Field and opting for ‘Tree On’. It can be used as a tool to troubleshoot the changes & also to put accountability on configuration makers. adjustment entries can be passed in following 4 special periods. A Company serves as a Global group under which various Subsidiaries. we define o Company o Credit control Area o Company codes o Business Area o Functional Area.12 All fiscal types come with 12 posting periods (months) and 4 special periods (months) i. while still in some activity. server goes down connection is lost. by Lawrence Rebello . Use “New Entries” to define a new Company.e. after regular entries in 12 normal posting periods.

and / or if some FY use a different no of PP. Oct 31 7 0 11. a lesser no of PP can be assigned. [ OB37 ] • • • 4 by Lawrence Rebello . Year dependent fiscal year means the start and end date of the PP of some FY will be different from the dates of other FY. FY can be defined separately in different modules. If one year of a FYV has less posting periods than others. Jun 30 3 0 7. This is accessed thru open / close posting periods. 2 14 3 0 for cur yr 4. Nov 30 8 0 12. Dec 31 9 0 Assign company code to Fiscal Year Variant. Feb 28 11 -1 3. 1 15 1 +1 for next yr 2. There can be a maximum of 12 normal posting periods and 4 special 13-16 posting periods. and for a Special Ledger ( where cross flow exists like PCA. Year dependent 2. Aug 31 5 0 9. Day : Last valid calender date to be specified for each period. 2 28 4 periods cannot be maintained for calender dependent FYV. Calender 4. Apr 30 1 0 5. Weekly will have 52 posting periods.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • Maintain Fiscal Year Variant : fiscal year can be 1. Shortened Period : Fiscal year is made up of periods 1 – 12. periods can be accessed and defined. The shortened FY and its no of PP has to be specified before the definition of period dates and for this year only. Mar 31 12 -1 4. This could be required if closing has to be made before the end of the normal FY. PCC etc ) there can be a maximum of 65 posting periods. Jan 31 10 -1 2. which will take precedence over global settings for that module. 1 31 2 -1 for last yr 3. Every business transaction is allocated to a posting period. Sep 30 6 0 10. Year Independent FY Month Day Period Year Shift 1. Once the FYV is defined. FYV 24 PP Month Day Period Year Shift 1. Year independent 3. it is called a shortened FY. Jul 31 4 0 8. Thus for a General Ledger there can be a maximum of 16 posting periods. FYV does not contain info whether a period is open or closed. May 31 2 0 6.

Assign the variant to the appropriate company code. The advantage of using variants is that it is easier to maintain properties which are common among several business objects ( FSV. The variant type defined above is populated with characteristics i. However if posting Here a name is given to the posting period variant. FYV. ‘A’ ‘D’ ‘K’ ‘M’ ‘S’ ‘V’ Activity: Variant 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 Assets Customers Vendors Materials G L Accounts Contract Accounts type + A D K M S frm a/c to a/c frm pd1 1 ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ 1 1 1 1 1 year 2004 2004 2004 2004 2004 2004 to prd year frm pd2 year to prd year 12 12 12 12 12 12 2005 13 2005 13 2005 13 2005 13 2005 13 2005 13 2005 2005 2005 2005 2005 2005 16 16 16 16 16 16 2005 2005 2005 2005 2005 2005 Assign Variants to Company Code Variant properties are assigned to a Company code. Account type. Account Nos and Posting Period.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling IMG/FA/GLOBAL SETTINGS/DOCUMENT • Posting Periods : The variant principle is widely used in the R/3 system to assign special properties to one or more R/3 objects. M & & ‘to a/c’ limit.e. & 13-16.e. A. OB52 • Assign Posting Period Variants to Company Code : assign.K4 2. D. S. • Define Variants for Open Posting Periods : define as necessary. 5 by Lawrence Rebello . a/c Define Variants for open Posting Period limits are required.2003 with periods 1-12. “zzzzzzzzz” must be entered in ‘to a/c’ field. Open & Close Posting Periods This function is used to allow posting any particular account within a any desired period only. Account types maintained by SAP are ‘+’ Valid for all account types Populating ‘+’ type is necessary even if all account types have been defined separately Imp: ‘+’ type can be defined without ‘frm a/c’ periods are across accounts. [ OBBP ] IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Posting Period K. Steps : Define the variant .calender year 3. Populate the variant . but for others i. PPV ) 1. in the combination of Variant type. SAP standard is 0001. [OBBO] • Open & Close Posting Periods : In case of a FY which spills over 2 years. define 2002-03 as 2002.

Copy to Fiscal Year : not necessary if copied earlier. SAP has defined 54 Document No Ranges ( 00 – 51 & X1 – used for Recurring Documents. [OBA7] Define Document Number Ranges : not necessary if copied earlier. Hence Document number range(s) used by any Company code can be copied to any other Company code. SAP does not use internal Number range but allows user to enter Document number manually.  Note: If document no range has been defined for any specific year only (first activity as above). document no ranges are defined for all years in that co code. is to be given by the user. When ‘External’ is selected. here range of one year can be copied to anther year within the same company code. is to be used or what should be the status of current document no. IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Document No Range Define Document Number Ranges Here Document No Ranges can be copied from any other existing Company code. One can select a document number range out of these ranges or range can also be altered according to ones own specification. External No range if checked. Copy to Fiscal Year If Document Number ranges have been defined as year-dependent.  Note: Copy function can be possible only if there is no other number range existing in the target fiscal year or the target company code. X2 – used for Sample Document).) can also altered. Intervals / Ranges be changed.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • • Document Number Ranges : Copy from. Once copied. internal no range is given. 6 by Lawrence Rebello .  Note: Copy function can be possible only if there is no other number range existing in the target fiscal year or the target company code. the same can be copied to another year in the same co code. Activity : Copy from to 0001 (SAP standard company) ABCD (IN01 does not have any doc no range) Copy to Company Code Document number ranges are Company code specific.e. Status (i. whether any external no. By putting 9999 in ‘To Year’ field. Copy to Company Code : not necessary if copied earlier.

G/L Account. • Required during Document Entry : 1.Debit Memo 5.Invoice 2. IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Document Header > Document Types • • • • Document types are defined for customer. 3. AA Vendor Pymt – KZ 7 by Lawrence Rebello .Payment 3. Moreover the desired number range intervals for each number range key based on the company code. Document numbers are chosen from this number range. Inter Company Posting. Customers 3. Document types differentiate business transactions and control document filing. A/c type allowed : 1.RG ---7. • Control Data : 1. 1. • Special Usage : 1.Customs Document 6.. Customer vendor check 3. 4. One number range can be used for several document types.Credit Memo 4. A . G . 2.RG ---• Maximum Exchange Rate Difference : in %age terms for each co code. A number range key is specified for each document type. E . Vendors 4. Document Header Text. Rollup – minimum details saved.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling IMG/FA/GLOBAL SETTINGS/DOCUMENT HEADER • Define Document Type : [ OBA7 ] Predefined document types are already in place. [ M avg translation rate ] • Assignment of Document Class to Document Type : Document class for Cr Memo would be C. SA – G/L a/c type. C . D . Negative postings allowed. Document types are valid for all clients. Material 5. Account Allocation • Default Value : Exchange rate type for foreign currency document ……. Planning 4. This means that one can specify intervals of different sizes for the same number range. Net Doc Tyoe – whether NETT 2. F . Assets 2. vendor and general ledger business transactions in Financial Accounting. Batch Input only. Cust Pymt – DZ Vendor Inv – KR. B . 2. Reference No. A number range is specified for each document type. The preset document types cover business transactions in Financial Accounting for: ? ? ? ? ? General ledger accounting Accounts receivable Int – DA Accounts payable Int – DA Asset accounting Consolidation SA Cust Invoice – DR.

Accounting.e.r. etc. etc in any particular data entry screen. Austria & Switzerland 3. Bear in mind that additional assignments [ i. Data fields that can be controlled by FSVs here are: General Data Additional account assignments Payment transactions Asset accounting Taxes Foreign Payments Consolidation Real Estate Management Financial Assets management Assign Company Code to Field Status Variant Here a Company is given the properties of FSV as defined above. ‘optional’ or ‘suppressed’ out of available fields w. A FSG determines the screen layout for doc entry. Optional / Required / Suppresed entry. material management. Standard . • Assign FSV to Company Code : assign. The FSG determines which fields are ready for input. France & Witholding Tax – for TDS. 40 50 Dr Cr G/L Account G/L Account Maintain Field Status Variant Field Status Variants determine which fields are ‘required’. There are standard SAP defined posting keys which one has to use. the definitions stored for the group are effective. Cost account. general. For eg.to be used.normally copy as. When a doc is entered. You group several field status groups into one field status variant. cost centers or orders ] are only possible if data can be entered in the corresponding fields. Fields can have the following statuses. IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Line Items > Controls One can customize the status of these groups as Define Posting Keys required. 2.t various information General. SAP has defined a variant type 0001 which contains more than 50 variant groups (all groups pertain to different information types say. This allows you to work with the same FSG in any no of co codes. Enter the FSG in the master record of the GL a/c. Asset account. [ OBC5 ] • Screen Variants for Doc Entry : 1. These groups are associated with respective G/L Accounts so that any data entry relating to that G/L Account will have fields based on properties of the FSV associated with such G/L Account. required and hidden. 8 by Lawrence Rebello . Material.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling IMG/FA/GLOBAL SETTINGS/LINE ITEM/CONTROLS • Posting Key [ OB41 ] : 40/50 Dr / Cr GL A/c [ global ] • Field Status Variant [ OBC4 ] : [ local ] . Sales. Assign a company code to a FSV.

If any employee(s) is to be allowed some other limits.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • Define Tolerance Groups for Employees : Not defining tolerance groups will restrict data entry.000 etc ] 2. balance is adjusted to the revenue or expense account (which can be a combination of absolute amount & a %)  Note: Allowed Payment differences are posted automatically within certain tolerance groups. Valuewise [upto 1. Cash Discounts 3. revenue or expense account as required. Payment Difference [not recd full amount] Assign User / Tolerance Groups : assign. Any difference is first adjusted to cash discount (to the extent allowed here and permitted by max cash discount % defined above) and if this limit is exhausted. This way the system can post the difference by correcting the cash discount or by posting to a separate expense or revenue account. amount limits are pre-defined for employees w. [ OBA0 / OBA4 ] 1. [ Smith = generic ] IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Line Items > Define Tolerance Group for Employees In this activity.t the following: ? ? ? ? the maximum document amount the employee is authorized to post the maximum amount the employee can enter as a line item in a customer or vendor account the maximum cash discount percentage the employee can grant in a line item the maximum acceptable tolerance for payment differences for the employee.000. Rest of the employees will be governed by ‘blank’ Tolerance Group. another Tolerance Group has to be created and populated with the employee identification (via next IMG step : “Assign users to Tolerance Groups”).r. Leaving ‘Group’ field ‘blank’ means the limits are applicable to all the employees.  Note: There must be at least one Tolerance Group for each Company. Apart from the above. 9 by Lawrence Rebello . ‘maximum’ payment difference can also be defined whereby differences are automatically posted to cash discount.

Length of G/L Accounts (6). Lang. the connection between the account in the worldwide standard chart of accounts .used by the parent company. This should not be allowed by SAP. made. “manual creation of cost elements” i. Assign Chart of Accounts to Company Code Unless a Chart of Accounts is assigned. user has the option to create related cost element by himself w. Manual Creation of Cost Element. it is specific to Company level and not Company code level. Activity : Assign ABCD (ABCCO – Plant) ABCD (ABCCO Chart of Accounts)  Note : There is an option of assigning Country COA also in addition to Co Code specific COA.r. no G/L Account can be created. first G/L account company code data has to be deleted via IMG > FA > GL Accounting > GL Accounts > Master Records > Deletion. i. Chart of Accounts can only be deleted if it has not been assigned to any Company or no entry has been • • • Activity : Define Important settings: Length of G/L accounts 8 (INT has 6 digits) ABCD ABCCO Chart of Accounts [CAIN is SAP standard COA for India]  Note : even after some G/L a/c s have been created with 8 digits. This would be needed in the following two circumstances: ? ? where usage of country chart of accounts is required by law in some countries.t the G/L a/c other option “automatic creation of cost element” i. length can be changed and the changed length will be applicable to new G/L a/c s created thereafter. Manual / Automatic creation of cost elements. and the account in the country chart of accounts can be set up 10 by Lawrence Rebello .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling SIMPLE CHART OF ACCOUNTS • IMG / FA / GL / Master Records : • Preparation : Edit COA List : Desc. To do so. G/L Accounts work in association with a specific Chart of Accounts.e.t a Chart of Accounts. IMG > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting > G/L Accounts > Master Records > Preparations Edit Chart of Accounts • A Chart of Accounts is created with various parameters like Maintenance Language (EN). etc. such Company code cannot be assigned any other Chart of Accounts. Chart of Accounts can be assigned to many companies i. If in a company code G/L accounts have been created w. Group Chart of Accounts for consolidation purposes.e. Length [10].r. related cost element is automatically created on saving the G/L a/c if a default value for the cost element category has already been set for this cost element Controlling integration o Assign Co Code to COA : assign.e.e.

incomes & expenses of previous period cannot be brought forward. and the entry screens for which dbl click & a/c control. repeat. A/c group – name. & it will save. P&L Stat X G/L a/c 11610000 900000 900000 332000 11610000 11 by Lawrence Rebello . When creating a G/L account. ? ? The account group determines: the Interval in which the account number can be created using FS00 which Fields are ‘Required’. SAP has kept this activity in main IMG (instead of leaving it on implementer to create in FS00 mode) becoz unless this is defined. [ Enter X {table populated} & 900000 ] If it gives error message. Define Retained Earnings Account You assign a retained earnings account to each P&L account by specifying a P&L statement account type in the chart of accounts area of each P&L account. You can define one or more P&L statement account types per chart of accounts and assign them to retained earnings accounts. Account groups for G/L accounts are based on the chart of accounts SAP has defined 5 standard Account Groups AS CASH GL MAT PL RECN Define Account Groups • • • • o Define Retained Earnings A/c : Like a P&L a/c to collect & carry forward. SAP standard Retained Earnings a/c INT Sample Chart of Accounts (by SAP) GKR German Standard Accounting System (used by 0001) IKR Chart of Accounts – Industry CAINChart of Accounts – India (this activity is done using an account assignment key ‘X’) i.e. ‘Optional’ and ‘Suppressed’ when creating and changing master data.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Define A/c Group : COA. doc entry etc – Supress / Reqd / Optional. At the end of a fiscal year. from a/c to a/c which will decide the no range for the GL a/c. you must specify an account group. the system carries forward the balance of the P&L account to the retained earnings account.

FB50 & F-02 G/L Documents Entry  Note: F-02 is basic SAP G/L Document entry screen where each Dr. CAN BE USED FOR REVERSAL POSTINGS ALSO. House Bank. so it is important to remember the latest Doc no pr obtain it from the list. whether P&L or B/S item. Posting w/o tax allowed. FS00 Both Chart of Accounts & Company coed data can be edited FSPO Only Chart of Accounts data can be edited FSSO Only Company code data can be edited Edit G/L Accounts (Centrally) → Edit Chart of Accounts data → Edit Company code data → o List of A/c created : Info/GL Reports/Master Data S_ALR_87012326 for COA. P&L/BS. Tax Category.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Individual Procesing : GL A/c Creation & Processing/ Edit GL A/c [INDIVIDUAL PROCESSING]/ Edit GL Ac Centrally • FS00 : Edit GL a/c centrally • Screens : Type desc : A/c group. are entered in  Note: F-02 besides the normal entry screen. Taxation. & Cr. Language. etc Company code data – Currency. Post with reference will auto return the latest DOC no. Open Item Mgmt [will allow open item mgmt like for GR/IR clg] • Create Bank Int : Field status group. IMG > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting > G/L Accounts > Master Records > G/L Account Creation & Processing > Edit G/L Account (Individual Processing) Edit G/L A/c (Individual Processing) A G/L Account has two parts : → → Chart of Accounts data – Name of G/L account. While FB50 is fast entry screen where in one screen only all transactions can be entered. S_ALR_87012347 for Doc Extract. . Financial Planning aspect. 12 by Lawrence Rebello separate running screens. Field Status Group. This allows you to call back the document. [SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > General Ledger > Information Systems > G/L Reports > Master Data > Chart of Accounts] Chart of Accounts List (& FS00 details) G/L Accounts List (with properties) S_ALR_87012326 S_ALR_87012328 [SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > General Ledger > Information Systems > G/L Reports > Document > General > Document items extract] Document Item Extract (statement of entries) S_ALR_87012347 [SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > General Ledger > Account] G/L Account Balances (Ledger Balances) FS10N o Post with Reference : SAP/A/C/FA/GL/DocEntry/Others under F-02 general posting. gives you the option of post with reference. Tolerance Group. Text [enter some text ] • Control Data : INR. etc. it is possible to Post with reference. A/c Id • Fin Stat Version for Reporting : for statutory reporting.

The amounts have to be known & predefined. Dr/Cr need not tally. eg. Execute thru sessions] Recurring Document FBD1 If certain transactions appear periodically. the amounts get distributed.14 / Lists F. Last Run time and interval is defined while creating a Recurring document. Recalling Account Assignment Model : Before recalling an Account Assignment Model. Hence a new parameter is required everytime. A run schedule can also be setup. which can be recalled when a job is created. Deleted (F. Transfer amounts in local currency KEEP ON. [The variant saves the parameters defined. Recall with reference & complete. • When you execute. • To run the session. from header System/services/batch input/sessions select & process [in background] [sm35] • Instead of processing above. First Run time.56) and Changes be displayed (FBD4) 13 by Lawrence Rebello . where the various a/c’s are denoted in %age terms & when the entry is called. If the params are incorrect. Document type need to be specified. for which a G/L document has to entered. it should have been created via Document Entry > Reference Document (FKMT).e.15. you can also save as variant. all types of entries can be passed thru Recurring document feature. To find run date use Lists – F. i. The entry is stored but not saved. It can be created independently or with reference to some existing Model. Use F-02 for entry & recall the AAM from top button. Here the run date is very important & must be remembered. FB50 can also be use to recall AAM thru Header/Environment/Complex posting etc. only gross dr & cr amount has to be o o Sample Document : F-01 this is a document which can be prepared and stored for future use. you will get a message that a session has been created. Changed (FBD2).FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Account Assignment Model : FKMT .15 GL/Periodic processing/Recurring entries Execute F. hence dr/cr need not tally.  Note: While passing G/L Doc using Acct Assgn Model. In case of equivalence enter dr & cr items etc. after entering only the necessary parameters [ 1st run etc ] at  [process]. annual payments at fixed point of time in an year which may include pre-paid expenses. the session will not be created. “equivalence to” “calculate tax” to pre-define % allocation to G/L accounts to allow SAP to calculate tax automatically on line items. and is same in all respect viz amount. Recurring Document : FBD1 • Scheduled to run on a particular date. [ repetitive sales entry etc ] • The document is scheduled to run on a particular date within the 1st & last run & an interval. Recurring documents can be Viewed (FBD3). The entry is not saved.like a template. The entire entry can e prepared & stored under a variant name [ xxyyzz etc ]. Recurring Document feature allows such entry to be made automatically at regular interval.  Note: This function is(expensespassincome or any other item) out of a gross %s are allocated to used to entries where specific and pre-defined various G/L accounts or Expense or Income entered and “on saving” it calculates the %s automatically and brings to the F-02 screen. Equivalence is like a %age. First create and then go to line items by icon Q [can also be created from FB50 [use F-02 wef 470] & header edit option].

] When saved. need not be tallied for saving Parked documents. the entry is still not posted.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Document Parking : SAP/A/c/FA/GL/Doc Entry • FV50 [ use F-02 wef 470 ] . all ‘Preparation’. All Parked documents can be Viewed (FBV3). Use post to close the issue. but not posted.gen doc parking [ posting ] clear with FBV0 The document is parked with a sys generated doc no. For parking the Dr need not = Cr. 14 by Lawrence Rebello . you can change the figures. Various features of Parked Documents are as follows: ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ Transaction recorded but not posted Dr. can be refused thru Refuse Parked Documents (FBV6)   Note: Parked Docs can also be “Saved as Completed” i.e. but you can save only if Dr=Cr. after thorough verification by a senior. When FV50 is used with select parked doc [header].edit or park G/L Doc • F-65 . Note: If the entry screen is in some other Company’s environment. Changed (FBV2) and Posted (FBV0) All changes in Parked document can be viewed thru Display Changes (FBV5) Parked Documents. [ Useful to leave an entry halfway. Hence it will not appear in the reports like Doc Extract etc. it can be changed thru “Edit” menu on header (as against “Environment” in some other cases). & Cr. ‘Completion’ and ‘Posting’ function can be segregated for different authorities. no longer relevant. To clear F-65 parking goto Parked Documents under Documents & clear with FBV0. FV50 Parking of G/L Documents A G/L Document can be parked for purposes like capturing of transaction in run-time but posting is desired later say.

F. o Regrouping . invoice not recd etc]. define adjustment accounts for GR/IR clearing [for goods recd. o Valuate .F.define financial statement versions [BAIN for India] o Reporting .19 GR/IR clearing o Document .audit trails o Report .define valuation areas. o Documenting .05 foreign currency valuation o Regroup . valuation methods & prepare automatic postings for foreign currency valuations.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling PERIOD END CLOSING • IMG/FA/GLA/Business Transactions/Closing o Valuating .sales/purchases tax returns etc o CarryForwarding .define valuation areas.16 balance carry forward • 15 by Lawrence Rebello . Profit & Loss etc o Carrying Forward .F.F.Balance sheet.03 Comparison gives a list of differences due to documents not posted etc if any.define retained earnings account SAP/AC/FA/GL/Periodic Processing/Closing/ o Check/Count .

: IMG/ES/DEF/FA : o Define Company o Define. Otherwise first G/L Accounts company code data has to be deleted via IMG > FA > GL Accounting > GL Accounts > Master Records > Deletion and then any other Chart of Accounts & G/L Account company code data be assigned / copied to the target company. Delete. Fiscal Period. So. taxes allowed or not.r.  Note: G/L Account company code data means G/L accounts and all settings pertaining to G/L accounts viz o Assign Co Code to Company. a Group. as defined above) for which separate accounting is being done. Check. etc. Company Code – One can also copy any existing company code data to a new company code.e. company code data (various parameters) of source company are not properly copied to the target company code. Further configuration shall be at other places but the concept is that those will be specific to a Company code. SAP asks for if the G/L Accounts company code data is also to be copied ? This should be done only when the source & target companies both come under the same group and uses the same Chart of Account & G/L Account company code data. Posting Period.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling CHART OF ACCOUNTS [ OB13 ] 1. Chart of Accounts & G/L Accounts Company code data should be copied at IMG > FA > GL Accounting > GL Accounts > Master Records > GL Account Creation & Processing > Alternative Methods (Here 'copy company code data’ means company code data pertaining to G/L Accounts only).check co code : copy org object. Company code data pertaining to G/L Account. Company Code • Edit Company Code data – Here separate companies are defined within one Company (i. Configuration can be made at the company code level for things which are specific to the company code apart from the general configuration done at Company level. If any other Chart of Accounts is to be used by the target company. change currency Edit.t the Company Code. 16 by Lawrence Rebello . SAP address & other to change the  Note: While copying. other company code data are – fiscal year variants. etc. Copy. take careCompany code details accordingly.copy. Becoz by saying ‘yes’ here would allow SAP to copy Chart of Accounts & G/L Accounts as used by the source Company. posting period.delete. Or any existing company code data can be changed / deleted. by giving a new name of target Company. copies the copy function is used without defining a first (as above). Document No ranges. Here Name. •  Note: If copy function is used after a company code has been defined earlier (as above).e. Address & other information are configured w. i. FSVs. reconciliation a/c.  Note: However ifdetails of the source company. etc (defined at various places) gets copied as is available with the source company. In case of copying from some existing Company Code all Variants eg. Delete. Copy. Field Status variant. Check. document no ranges. Create a company from scratch.

though in realtime.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 2. IMG > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting > G/L Accounts > Master Records > G/L Account Creation & Processing > Alternative Methods Copy Chart of Accounts : Here Chart of Accounts i. it is created from the opening trial balance. The program does not delete the chart of accounts section of a G/L account if the account is also a primary cost element in Controlling. Target COA must be NEW. Therefore DELETE GL A/C WITH GENERAL MASTER DATA IN CO CODE -----. but not the co code data like variants etc.  Note: This function can only be done for a new COA (not an existing one).c Creation & Proc/Alternative Methods : o Copy COA [ OBY7 ] – normally copied from INT. and it is not assigned. Deletion : As the co code data is not copied. Assign Co Code to COA . and hence it partakes all the parameters of that Chart of Account. IMG / FA / GL / Master Records : Chart of accounts can be copied for simplicity. If these data are not deleted. [Message of Diff COA is ok] 17 by Lawrence Rebello . IMG > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting > G/L Accounts > Master Records > Deletions • Delete G/ L Accounts : Deletion here means deletion of G/L Account company code data. 4. GL A. It is possible to delete a COA. SAP copies Chart of Accounts associated with the source company. schedules to the annual accounts etc. if no entry has passed (i. or can also be defined independently via FSSO. so when G/L Account company code data is copied either at IMG stage while copying Company code or here without creating and assigning a required Chart of Accounts. The COA is copied. or after assignment.e. but remember to assign the copied COA to the company code first and tehn proceed to copy company code data (why – see the note below) Copy Company Code : Here G/L Account Company code data can be copied from an existing company code similar to the type being created. You can delete cost elements using program RKSCUS03. the concerned Chart of Accounts cannot be de-assigned. if no data is entered. Group COA BLANK ] 5. → You can only delete master records of G/L accounts that do not contain any transaction data.e G/L accounts (but not company code data pertaining to a G/ L accounts ) can be copied from an existing Chart of Accounts respectively.[ OB62 ] [Check COA by editing where necessary – Manual Creation of Cost Elements. Delete Chart of Accounts : Chart of Accounts can only be deleted if it is not assigned to any company. the existing co code data must be deleted. 3. (both of the above functions saves the user to define everything from the scratch)  Note: G/L Accounts are always in relation to a Chart of Account. so that the co code data for the COA can be copied. only then G/L Account data can be deleted and Chart of Account de-assigned) • o Copy Co Code G/L A/c’s from 0001 : [ OBY2 ] copy.

Useful for “Posting w/o tax allowed etc etc “. o Title “Z---“ & save. Posting w/o tax allowed. the recorded code comes up. or create a program thru the program button [top]. o Select local object [message is program was created. o /NSHDB o You can either run the process by Process Button [top]. o Enter program name & transfer from recording. [ Use F8 to run. o You can then generate & activate & test the prg thru the program option [top]. o Save recording. Manual Creation of Cost Element.[ OB53 ] o Individual Procesing : SAP / A/C / FA / GL / MASTER RECORDS / INDIVIDUAL PROCESSING • FS00 : Edit GL a/c centrally • Screens : Type desc : A/c group. & to check use . Text [enter some text ] • Control Data : INR. Lang. o On save. put a “ “ on the top line. House Bank.start recording. o You can change the source code. . To get rid of the characteristics. Master Records o Preparation : Edit COA List : Desc. Length [10]. Any other field left blank. Field status for a/c control – Supress / Reqd / Optional. o On test you can process thru batch or call trans as above. A/c Id • Fin Stat Version for Reporting : for statutory reporting.ZFS00 o Trancode FS00 . A/c group – name. and give data file on server details ]. Selection thru top left icon & τ & υ. 18 by Lawrence Rebello . a small window opens. and you can change the a/c no & other fields are entered auto. Tax Category.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 6. & it will save. from a/c to a/c.] o On selection you can view the source code.[ OBD4 ] o Define Retained Earnings A/c : Like a P&L a/c to collect & carry forward. 7. . • Create Bank Int : Field status group. Batch Data Communication : /NSHDB o New recording . Pass a sample entry & save. o On process as mentioned earlier. o FS00 scr comes up. [ FSP1 / FSP2 / FSP3 ] o Change GL A/c Collectively : Mass maintenance where a lot of a/c’s can be changed one shot. wil be updated as “ “ in all such fields. repeat. P&L/BS. If it gives error message. Hence deselect all such fields which need not be changed. o Define A/c Group : COA.

e. two sets of entries are passed in 2 companies. Then while in data entry F-02 . When a transaction is entered. In doing so. Hence for one entry. However. You can use crosscompany code entry to minimize the number of entries for posting this payment. even though the expense a/c of another co is given. the other effect will be borne by the default code. then you can specify only G/L accounts as the clearing accounts. in the 1st co the default cross co code will be picked up. as the a/c is created in both companies. and in the 2nd co. Customers sometimes make payment to the wrong company in a group of affiliated companies. say 149999 for inter-company transactions in both the companies that will be debited & credited depending upon the nature of transactions i. IMG > Financial Accounting > General Ledger Accounting > Business Transactions > Prepare cross-co codes transactions One can define the accounts for the clearing entries the system makes when posting cross-company code transactions. The line where the cross co code is mentioned.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Cross Co Transactions : IMG/FA/GLA/BT/PREPARE CROSS CO CODE TRANSACTIONS : From to is not important. note the following : Situation : Co MRCM receiving payments on behalf of MRCD from the customer (say 2935) of MRCD 1st line item entry 2 nd 40 (dr for SA doc) 15 (cr for incoming pymts) 113100 2935 (Bank a/c in MRCM) (customer acct no in MRCD) line item entry (also put MRCD in ‘other co code’ field in case of second line item) now this will suitably be reflected in both the companies as follows : MRCM 40 50 dr cr 113100 149999 amount amount 15 (payable) 40 MRCD cr dr 2935 149999 amount amount (recvable) (SAP presents dr & cr in increasing order of numbers) 19 by Lawrence Rebello . you debit your bank account (company code 1) and credit the customer account (company code 2). it is like inter-company a/c. These clearing entries represent the receivables and payables between company codes which result from central purchasing or payment. [ New Co Code in F-02 ]. and the system automatically generates clearing entries between both company codes. Dr/Cr for the same a/c. You can specify G/L accounts as well as customer and vendor accounts for clearing between company codes. will result in an entry to that a/c. Ensure that co code is entered in the appropriate line entry. with the pool a/c bearing the other effect in both co codes. and pass one entry in any one co code. if the company code for which you are posting these items is an external one. BUV – clearing against 2 co codes. You can setup pool a/c’s in both companies. Activity : Create one pool account (G/L a/c).

you will get a message that a session has been created. which should coincide with run date and user. S_ALR_87012347 for Doc Extract. [The variant saves the parameters defined.15. the session will not be created. The entire entry can e prepared & stored under a variant name [ xxyyzz etc ]. Clicking TASK LIST will allow you to create a task. Hence a new parameter is required everytime. Dr/Cr need not tally. A run schedule can also be setup. To find run date use Lists – F. The entry is not saved. which can be recalled when a job is created. Here the run date is very important & must be remembered. Equivalence is like a %age. First create and then go to line items by icon Q [can also be created from FB50 [ use F-02 wef 470 ] & header edit option]. List of A/c created : Info/GL Reports/Master Data S_ALR_87012326 for COA. it is possible to Post with reference.15 GL/Periodic processing/Recurring entries Execute F. o JOB WIZARD : At the SCMA stage. 160000 for Vendors. where the various a/c’s are denoted in %age terms & when the entry is called.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o o o o o o Reconciliation A/c : Control account 140000 for Customers.14 / Lists F. you can also save as variant. the header will have an option TASK LIST. [ 1st run etc ] at  [process]. Post with Reference : SAP/A/C/FA/GL/DocEntry/Others under F-02 general posting. settlement period. Recall with reference & complete. Execute thru sessions] • A job can be created in 2 ways : o Defining a task : GL/Periodic Processing/Schedule Manager SCMA When you click on schedule manager. The amounts have to be known & predefined. Account Assignment Model : FKMT . so it is important to remember the latest Doc no pr obtain it from the list. Post with reference will auto return the latest DOC no. the amounts get distributed. In case of equivalence enter dr & cr items etc. fiscal year.like a template. The entry is stored but not saved. This allows you to call back the document. [ repetitive sales entry etc ] • The document is scheduled to run on a particular date within the 1st & last run & an interval. at the header ENVIRONMENT will allow activation of the Job Wizard to create a JOB. hence dr/cr need not tally. If the params are incorrect. from header System/services/batch input/sessions select & process [in background] [sm35] • Instead of processing above.  Task List XYZTKL [ create ]  Transaction F. Sample Document : F-01 this is a document which can be prepared and stored for future use.14 o [an external prg can also be used which SAP will recognize thru BAPI [Bus Appli Prog Interface] 20 by Lawrence Rebello . Recurring Document : FBD1 • Scheduled to run on a particular date. • When you execute. after entering only the necessary parameters. Use F-02 for entry & recall the AAM from top button. FB50 can also be use to recall AAM thru Header/Environment/Complex posting etc. • To run the session. [ FBD1 Enter company code.

21 by Lawrence Rebello . To clear F-65 parking goto Parked Documents under Documents & clear with FBV0.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o o  Variant[new] XYZREC1 [created earlier]  JOB XYZJOB [now created] o Recurring entries therefore have to be run on a particular date. When executing a recurring entry giving the Run Schedule will enable pickup of Run Dates specified. you can change the figures. For parking the Dr need not = Cr. ] When saved. Hence it will not appear in the reports like Doc Extract etc. [ Useful to leave an entry halfway. Document Parking : SAP/A/c/FA/GL/Doc Entry • FV50 [ use F-65 wef 470 ] . but not posted. the entry is still not posted. Give run schedule name & save.edit or park G/L Doc • F-65 . Recurring Entries [different dates] : IMG/FA/FaGLOBAL/DOCUMENT/REC_ENTRIES/Define_Run_Schedule Enter Run Dates. the session will not be created.gen doc parking [ posting ] clear with FBV0 The document is parked with a sys generated doc no. but you can save only if Dr=Cr. When FV50 is used with select parked doc [header]. Use post to close the issue. Without Run Date.

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

CASH JOURNAL
IMG/FA/BANK A/C / BUS TRANS/ CASH JOURNAL 1. Create GL a/c for Cash Journal – Ensure post automatically is on, so that posting can take place automatically. [ 100000 Petty Cash A/c ]
IMG > Financial Accounting > Bank Accounting > Business Transaction > Cash Journal Create G/L Accounts for Cash Journal It refers to the activity at FS00. Petty cash items are entered thru Cash Journal while in some cases, even receipt of customer cheques is also allowed. SAP standard Petty Cash a/c no. is 100000 Important settings are: FSV Post automatically Relevant to Cash Flow G001 (with text, assignment) ‘on’ ‘yes’

2. Define doc types for Cash Journal Docs - SK [other doc types SA GL, DZ Customer Receipt, KZ Vendor Payment] [ OBA7 ] 3. Define No range & interval for Cash Journal documents [ FBCJC1 ] - copy from 0001. 4. Setup cash journal : [ FBCJC0 ] a. Give a Cash Journal Code b. Various code for GL A/c’s, Customers, Vendors.
Set up Cash Journal Here a name (usu. Petty Cash) and code (any numeric or character) is given to the Cash Journal w.r.t the Company Code. Though CJ code shows a pop-up button, no CJ code is available as it is created here only. So give any code desired and save. One Cash Journal can be maintained for one currency type. However if one want to maintain more than one currency in the same Cash Journal, G/L Account for Cash Journal should not have “Post Automatically On” (FS00).

5. Create, Change, Delete Business Transactions [ FBCJC2 ] : These tran types can be copied, but as they are linked to GL a/c’s, change as reqd. These can be accessed at FBCJ. a. C receipts from bank GL a/c ------b. B payment ot bank GL a/c -------c. R Sales For vendors & Customers, GL a/c’s need not be given, as they will be different for A/P, A/R. 6. Setup Print params [ FBCJC3 ]– copy from 0001, output device – LP01. 7. Posting - SAP/A/c/FA/GL/Doc Entry - Cash Journal Posting FBCJ

22

by

Lawrence Rebello

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE

[will require INT COA] • IMG/FA/AR&AP/Customer A/c’s/Master Records/Preparation for creation/ Customer Master Record preparation.[Bus partner is a customer who is also a vendor] o Define A/c Groups with Screen Layout : Edit field status (Cust) [ OVT0]
IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Customer Accounts > Master Data > Preparations Define Account Groups with screen layout (customers) Account Groups are defined to

? ? ?

the interval for the account numbers whether the number is assigned internally by the system or externally by the user (type of number assignment) which fields are ‘mandatory’, ‘optional’ or ‘suppressed’ when creating and changing master records (field status) – this will depend on the type of customer a/c i.e. if it is a one-time customer, customer to whom goods are sold/delivered/billed (these may be different persons)

 Note: Here status of fields (FSV) are defined in each ‘Account Group’ created i.e. it is not

that FSV as defined at IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Document > Line Items > Controls (which is assigned to the company code)

Difference : FSV here relates to Customer master database, whereas FSV at co code level relates to transactions with the customers. When creating a customer account, you must specify an account group. You can specify a reference account group under "Control" in the "General data" part of any customer account's master data.

 Note: If you do not specify a reference account group, then, as previously, all fields of the
customer’s account screen are ready for input during document entry.

 Note: The reconciliation account field is defined as a required field since a reconciliation account
must also be specified for the one-time accounts. This field is company code-dependent. As many as 22 SAP standard settings are available: Sold To Party Goods Recipient Payer Bill To Party For each Account Group: ? ? ? an “Output Determination Procedure” is assigned, specific “FSV Parameters w.r.t General Data, Company code data and Sales data” are set as per the requirement, and it specified whether it is a one-time account 0001 0002 0003 etc One-time Cust (int no.) One-time Cust (ext no.) Customer (general) Customer (ext no.) CPD CPDA DEBI KUNA, etc.

0004

There are 5 SAP defined “Output Determination Procedure” i.e. procedure to control output say, Invoices, etc: Sold To Party Ship To Party Bill To Party Output For Payer DB0001 DB0002 DB0003 DB0004

One can define his own Account Group, set FSVs as required, but “Output Determination Procedure” has to be selected out of the above.

 Note: Account groups once assigned to a customer master & transactions entered cannot be deassigned, but FSV (earlier data relating to these fields remain intact) and number ranges can be changed later.

23

by

Lawrence Rebello

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

o

Define Screen Layout for Co Code : Dunning – SAP term for sending reminders to customers.

Define Screen layout per Company code (customer) Within a general setting for an Account Group, FSV settings can be changed for a specific Company code. Here only Company code data (as defined at Account Group level) can be changed.


o

Note: This function should be used only in exceptional circumstances. Normally this requirement is controlled thru Account Groups (above) only.

Define Screen Layout per Activity

Define Screen Layout per Activity (customer) This IMG activity relates to creation of Customers. Three options are available to create customers: Document Entry Create customer (Accounting) Create customer (Sales) Create customer (Centrally) XD01 Only General & Company Code data Only General & Sales data All of three FD01 VD01

General data Address : Control data Payment : Marketing: Unloading pts Export data Contact details Sales data Orders Shipping : Billing doc: Partner funct Company code data Account mgmt in 4.7]

Name, Address, Language, …. : Tax information, …. Bank details, ….. Industry, customer classification, …. : Goods receiving hours, …. : Data for export control, …. : address of business partners (agents, etc) : Sales office, currency, price group, …. Shipping conditions, transportation zone, …. Terms of payment, output tax classification, …. : Ship-to-party, Bill-too-party, …. : Reconciliation account, [imp – 140000 in 4.6c, 24410000 / 24600000

Payment : Correspond Insurance:

Cash mgmt group [cash flow] Value adjustment key [foreign exchange closing valuation] Interest indicator, Interest cycle, last interest run, … Terms of Payment, Tolerance Group, Payment history record key, A/R Pledging indicator, Payment methods, …. : Dunning, Interest, …. Amount insured, ….

 Note:

FSV parameters can be defined for any of these activity and is a general specification for creation of all Customer. Any different requirement regarding the fields in relation to any customer or class of customer, for eg. Suppressing redundant details in case of one-time customers, etc can further be controlled through FSV for ‘Account Groups’.

Creation of customer, in real-time, originate from Sales & Distribution deptt, and details relevant to FI can be fed by Finance deptt via FD02. Account groups are linked with each of the customer (not co code) in its master record i.e. customer are created under one of the Account groups. •

24

by

Lawrence Rebello

e. 3 days for local clg will give an accurate cash forecast. The SAP system offers a number of help functions to determine an account number. Another field “probable time until check is paid” refers to realization time i. o SAP/A/c/FA/AR&AP/Master Records :  FD01 Create [ with sales areas VD01. Before this factoring procedure must have been activated for the co code via IMG > Financial Accounting Global Settings > Company Code > Activate Accounts Receivable Factoring Procedure per Company Code. However one can change range interval and status (external or internal) as per requirement. you should use the internal number assignment. Or. o Define A/R pledging indicator 1 = open. In all other cases. The help functions include the ‘matchcode’ or the ‘Previous acct no’ field in the customer/vendor master record.  Payment date [actually meant for Vendors] • Only cash discount allowed • Bill of exchange terms 0001 immediate. The AR pledging indicator should be activated to allow PDC to be accounted on the date mentioned.  Note: External number assignment useful if you transfer master data from a pre-system or an existing system. Therefore the account numbers no longer have to be "mnemonic". all areas XD01]  FD02 Change  FD03 Display  Search item CUST for searching  Authorization group is a user defined field for analysis  Customers bank data is to print customers bank details on the receipts  Reconciliation account is 140000  Sort key 001 by posting date  Head office of the customer  Cash management group for cash flow  Value adjustment key for closing valuation of F/E valuation.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o o Define Industries Create No Ranges [ XDN1 ] Create Number Ranges for Customer Accounts SAP standard Number ranges are available. 25 by Lawrence Rebello .  “Slowly changing dimension “ to denote the details of a customer are slowly changing and hence the need to maintain a payment history etc. • Known/negotiated/leave holidays can be used to avoid invoice generation on such dates and avoid disputes in delayed payments. one can have separate no ranges for separate Account groups. o Assign No Ranges Assign Number Ranges to Customer Account Groups One type of Number range can be assigned to many Account Groups. Define Accounts Receivable Pledging Indicator You use the accounts receivable factoring indicator to select customer master records and line items within a company code to participate in the factoring procedure.  Last interest run date on which interest was last run.  Interest calculation – Last date will enable interest calculation from date mentioned.

IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Incoming Payments > Manual Incoming Payments Define Tolerances (Customer) In this step. orders. Blank 140000 i.e. ex-works 0001 i.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling         Probable time till check is paid . billing has been created but not printed/sent) doesn’t reflect in those documents except ‘address’.e. For each tolerance group. you specify the tolerances for customers. Change Customer (Accounting) FD02 Change Customer (Sales) VD02  Note: Any change in the customer master after some docs (say. it must . Lock box – prevalent in US. International EXW i.e. Sales a/c VD01 Only complete delivery Unlimited tolerance 99 i. and the bank/agency does the depositing. where legal action taken etc Collective invoice – no individual invoice. but a weekly invoice etc. The handling of the terms of payment for residual items. Allocate a tolerance group to each customer via the master record. If any specific group is defined. Immediate ‘ ’ i. domestic revenues XD01 All the fields available in both VD01 & VD01 can be entered here.e. if they are to be posted during clearing  Note: Tolerance group created with ‘blank’ applies to all customers (as it is defined for a company 26 by Lawrence Rebello code) to whom any specific tolerance group is not assigned. Insurance details FD01 Create Customer (Accounting) Example settings: Sort key Terms of payment Tolerance Group Reconciliation a/c Create Customer (Sales) Example settings: Shipping Point Tolerance level Calendar Inco Terms Payment terms Acct assignment group Create Customer (Centrally) Posting date 0001 i. specify the following: • • Tolerances up to which differences in payment are posted automatically to expense or revenue accounts when clearing open items.e. to indicate realization time & give better cash flow [assume no bill discounting]. immediate 01 i. These tolerances are used for dealing with differences in payment and residual items which can occur during payment settlement. where a box is used to deposit cheques. Payment advice notes Selection rule Dunning for reminders : can be blocked where not reqd in case of long overdues.e. deliveries. Decentralized processing will send correspondence to branch office. Other things have to be manually altered.e.

DATA ENTRY – Incoming Payments.6c version) F-22 (4. It will bring up the amount in blue colour. but display all different receipts till final adjustment.Incoming payment o F-26 . as the payment is already received against a specific invoice.Invoice entries [ use F-22 wef 470 ] o F-28 . ‘blank’ must be defined] [i.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling be assigned to a customer account via ‘master record’. key’ can also be assigned to tolerance group for posting ‘Payment ‘Dunning residual payment • SAP/A/c/AR/Document Entries o FB70 . which need not be done under F-28 / F-26.Payment fast entry SALES ORDER CREDIT DELIVERY BILLING LIMIT BLOCKING ANALYSIS SALES A/C 800000 DATA ENTRY – Sales Invoices Entering outgoing Invoices FB70 (4. which comes by default)  Note: Incoming payment can also be handled under FBCJ – cash journal. Optionally you can go for auto search based on amount.e. If however the payment does not tally with the invoice. (remember to change a/c type ‘D’ – customers instead of S – GL. Incoming Payment : Bank 113100 Customers a/c xxxx. SAP will not adjust. 27 by Lawrence Rebello . at least one tolerance group –  Note: A items from term’ or adifferences. Adjustments & Statements Incoming Payments [SAP Menu > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Document Entries] Incoming Payments Payment Fast Entry F-28 F-26  Note: Incoming payment can also be processed by F-06 under GL Doc entry.7 version)  • Note: Reconciliation a/c defined in FD01 serves as a link between Invoice and Sales G/L a/c. However it would be necessary to ‘Clear’ these payments received.

with predefined reason codes. The assigned items will go. : it is possible to charge off not assigned amounts to expenses like cash discount etc. it is possible to keep the amount not assigned 0. Complete the assignment & save. and then posting is possible. the following are possible: • • • • Partial payment – Diff posted can be used to make the amount not assigned as 0. The diff amt becomes an open item with current date. it is possible to keep the amount not assigned 0. When clearing payments it is possible to :  Partial payment : Diff posted can be used to make the amount not assigned as 0. An error message will be displayed giving table no. 28 by Lawrence Rebello .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o ARAP/Account o FD10N .Display balances [drill down] o FD11 . or [SAP Menu > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Account > Assignment] Assignment of open items FB15  Note: On using FB15. o Incoming payment can also be processed by F-06 under GL Doc entry. as the payment is already received. all items appear. after the invoice is created.Another reason could be IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/IP/AutoIP/Payment Method/Setup all co codes/ Select co & details : FP/FPJ Customer/Vendor types. use F-32/FB15.  Distribution of residual items : possible based on reason codes. only A/c type should be changed to D – customers instead of S –GL.  Charge to expense a/c. and then posting is possible. Select the one for assignment & “ASSIGN”. o SAP/A/c/FA/AR/Account F-32 clear. which cannot be done under F-28. with predefined reason codes. By keeping a residual amount as not posted. it is possible that the amount appears in display FD10N. but does not get processed as an open item. Residual items – allow a residual amount to be kept and the rest is assigned. Charge to expense a/c – it is possible to charge off amounts not assigned to expenses like cash discount etc. give table no and get lists by  . However it would be necessary to clear these payments received. This will bring you to a partial payment screen. • Clearing o To clear incoming payments received under FBCJ. Distribution of residual items – possible based on reason codes.Analysis For incoming payments F-26/28.  Residual items allow a residual amount to be kept and the rest is assigned. By keeping a residual amount as not posted. which comes by default. Next select the Edit Assigned items FB17 assigned items and clear. which can be analysed thru SE17. Next return to FB15 & confirm. This can be due to not defining tolerance groups. Customer Balances [SAP Menu > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Account] Display Customer Account Balances Analyse Customer Account Balances Clear (incoming Payments under FBCJ) FD10N FD11 F-32  Note: While clearing incoming payments. o Incoming payment can also be handled under FBCJ – cash journal.

Spl GL Transactions o Vendors FP o Customers FPJ • 29 by Lawrence Rebello . Corresspondence • FB12 request for stat of a/c SAP06. Special groups for GL o A Down Payment o B Bill of exchange receivable o C Rent deposit o E Reserve for Bad Debts o F Down payment request Down payments require certain params to enable clearing. They have to be requested. made and cleared after raising an invoice under which it is adjusted.15 etc.64 maintain SAP06 etc which when dbl clicked will produced stat of a/c thru LP01. SAP15. customers. all items appear.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling   SAP/Ac/FA/AR/Ac/Assignment • FB15 asssign/clear open items. Next select the assigned items and clear. The assigned items will go. Down Payments : like an advance. This will bring you to a partial payment screen. etc] • Payment Advices o SAP/Ac/FA/AR/Doc Entry/Payment Advice  FBE1 Create – payment advice no comes by default. Enter amount & save. Payment advices can be created for different payments. SAP08.  S_ALR_87012203 payment advice overview. Next return to FB15 & confirm. Select the one for assignment & “ASSIGN”. On using FB15. [you can use difference postings to create a new o/s ] • FB17 edit assigned items.  FBE2 Change  FBE3 Display  Payment advice F4 & execute to get a list. Complete the assignment & save. Credit memo can be adjusted with any/specific invoices.08.64 [SAP06. IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/Outgoing Payments/Auto OP/Payment Method/ Bank selection for payment Programs o Set up all co codes o Set up the vendors. Statement of Accounts [SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Account > Correspondence] Request (for statement of Customers’ a/c) Maintain (gives the print-out of above) FB12 F. • F.

. keep relevant invoice details etc blank. ensure A/c no. & the appropriate codes fed into line items. [other important settings w.t Incoming Payments are discussed under Accounts Payable which are similar and relevant to Accounts Receivable also] • SAP/FA/AR/DocEntry/DownPayment o F-37 The down payment created thru a request is available under FD10N under special GL list[after creating downpayments with F-29]. Cash discount and (difference) tolerance limits Specify which special G/L transactions are to be settled for customers and vendors. o An AAM can be created for every product type. To speed up data entry. o F-39 Clearing of down payments. This AAM can be recalled at the invoice stage thru Environment/Complex Posting F6. received and cleared after raising an invoice under which it is adjusted. you make the following specifications: • • • Paying company code & Sending company code – relevant to cross co-code transactions i. Enter cust no. Vendors F Down payment request P Payment request Customers F P J Down payment request Payment request Advance Payment Request  Note: This activity is pre-requisite for clearing payments received against open items.r. you make specifications for all company codes involved in payment transactions. F-37 F-29 F-39 Request (Down Payment) Down Payment (Receive) Clear (Down Payment) 30 by Lawrence Rebello . For each company code.e. where one co code makes payment for other co codes. date and amount is entered prior to F6. then save. Special groups for GL – ‘A’ Down Payment.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Incoming Payments > Auto Incoming Payments > Payment Method / Bank Selection Set up All Company Codes for Payment transactions In this activity. Down Payments [SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Down Payment]  Note: like an advance. enter transfer posting amounts & save. They have to be requested.

1. But in such a case any changes made for either customer 0r vendor will automatically affect both. net due baseline date on 15th of the next month  Note: Terms of payment (discount.  Note: ‘day limit’ is used where ‘baseline date’ (due date of payment) is specified based on a double click to get inside for baseline date & payment terms the settings  Note: Not more than two discount options are available (even under new entry).  Note: One can use the same key for the terms of payment for both customers and vendors who have the same payment terms. 45 days net Expl.e. eg.5%. The interest would actually start after the additional months i. CR period has elapsed. Paymt Terms 0008 Day limit 31 Text 14 days/2%. has to be excluded for a payment term (in the standard system. IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Outgoing Invoices and Credit Memos Maintain Terms of payments Terms of Payments i. a particular transaction type with a customer. For all invoices raised upto 15th of a month. 45 days net Expl. discounts %s if paid before due date. within 14 days. terms for ‘another part’ of the month has to be defined for the same payment term (0008 in this case) – see below. net due baseline date on 31st of the month period range during which invoices are raised. 30 days/1. becomes immediately due. SAP has provided 11 default payment terms types (0001 – 0011). terms of payment is assigned to the customers in the master record via the key. 2% dis within 30 days.5% dis within 45 days.e. 30 days/1. within 14 days.  Note: If day limit is ‘nil’. Hence it is recommended to use different terms of payment keys for customers and vendors and limit the permitted account type correspondingly within the terms of payment.e. etc) shall be considered after the ‘baseline date’. In such a case. due date. a payment term applies to all account types of the business partner) change the payment conditions for a payment term Terms of payment are defined in the following manner: Paymt Terms 0008 Day limit 15 Text 14 days/2%. 2% dis within 30 days. due date is 30th of the same month.e. 1.5% dis within 45 days. 31 by Lawrence Rebello .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Terms of Payment [ OBB8 ] o IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/Incoming invoices/Cr Memo o Maintain terms of payment : o Base line date is the date to be considered for the calculation of interest. etc are defined and stored under a fourcharacter key. baseline date is date of invoice i.5%. Changes in standard settings are normally not needed except where • • • a separate help text for a payment term is needed which deviates from the explanations created automatically an account type i.

Due date is specified by selecting “payment terms” while defining installments – it can be different for different installments. there will be 6 payment terms. Therefore for a 5 installment method.  Note: SAP defaults can be altered / new ones created to suite the specific user requirements. Installment Payment Payable in x installments ‘Blank’ (SAP gives system generated explanation) (do not put any discount %s) ‘on’ Then specify % of installment amounts under IMG activity “Define Terms of Payment for Installment”. 32 by Lawrence Rebello . define a term of payment as above with following parameters: Text Own expl.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Define Terms of Payment for Installments First. It should be remembered here that each installment also has its terms of payment.

Once taxes are defined. settings are to be made in the pricing condition for the tax condition type MWST [TAXJ].2]  Country code 2 chars  Region code 3 chars  State code 3 chars  City code 3 chars e. ALABAMA = USMIDALAXXX  While specifying the structure DiN i. In FI all taxes are inclusive. taxes are netted [here the department loses revenue]  Define Tax Jurisdiction for India TAXIN [ Page: 33 [0]TAXINJ with 32 states as per region codes 10 for Karnataka wef 470 ] 33 by Lawrence Rebello . o o Condition Types : Type of calc %age etc. taxes are calculated after discount is adjusted. Condition Type BASB as under : Cond Class Calc type Cond Cat Rounding rule Manual entries Group cond Header cond Item cond Text det proc A B K D Amount/perc On Text id Access sequence Plus /minus o o o Condition Type MWAS [ JIN1 & JIN2 for CST & LST wef 470 ] Output tax A1 Condition Type MWVS [ JIP1 & JIP2 for CST & LST wef 470 ] Input tax V1 Access Sequences : only country & tax codes possible. IMG/FA/FAGlobal/Tax on Sales & Purchases/ • Basic Settings o Define Proceedures [ FTXP ] o TAXIN [ TAXINJ wef 470 ] Tax Proc for India.  TxN i. Tax procedure of Great Britan TAXGB [ TAXINJ wef 470 ] is used.6C does not have tax capability for Indian Taxation. For exclusive tax. [ You can use TAXUSJ for Jurisdiction Taxes ] Other tax statewise in CIN version.e. It is thus possible to have a code   o with [TAXINJ .e. In Master Data screen “delete_fr_DB” choose “DO NOT DELETE” Check and Change Settings for Tax Processing : MWS & MW3 for JIN1 & JIN2 [ separate line item ] NVV for JIP1 & JIP2 [non deductible & no separate line item. TAXUSJ [ Page: 33 [0]TAXINJ has 2 levels like IN10 etc. mass maintenance “posting w/o tax allowed” to be changed.e. as dist to relevant exps like purchase etc ] Specify structure with tax jurisdiction code. for which CIN [country India] version is available. ] has 4 levels. level 2 to allow for IN10 etc.] tax indicator.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling TAXES [ changes to structures for country version India wef 470 ] SAP 4.2. calculate tax will have to be checked  to avoid error messages at saving time. At the invoice stage also.e.g. In case of specific accounts like sales 800000 the tax code will have to be specified like output tax etc. discount is net i. MWST [ Page: 33 [0]TAXJ with jurisdiction wef 470 & cond cat in cond type should be 2 i.

but in this case. JR2. o Assign company code to document date for tax determination : the posting date is normally considered. (depending on whether jurisdiction level is defined as one or ‘two’) – [see notes on structure for tax jurisdiction below] and “Access Sequence – TAXJ” 34 by Lawrence Rebello . Posting o Define tax accounts [ OB40 ] [ Page: 34        [0]wef 470 JIN1 Act Key MWS GL 13113400 JIN2 Act Key MW3 GL 13113410 JIP1 & 2 Act Key NVV GL ] [0]wef 470 CST FIELD NOT ACCESSIBLE as in condition type JIP1. CST w/o C Form Recoverable and LST Recoverable resp with “Jurisdiction level 1 or 2”. BED Recov. JT7. it will result in duplicate taxes being calculated.2 JIN1. We used JR1 condition type of TAXUSJ to define the following condition types: • • • • JT1. CST–C Form Payable.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Calculation o Define tax codes for Sales & Purchases[Page: 34 A1 output tax code 10% A tax type for output tax Tolerance 1 = 1% [for tax differences] MWS output tax ERS sales deal ERL revenue . CST w/o C Form Payable and LST payable resp. SAP has defined condition types for different jurisdiction levels in US (JR1. JT8 JR1. CST–C Form Recoverable. So Indian jurisdictions can be designed as consisting of one level only. JR8 : : : : BED Payable. AED Recov and SED Recov resp. JR3 JR6. etc) Jurisdiction in US works as States jurisdiction depend on taxation in preceding jurisdiction) ? County ? City (Tax in each In India jurisdiction are at horizontal level and there is no vertical jurisdictional dependency. as it is based on jurisdictions. These a/c keys will integrate SD with FI. JT3 JT6. AED Payable and SED Payable resp. JR2. JT2. JR7. the doc date will be considered. Define Condition Types : Condition types are made use of for defining Tax Calculation Procedure. Fill up only the output tax field o/wise if you enter a value in the input tax.2 level 1 was preset instead of level 2] • o o  175000 output tax MWS & 154000 input tax Define a/c for Exch Rate fluctuations  Loss from currency valuation 230010  Gain from currency valuation 280010 Assign tax code for Non Taxable transactions  A0 output tax 0%  V0 input tax 0% VST TAXES WITH JURISDICTION IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax on Sales & Purchases > Basic Settings Check Calculation Procedures Define Access Sequences : SAP has pre-defined 3 Access sequences MWST TAXJ USTX Tax Indicator (I/O taxes only) US Taxes with Jurisdiction US Taxes We will use ‘TAXJ’ access sequence.

Note the following settings: Status Posting allowed in only Tax category Post Automatically is B/S Item Local currency ‘>’ (Output Tax) “on”  Note: Ensure that Accounting keys relevant to each tax types have been defined under “Check and change Settings for Tax Processing” We used procedure TAXUSJ (call it TAXINJ) with necessary modifications as follows: Step 100 110 120 130 190 Cond Type BASB JT1 JT2 JT3 MWS1 Desrption Base Amount BED Payable AED Payable SED Payable Subtotal 100 100 100 100 130 JT1 JT2 JT3 frm step to step acctg key 510 520 JT6 JT7 CST-C Form Pay 190 190 190 JT6 JT7 JT8 CST w/o C Form Pay LST Payable 530 JT8 (Similarly for JR1 – JR8 also) Assign Country to Calculation Procedure Here calculation procedure is assigned to a company code. IN 10 00 Country State for various categories of jurisdiction 35 by Lawrence Rebello .e. 175003 for BED Payable. helps in linking posting to G/ L accounts etc (as discussed later). 175002. This serves as accounting key in Calculation Procedure (discussed above). Check and change Settings for Tax Processing Here a tax process for each tax type has to be defined . SED Payable respectively. Output Tax i. it will give us option of selection by State (Country) only and not by County (State) and hence all jurisdictions code (in our case 26*16) will pop-up. first check whether G/L accounts and respective accounting keys relevant to all types of taxes have been created (FS00) We created 175001. AED Payable. while selecting jurisdiction codes in definition of tax codes. Separate Line Item Specify structure for Jurisdiction Code Here structure guides SAP to determine various jurisdictions in one level and also whether a code is in level 1 or level 2 and so on.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Check Calculation procedure :  Note: Before defining calculation procedure. The important settings here are: Tax type Posting Indicator ‘1’ ‘2’ i. So its better to define two levels. As in India we have only one level of taxes we specified a size of ‘6’ to our Jurisdiction structure.  Note: If we define only one level. 2 – for Country and 4 – for States.e.

etc (which are meant for taxes on sales and need to be posted to separate accounts. Branch. Excise (BED. Excise (BED) KAR. Regd Dealer.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Define Jurisdictions We defined Jurisdictions as follows (e. CST.AED. Excise (BED) KAR.US.AED) KAR. Excise (BED. Non Regd Dealer. Regd Dealer. rates are specified in JT1. Branch. Excise (BED. No Excise IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax on Sales & Purchases > Calculation Define Tax Codes for Sales & Purchases Here tax codes are defined for each jurisdiction. JT7. etc 36 by Lawrence Rebello . CST. LST. Non Regd Dealer. Excise (BED.AED) KAR. Similarly while defining rates for Input tax V1. Branch. CST. These need to be defined with respect to G/L account to which it will be posted. for Karnataka State): IN0001 IN0002 IN1001 IN1002 IN1003 IN1004 IN1011 IN1012 IN1013 IN1014 IN1021 IN1022 IN1023 IN1024 IN1031 IN1032 IN1033 IN1034 IN1041 IN1042 IN1043 IN1044 Foreign Jurisdiction . Excise (BED. No Excise KAR. Excise (BED. LST.AED.US. Non Regd Dealer. LST.AED. Regd Dealer. LST. Excise (BED) KAR.AED.SED) KAR. Excise (BED) KAR. CVD) KAR. LST. Regd Dealer. Non Regd Dealer. CST. rates are specified in JR1. Excise (BED. Non Regd Dealer. Non Regd Dealer.SED) KAR. No Excise KAR. JR7.SED) KAR. IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax on Sales & Purchases > Posting Define Tax Accounts Here all the tax processes defined under “Check & change settings for tax processing” are available.AED) KAR. Tax codes are: Output Tax Output Tax Exempt Input Tax Input Tax Exempt A0 A1 (with rates applicable in each jurisdiction) (with nil rates) V1 (with rates applicable in each jurisdiction) V0 (with nil rates)  Note: Make sure that while defining rates for Output tax A1. CST. Custom (BCD) Foreign Jurisdiction . Excise (BED. dr & cr keys. Branch. LST. JT6. JT2. Excise (BED.g. Regd Dealer. Non Regd Dealer.AED) KAR. CST. Excise (BED) KAR. No Excise KAR. Regd Dealer. etc (which are meant for taxes on purchases and need to be posted to separate accounts. JR2. Excise (BED.AED) KAR. JR6.SED) KAR.SED) KAR. No Excise KAR. LST. Custom (BCD. Non Regd Dealer. CST. CST.AED. Regd Dealer. Regd Dealer. LST.

are as follows: ‘D’ JTAX TAXJ Cond Type JM01 JA01 JS01 JM02 JA02 JS02 JSER JSVD JMOD JAED JSED JCES JIP3 JIP1 JIP2 JIN1 JIN2 JIN4 JIN5 Cond Type JMOP JMOQ JAOP JAOQ JSOP JSOQ JMIP JMIQ JAIP JAIQ JSIP JSIQ JMX1 JMX2 Desrption A/P BED deductible A/P AED deductible A/P SED deductible A/P BED non-deduct A/P AED non-deduct A/P SED non-deduct Service Tax Service Tax Debit A/R BED A/R AED A/R SED A/R CESS A/P ST Set-off A/P CST A/P LST A/R CST A/R LST A/R CST s/charge A/R CST s/charge Desrption BED Set off % BED Set off Inv BED Set off % BED Set off Inv BED Set off % BED Set off Inv BED Inv % BED Inv Qty AED Inv % AED Inv Qty SED Inv % SED Inv Qty A/P BED Set off A/P BED Inv Cond Category Access Sequence Taxes Cond Category Jurisdiction ‘1’ ‘2’ Jurisdiction Level 1 Level 2 Access Sequence 37 by Lawrence Rebello . now there is no need to get additional ‘patch’ for Indian specific taxation requirements. relevant to Indian taxes. IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax on Sales & Purchases > Basic Settings Define Calculation Procedure Define Access Sequences : Some of SAP pre-defined Access sequences (relevant to India taxes) are: TAXJ JTAX JST1 US Taxes with Jurisdiction IN : Excise Access IN : Sales Tax Access TAXJ Define Condition Types : SAP predefined condition types.7 has come up with standard country India specific settings i.7)  Note : Version 4.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling TAXES WITH JURISDICTION (Version 4.e.

7 version has got country India specific tax procedure TAXINJ.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling JAX1 JAX2 JSX1 JSX2 JIPS JIPC JIPL A/P AED Set off A/P AED Inv A/P SED Set off A/P SED Inv Sales Tax Set off CST Inv LST Inv ‘D’ ‘None’ Taxes JST1 JTAX Check Calculation procedure : SAP 4. settings are as follows: Step 100 110 120 200 205 207 210 212 214 215 217 220 230 250 260 510 512 513 514 515 520 530 540 550 JIN1 JIN2 JIN4 JIN5 JIP3 JIP1 JIP2 JSER JSVD JMOD JAED JSED JCES JM01 JA01 JS01 JM02 JA02 JS02 Cond Type BASB Desrption Base Amount Calculated Call Subtotal A/P BED deductible A/P AED deductible A/P SED deductible A/P BED non-deduct A/P AED non-deduct A/P SED non-deduct Base + All duties A/P ST Set-off A/P CST A/P LST Service Tax Service Tax Debit A/R BED A/R AED A/R SED A/R CESS Subtotal A/R CST A/R LST A/R CST s/charge A/R LST s/charge 515 512 520 530 100 110 120 120 120 120 120 120 100 215 215 215 100 250 120 120 120 120 v v v v v MWS MW3 MWS MW3 363 366 360 367 214 v 370 371 363 363 363 VS 5 JT 1 JT 2 ESA ESE v v 354 364 368 362 365 369 JI 1 JI 2 JI 3 NVV 352 frm step to step stat alt CType altBV 362 acctg key 38 by Lawrence Rebello .

e. Input Tax i.e. not relev to tax i. separate line item i.e. Output Tax not deductible v v posting indicator 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 i. Output Tax 39 by Lawrence Rebello .e. Output Tax i. helps in linking posting to G/ L accounts etc (as discussed later).e. separate line item i.e.e. separate line item i. i.e.e. separate line item i. Input Tax i.e. separate line item i. Output Tax i. i. posting not reqd.e.e.e. posting not reqd.e. The important settings here are: process key JI1 JI2 JI3 JI4 description India Basic Excise India Addl Excise India Spl Excise LST tax type 4 4 2 1 i. This serves as accounting key in Calculation Procedure (discussed above).e.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 560 561 562 563 564 565 570 571 572 573 574 575 578 579 580 581 582 583 585 588 590 593 595 598 JMOP JMOQ JAOP JAOQ JSOP JSOQ JMIP JMIQ JAIP JAIQ JSIP JSIQ JMX1 JAX1 JSX1 JMX2 JAX2 JSX2 BED Set off % BED Set off Qty AED Set off % AED Set off Qty SED Set off % SED Set off Qty BED Inv % BED Inv Qty AED Inv % AED Inv Qty SED Inv % SED Inv Qty A/P BED Set off A/P AED Set off A/P SED Set off A/P BED Inventory A/P AED Inventory A/P SED Inventory Total Excise Duty Copy Net Price Price + ED 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 560 562 564 570 572 574 578 120 585 590 590 590 561 563 565 571 573 575 583 120 588 590 590 590 v v v v v v v v v JI 1 JI 1 JI 2 JI 2 JI 3 JI 3 NVV NVV NVV NVV NVV NVV JIPS JIPC JIPL Sales Tax Set off CST Inventory LST Inventory VS5 NVV NVV Assign Country to Calculation Procedure Here calculation procedure is assigned to the company code.e.e. Check and change Settings for Tax Processing Here a tax process for each tax type has to be defined [as discussed for 4. not relev to tax i.e. separate line item i.6 version]. separate line item VS5 Input Tax PST gross 2 i. Output Tax (also it is configured to be not relevant for cash discount) ESA ESE MWS MW3 Output Acquis Tax Input Acquis Tax Output Tax Sales Tax 3 1 2 1 1 i.

e. Input Tax v 3 i.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling NVV Non-deduc input tax 2 i. dist to rel exp/rev  on Sales & Purchases: AllPosting > Define Tax Accounts bewhere it shallIMG associated with different>G/L Global Settingsposting Note the above processing keys will available in > Financial Accounting FA > Tax > – be accounts and (dr & cr) rules  Note : Once all basic settings are made. country India version should be activated for specific fiscal years via IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Tax on Sales & Purchases > Basic Settings > India > Activate country India version for specific fiscal years 40 by Lawrence Rebello .e.

you may not be permitted to enter further invoices. If a particular customer need not be dunned. one can set up corresponding dunning areas. IMG/ES/Defi/Define Credit Control Area. his master data should ‘select’ the ‘reason’.. key 1 2 3 z Note the settings: max level 1 2 3 print separately text Triggers maximum dunning level 1 Triggers maximum dunning level 2 Triggers maximum dunning level 3 payment has been made • v • Define dunning block : for legal cases. Reasons for a dunning block are defined under a key. i. a dunning area is defined. If a credit limit is not set. & cr. freed for Dunning Dunning Interface Manual Block Reason. Items whose contents in this field are identical. The system enters the dunning area into the master record automatically with the corresponding data. etc 41 by Lawrence Rebello .3 reminders etc. For each key. for example. The individual dunning areas can use different procedures or the same dunning procedure. to a profit center. • Define Dunning area : for each co code. The dunning area is then entered in the line item. key 1 (max level = 1) ? only one notice key2 (max level = 2) ? two notices.  Note: The dunning areas with the required dunning procedures are to be entered into the • • Define dunning keys : max 4 levels are possible like 1. The dunning area can correspond. customer or vendor master record if you use different dunning procedures. If different responsibilities and different dunning procedures exists within a company code. are dunned together. you need to define grouping keys (two-character. REMINDERS TO CUSTOMERS – DUNNING IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Dunning > Basic Settings for Dunning Define Dunning Areas Dunning area represents a sub-structure of the Company code. In special cases.2. In such a case. These organizational units are referred to as dunning areas. The key can be entered in an item or in the master record of a customer’s account. In order to group items together for dunning notices. dunning must be blocked. specify a field from the line item whose contents are to comprise the main criteria for the group. items for the purposes of dunning run. Define Interest rates (for Dunning) Interest indicator is defined here specifying interest rates (and validity date) on dr.e. Define Dunning keys Dunning keys define how much / many notices have to be sent to customers. a distribution channel. etc. a sales organization or a business area. it can be useful to group together the open items of a business partner according to certain aspects and dun these items together. you cannot enter invoices.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling DUNNING IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/Dunning/Basic Settings for Dunning While posting repeated invoices. the system uses the standard dunning procedure. Dunning areas are used if several organizational units are responsible for carrying out dunning within one company code. alphanumeric). Otherwise . Define Dunning Block Reason Dunning can be run for Customer account group as a whole. SAP default keys are: ‘Blank’ * A Define Dunning Groupings Dunning notices are generally created per business partner. if the credit limit is crossed.

dun after 30 days. o Calculate interest . o/wise spl GL like downpayments will also be considered.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Define dunning procedure : [ FBMP ] o Dunning interval . o Always dun keep on  o Print all items keep on     o Payment deadline @ 7 i. The totaled items are for threat perception etc. 14 days o Totaled for items – when a dunning level 1 is maintained. You can create your own dunning letters using SAPSCRIPT [ similar to ABAP ]. 3 only have interest mentioned.e. o Line item grace periods e. Here a %age may help. In case of existing customer. both conditions must be met. so that dunning runs can take place with the interval applicable. The %age is based on the total o/s of that customer. all items are totaled. o Minimum amounts for dunning . The posting date will also have to be backdated and credit limit reset. court orders can only be issued level 3 onwards for total of all items dunned.e. For checking dunning open a separate a/c and raise invoices backdated. sometimes if the total o/s is low.frequency of dunning e.g. 42 by Lawrence Rebello . and a %age based charge at the same time.set on after level 2 as letters after 2 i.e.the minimum amount to be considered for dunning. after dunning letter.day in arrears @ 30 i. as minimum amounts for dunning are set. totaling takes place level 2 onwards. o Legal dunning procedure  for items where legal letters to be sent [after 3 levels etc] o Charge for dunning . You cannot define a fixed dunning charge. deadline to receive payment. o Reference dunning process @ 0001. It may be necessary to open posting period suitably. o Minimum day arreas : atleast one item must have a dunning notice to be created.g. 3 o Interest indicator HI o Public holiday calender 99 international IN for India.whether to dun. an item may not come into the dunning process at all. o Minimum amount to be included in dunning o Dunning text – forms are designed and can be changed using ABAP [a/c type D][Ensure the DUNNING TEXT FORMS EXIST] o Spl GL indicator . The minimum days in arrears have no influence on calculation of the days overdue. ensure dunning procedure is set. If both are set. o Dunning levels [top button] . If level 0 is maintained. In Germany.the charge for dunning can be fixed or a %age depending on the parameters set. o Std transactions set on. %age of amounts means %age to total of open items [for a customer].

the dunning date defines when the next dunning run takes place [after the interval]. If you click on current date.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Dunning > Dunning Procedure Define Dunning procedure FBMP Dunning procedures are company code independent i. etc. Charges – dunning charges to be included ? after nth level and ‘x’ dunning amount ? % of dunning charges. court notices can be sent for “Total due items”. Activity: Dunning procedure ABCD 14 1 “min no. of days one of the open items must be overdue for dunning run to be triggered” (only for trigger – overdue days is not altered) Line item grace period 2 “no. etc.2. and ‘the number of dunning levels’. you may not be able to take subsequent runs immediately. Min days in arrears (acct) 4 “no. You can also set the dunning level at which you want to list all due items from an account in the dunning notice. of days within which an open item shall be excluded from dunning run” Interest indicator “interest rate key as defined below” (this interest is not posted to G/L a/c)  Note: Dunning procedure can also be configured for : Dunning Levels – interest to start after ‘x’ days in arrears. However in India. of days between two dunning runs” “1 / 2 / 3 or whatever” no legal use in Dunning interval in days Total due items from dunning level India  Note: In Germany. this function can be used for sending reminders to the customers. you can set a dunning block for it in the master data. • Select parameters • Dunning date . To exclude an account from dunning.e. They determine the ‘dunning interval’. Minm amounts – to trigger dunning ? after ‘x’ total overdue amount ? ‘y’% of overdue amounts (out of total open items). and you may have to go to IMG and change the interval. one dunning procedure can be assigned to more than one co codes – it is assigned to each of the customer via master records.3 use ID for 1st Qt etc. ‘the grace periods for the due date determination’. after 3 dunning notices. and subsequent runs will also be level 1] 43 by Lawrence Rebello . print parameters. • Dun posted upto [consider posted upto date ] • Save parameters • Individual dunning notice @ LP01 • Specify run dates • Specify dunning dates • Specify posted upto dates • Select print preview & printout [o/wise the dunning will not be considered. A customer account is only included in dunning if it assigned a dunning procedure in its master data. and ? minimum amount of dunning interest to be included o SAP/Ac/FA/AR/Periodic Processing • F150 Dunning • Identifier user defined run 1.

customer master data will automatically be updated for first dunning run.it is possible to view the various dunning forms & even create them [SAPSCRIPT similar to ABAP] DATA ENTRY – Dunning Run [SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Periodic Processing] Dunning Activity: Select Individual notices > Output Device ? Company code > customer account ? Run date should be in line with dunning interval & can be diff from dunning date (later) ? Dunning date determines overdue a/cs for dunning trigger ? Documents posted upto date determines which open items are to be considered Take print out of dunning notices. (taking sample printout or test run would not make the dunning run effective) F150  Note: SAP standard Dunning forms can be displayed or changed (using SAPSCRIPT similar to ABAP) via IMG > Financial Accounting > Financial Accounting Global Settings > Correspondence 44 by Lawrence Rebello .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • IMG/FA/Global/Corresspondence . After this step.

e. o Prepare interest on arrears calc . Prepare Interest on Arrears calculation Terms of interest calculation are defined for interest indicators as defined above. for document types).while preparing int on arrears calc.define Define Number range for Interest forms Number ranges defined for interest calculation are not used for any other purposes (for example.for balances [INT_RATE_DETERMINE] 45 by Lawrence Rebello .e. Important settings: Interest indicator Selection of Items Transfer Days Tolerance Days 01 standard item interest calculator ‘open & all cleared items’ days taken in bank clearing [excluded from int cal] grace days for interest trigger [do not affect overdue days] • o Prepare interest on a/c balances o Special GL tran for int calc Interest Calculation o Define reference int rates . in practice this is not normally needed] Interest indicator is assigned to a customer account vis master data. [though these indicators can also be used for interest on payables.arrears [DEBIT_INT_RATE_DETERMINE] / [CREDIT_INT_RATE_DETERMINE] . interest on balance after giving effect of each dr or cr entries or account balance interest calculation i. interest on net debit / credit balance. then you define the same number range for each company code.HI for both DR & CR & enter Ref Int as defined IND_INT. If interest is calculated on accounts from various company codes. SAP default interest indicators are: 01standard item interest calculator 02standard balance interest calculator calculation type – P calculation type – S o Define no ranges for interest forms . the effective date should be borne in mind [backdated] o/w interest runs will not take place as invoices are backdated. Payment Terms 0001 & Tax Code  OFF.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling INTEREST IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/Interest Calculation • Global Settings o Define interest calculation types  P item interest calc  S balance int calc  Identifier HI for HPCL INTEREST ON RECEIVABLES IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Interest Calculation > Interest Calculation Global Settings Define Interest Calculation types Interest indicators determine whether they are to be used for the item interest calculation i. Keep Int Numerator  ON. o Enter interest values o Special function module for interest rate determination .INR for India as IND_INT o Define time based transactions .

You use the account symbol 1000 for the customer posting.for int. Define Time based Terms (interest) Here additional (premium) interest rates are defined for long overdue open items. You can differentiate the account specifications according to currencies. The following specifications are necessary: • Account determination keys and posting details First you determine which account determination keys are used. you specify a debit posting key. This can be defined directly for each interest indicators with or without associating it with a ‘Reference Interest rate’. • G/L accounts For each G/L account symbol. have to specify the posting keys. For every combination of the account determination keys.for account balances INT_RATE_DETERMINE • Interest Posting o A/R calculation of interest on arrears  Int recd 273100  Int paid 220000  Customer posting open [for customers] IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Interest Calculation > Interest Posting Interest on arrears . 46 by Lawrence Rebello . This activity is purely informative. You use them if you want to define interest posting in more detail.chgd on overdue items CREDIT_INT_RATE_DETERMINE Credit int. you specify the account allocation for interest earned and interest paid in full. It is not necessary to specify an account since the posting is made to the customer account. You do.for account balances INT_RATE_DETERMINE Debit int.Customers In this step. Enter Interest values Here a rate of interest is defined for the ‘Reference Interest rate’ Specify Functional Module for Interest Rate determination The following function modules are included in the standard system: Transaction type Function Module Credit int. For the business transaction account determination key. The other account determination keys (company code. however. The account determination is carried out via the posting interface of application 0002 (interest on arrears). interest indicator. business area) are optional.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Interest Calculation Define Reference Interest Rates Here a reference interest rates defined by entering a key and a mnemonic name. a credit posting key and account symbols (posting details). 1000 (interest earned) and 2000 (interest paid) should be entered.for overdue items DEBIT_INT_RATE_DETERMINE Debit int. you define the specifications for posting the interest calculated as interest on arrears.

minus credit interest past period with post-entered value dates debit interest past period with post-entered value dates. The following specifications are necessary: • Account determination keys and posting details For the business transaction account determination key.2A without open items o F. An entry in the G/ L account field of the account allocation is not necessary here (customer posting). Ensure customer is configured for interest id & cycle. • G/L accounts Assign accounts in full to the account symbols for the respective interest earned posting or interest paid posting. The account determination is carried out via the posting interface of application 0005 (customer interest scale). you should also enter a set of posting details for each of the following business transactions: ? ? ? minus debit interest past period with post-entered value dates. you enter at least one set of posting details for the interest earned posting and the interest paid posting respectively. SAP/Ac/FA/AR/PP/Interest calculation o Arrears interest o F. to enable calculation [not posting to customer a/c] of interest as per defined interest parameters for inclusion in dunning letters. If you are using interest splitting.24 free selections  Calculation period from to  Bill of Exch [blank]  Int indicator HI  Form for int calc F_DUZI_01 47 by Lawrence Rebello .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o A/R balance interest calculation  0001 interest recd 273100 1  0002 interest paid 220000 2  0015 calc int recd  0016 calc int paid  1000 customer posting + [open] Interest on Balances – Customers In this step. credit interest calculation period.2B with open items o F.2C without postings o F. credit interest past period with post-entered value dates debit interest calculation period. you define the specifications for posting the interest calculated on the customer account balance. It is stored in the posting details. • Assign Form for Int Indicator o Ensure that Form F_DUZI_01 is assigned for HI & HPCL o Ensure that Form F_D_INT_SCALE_00 is assigned for HB & HPCL IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Interest Calculation > Print Assign Forms for Interest Calculation Note the SAP standard settings: Int ind 01 02 std item interest calculator std balance interest calculator BALC BALC Co code Forms F_DUZI_01 F_D_INT_SCALE_00 • The interest indicator [ HI ] can be entered in the dunning procedure [define interest rates]. Only the posting key is relevant for the customer posting.

and processing the batch with System/Services/BatchInput/Sessions etc.2B F. Interest run is processed through “Batch process” via Header-Systems > services > batch Inputs > Sessions. a session is created. You can create a spool request for a neat letter that can be sent to the party etc. Balance Interest [ F_D_INT_SCALE_00 ] Calc Period From to Summ level 2 Ref / Addl Date 3 Std Int Calc  Generate as above. thru this run.e. The spool request can be accessed fro “ Own Spool Jobs” Balance Interest F.e. note the following settings: Calculation period Interest indicator Create Form for int cal Print Form Acct overview printer (batch) Interest posting date ‘v’ & specify the relevant Form name ‘v’ i. Access from OWN SPOOL JOBS.26      Create form  & F_DUZI_01 Print form  & LP01 Date of Issue [TO period] Interest Posting Date [TO period] Interest Posting Document Date [TO period] Posting Period as applicable.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling         o F.24 i.2A F. DATA ENTRY – Interest on Receivables [SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Periodic Processing > Interest Calculation] Arrears Interest Without open items With open items Without postings Free selection While performing an interest run. interest are also posted to customer a/c After specifying all parameters & executing (F8). o/s balances and interest thereon can be printed also for correspondence with customers name of a printer [batch process] F. You can generate a batch for subsequent batch processing by specifying in Output Control “Acct overview printer (batch)”.26 48 by Lawrence Rebello . Also a spool request can be created for a neat interest statement to be sent to customers.2C F.

49 by Lawrence Rebello .) Vendor (ext no.7 version] Creation of Vendors Vendor Invoice Vendor Account Balances Outgoing Payments  Note: For outgoing payments.r. ‘Preparations’. ‘Invoices’ and ‘Outgoing Payments’. and it specified whether it is a one-time account 0001 0002 0003 0004 One-time Vend (int no.) Vendor (int no.r. etc.) One-time Vend (ext no.t.) CPD CPDL KRED LIEF. [ XDN1 ] o Assign no ranges to vendor a/c groups [ OMSJ ]  KRED 02 o IMG/FA/FA Global/Tax Sales& Purchases/Calculation  Define tax codes for sales/purchases : I1 input tax GL a/c 154000 o Create vendor SAP/Ac/FA/AP/Master Records  FK01 create  Use next screen icon _ to navigate.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling ACCOUNTS PAYABLE ACCOUNTS PAYABLE [All IMG steps are similar to as discussed in Accounts Receivable w. etc Reconciliation a/c Data Entry  Note that Account determination procedure is not defined for Vendors.t General Data. Vendor Master Record Important settings relevant to Vendor Master: Vendor Account Groups – As many as 18 types are available with SAP Vendor Goods Supplier Payee Invoicing Party For each Account Group: ? ? specific “FSV Parameters w.  Wt can be used for TDS  Release group means vendor approval  Check duplicate invoices for invoice & DC  EDI electronic data interchange. 160000 (4. a ‘House Bank’ must have been defined and created in the company as discussed later.6c version) 11310000(4.7 version) FK01 FB60 FK10N F-53 [F-58 for check printing] [F-43 in 4. Company code data and Sales data” are set as per the requirement.] IMG/FA/ARAP/Vendor A/c’s/Master Records o Preparation for creation of vendor master records o Define a/c groups [ OMSG ]  KRED Vendor [internal no assignment]  Reco no 160000  Down payment 170000 o Define screen layout per co [vendors] o Define screen layout per activity [vendors] o Create no ranges for vendor a/c’s.

Print job is created. 50 by Lawrence Rebello . TAX V1] Outgoing Payment  F-53 Post  F-58 Post & Print. Access thru system/own spool requests [ requires house bank creation ] Change co code Raw mat a/c 400000 change tax params as reqd FK10N to view balances.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o o o o o Create invoice SAP/Ac/FA/AP/Doc Entry  FB60 [ use F-43 wef 470 ] create invoice [R M 400000.

[ will be reqd for reports ]  Assign forms for WT reporting N/a  Assign Header / Footer Text – copy from default. o While using F-58 WT is calculated and amount payable is automatically reduced. official WT Code 192C. WT A/c is credited when the payment is finally cleared. currency INR. o Define WT details in Vendor .e WT at the payment stage F-58.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling WITHOLDING TAX [ will be used with AP payments ] IMG/FA/Global/Line Items/Controls • Screen Variants o Standard o Austria & Switzerland o France & Withholding Tax . 51 by Lawrence Rebello . Specifications for WT Rept keep OFF. o In case of part payment. System will inform that WT is applicable for the Vendor. o Postings  Define A/c’s for withholding tax  Tran QST Dr 177000 Cr 177000 PK 40/50 Rules Dr/Cr o Reporting  Define recepient codes • 00 / / 01 / IN / Individual  Define forms for WT N/a. Net Base for Tax Contrib  OFF. WT code T1. posting with payment  i. rates 2%.FK02 o When entering an invoice FB60. • IMG/FA/Global/WT o Basic settings  Maintain countries IN India [No addl WTCountry]  Maintain types of recipients 01 individual  Define Income types SEW1 self employed cat 1 o Calculation/Maintain Tax Codes  Copy from GB & change. [ W1 ]  Maintain formulas is not necessary if a direct %age is specified above.

which is necessary for printing the withholding tax form.g. etc) are defined for every “withholding tax type” [defined later]. etc o Check recepient types [ Co companies. for eg. Check Recipient types Here recipient types are (Individual. Hence by assigning that country here. For e. withholding tax rules of that foreign country is applicable. If an Indian parent is having a branch in US. The withholding tax keys correspond to the withholding tax laws according to which tax is withheld. for example income from Interest received Work as an artiste Self-employed work. Company. Self-employed category • • • SAP standard type 52 by Lawrence Rebello . The system can therefore assign the withholding tax items to the correct withholding tax return. WT key 194C Description TDS on Contractors.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling EXTENDED WITHOLDING TAX IMG/FA/Global/Extended WT • Basic Settings o Check WT countries EXTENDED WITHHOLDING TAX IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Basic Settings Check Withholding Tax Country It may happen that incase of foreign branches. OT others ]  The type of recipient categorizes the vendor. etc SEW1 i.e. Activity : WHT type W1 W1 (defined later) Recipient type CO OT Description Companies Others o Check income types Check Income types Type of income subject to withholding tax. the assigning would be as follows: Country IN IN IN US w/tax country India USA Description o Define official WT codes [ WT Keys 194C contractors ][ Page: 52 [0]Define Official Withholding Tax Key wef 470 ] Define official withholding tax keys Here a tax key is defined for withholding tax types. rules as prevalent in that company are also made available to the Company (global group). SAP delivers standard settings for official withholding tax keys for India.

where TDS has to be calculated at posting time [ no payment ]. if any and then TDS deducted at the end of either condition] Define minimum / maximum amount Base amount WT code level v Type level WT amount WT code level Type level v 53 by Lawrence Rebello .relevant • In this activity you define the withholding tax type for posting at the time of invoicing. WT types also help in classifying the following: ? The time at which WT is posted i. this will not hold good.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Calculation o Withholding tax type  Define WT type for invoice posting . if applicable. invoices are accumulated on periodical basis or till the ‘max acc value’ specified. but in case of Customers also. and ? Basis of accumulation. etc as defined above for posting at the time of Invoice. WHT Type Description W1 Sec 194 – Contractor TDS W2 Sec 194 – Contractor s/charge Double click to get inside Note the settings Calculation Net Amount Gross Amount v Tax Amount Post WT amount invoice amount considered ‘net of TDS’ and WT calculated accordingly used in case of surcharge v Accumulation type “no accumulation” TDS is calculated on each transaction [If this is selected. This has to be activated for VENDORS as in India. Activity : Populate W1. IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Calculation > Withholding Tax types Check WT types for Invoice posting WT types defined here will have effect at the time of INVOICE posting and not at the time of Payment.e. This will be relevant for Vendors. TDS is deductible at the time of credit only (assuming payment is not before credit entry in the books). at invoice or at payment ? Basis at which base amount is calculated. Keep Post W/Tax amount ON.  Note: ‘WT types’ are different from ‘WT codes’ to which WT % rates are allocated.

FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling  Define WT type for payment posting – relevant for customers with dedu at receipt entry. if deducted. Check WT types for Payment Posting WT types defined here will have effect at the time of PAYMENT posting and not at the time of Invoice posting. o Witholding tax codes  Define WT codes [ if %age is defined.  Assign condition type to WT type • You only need to carry out the following activity if you are implementing FI together with SD. standard posting – bank/customer/vendor line items reduced Sec194 . rates. All settings are more or less similar.Contractor TDS o o  Define formula for calculating WT Witholding Tax Base Amount  Define processing key for modified net amount • Modified means that an extra amount is added to the net amount  Define processing key for modified tax amount  Potray dependencies between WT types Minimum & Maximum amounts  Define min/max amounts for WT types  Define min/max amounts for WT codes 54 by Lawrence Rebello . > Extended WT > Calculation >  Note: A business transaction can be assigned only one WT code per WT type.  Define exch rate type for WT type M Define Exchange rate type for WT type Not needed for TDS in case of payments to nationals in India. Activity : Settings are made here also (with a different WT type) for all types defined for ‘Invoice Posting’ case. no formula needed ] IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax Withholding Tax Code Define WT codes Here WT codes (i. etc) are defined for each WT type defined earlier.e. If more that one code (rate) has to be applied. This has to be activated for CUSTOMERS as in India. Defined in case of TDS on payments made to Non-residents which is defined by a separate WT type. these must be represented by different WT types. TDS.e. Activity : WT type W1 % subject to tax posting indicator WT rate Income type 2% SEW1 WT code W1 100% 1 i. customer is first booked for gross receivable and only at the payment. is entered.

Activate Extended Withholding Tax in Company Code  • Note: Once activated. IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Company Code Assign WT types to Company Code Activity : Assign (all) WT type to Company code double click to get inside settings Recipient type CO w/tax agent subject to W/tax v v i.6c version) 13113940 (in 4.7 version) IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Posting > India Specify Document types & G/L accounts for WT (TDS) adjustment entries Adjustments for short-deduction of TDS should be made here and posting should be made to a separate G/L a/c with “post automatically” off.000001  Define numbering ranges .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Company Code o Assign WT types to co code – Add if necessary.Assign Numbering Class – Add 55 by Lawrence Rebello . unless selected – no TDS -do(in case of customers) o Activate extended WT – you cannot then revert to STD WT. for every recipient type there has to be a separate WT type (as interpreted earlier) imp for telling SAP to deduct TDS on vendor payments.204000  Define a/c for self WT  Define a/c for WT offsetting entry – 204000 IMG > Financial Accounting > FA Global Settings > Withholding Tax > Extended WT > Posting > Accounts for WT Define Accounts for Withholding Tax to be paid over Here G/L accounts are defined for a combination of WT type and WT code.01  Assign numbering groups to number class  Assign numbering concept to co code country [K002]  Numbering concept option 2 .101  Define numbering groups . it cannot be de-activated later. Postings o Accounts for WT – [ can be separate for Cust / Vend ]  Define a/c for WT to be paid over-177000  Define a/c for WT gross up offset entry . Activity : WT type W1 WT code W1 G/L a/c 177000 (in 4.e. normally “post automatically” will be on as TDS is internally calculated & posted by SAP] Activity : Document type G/L a/c SA 14880000 o Certificate numbering for WT [ not reqd ]  Define numbering class . [note that in case of TDS accounts.

and Vendor reduced.FK02 [ select WT screen at the beginning ] When entering an invoice FB60. System will inform that WT is applicable for the Vendor. While posting.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • • • Reporting [Extended WT] o Define recepient code for EWT – W1/ 10 / / co / co / company o Define forms for WT o Define form names for EWT reporting o Assign forms for WT certificates o Define minimum amounts for WT type o Define minimum amounts for WT code Generic WT reporting o Define recepient code for EWT o Define output groups o Define certificate numbering for EWT o Define forms for WT reporting o Define file format for WT reporting o Define header & footer texts for forms o Define minimum amounts for WT Type o Define minimum amounts for WT code Define WT details in Vendor . 56 by Lawrence Rebello . WT is credited.

e. In the Payment method / Country. enter it in the open item. As there would be a problem of 196600 not being a reco a/c .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling HOUSE BANK CONFIGURATION FBZP all house bank info. for automatic payment transactions to determine the bank details for payment. add all GERMAN [DE] types. IMG/FA/BANK ACCOUNTING/Bank Accounts/ • Define house banks o Delete the default German Banks if any & create new [del from bottom] [You may not be able to delete all the info copied.  Note: If the required details have not been entered in the master record. Important settings: Required entries in the master record – such as Bank details. ZA for clearing payments Set up Payment methods per Company code for payment transactions In this activity. In Define Reco A/c’s without Automatic Payments. In the Payment Method / Co Code. Here you select the required payment method by marking it. Posting specifications i. every account at a house bank by an account ID and are used say. add 196600 to the list. SWIFT code or collection authorization. commence deletion from bottom up [ ie value date upwards. all DE types will be preset. goto FS00 and change 196600 to be a reco a/c. you specify which payment method can be used per company code and determine the conditions under which a payment method should be used. the system transfers the payment methods to the customer/vendor master record. The G/L account is to be managed in the same currency as the account at the bank. Document types – ZP for Payment posting. If an open item is to be paid using a specific payment method. Payment methods are entered in the master records of customers and vendors in order to specify how payments are made.} o A/c id if reqd 1111 HOUSE BANK IMG > Financial Accounting > Bank Accounting > Bank Accounts Define House Banks Each house bank of a company code is represented by a bank ID in the SAP system. • Outgoing payments configuration Outgoing Payments IMG > Financial Accounting > AR & AP > Business Transaction > Outgoing Payments > Auto Outgoing Payments > Payment Method / Bank Selection [Set up all Company codes for payment transactions is similar to as discussed in Accounts Receivable] Set up Payment methods per Country for Payment Transactions The payment method determines how payments are to be made. Bank transfer or Bill of exchange.g. by Check. After defining the House Bank etc. the payment method cannot be used. Important settings: "bank key" For Domestic banks Bank number (However. domestic bank can have a/c in foreign currency) For Foreign banks SWIFT code  Note: Assign a G/L account for the specified bank account. e. Important Settings: Minimum & Maximum amount limits for payments 57 by Lawrence Rebello . Deletion will now be possible under Setup Bank Deter for Payment Trans. The terms which have been defined for the payment method must be satisfied for the payment. ] In the HB definition keep bills of exchange off. All payment methods are displayed in the customer or vendor master record in the screen for selecting the payment method.

However you can control this by specifying certain currencies per payment method and country in the activity “ Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions”. the specified currencies are ignored. money is transferred from the house bank to the business partner's bank in the shortest possible time. the payment program ignores the amounts you enter here. Setup bank determination for payment transactions  Ranking order : delete & create for C cheque [ deletion in reverse order i. Number ranges for cheques : [ FCHI ] IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/OP/AutoOP/Payment_Media/Check Management  Define no ranges for cheques : lot 101 chq no from 100000 to 100100  Ensure vendor is created  Raise invoice thru FB60  SAP/Ac/FA/AP/DocEntry/OP • F-53 post • F-58 post and print cheque [ enter details & process open items] 58 by Lawrence Rebello . If you specify the payment method in an open item.  Note: If the payment method only permits local currency payments. Only payments in these specified currencies are then made using this payment method.  Value date : days taken for local clearance etc.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling  Note: A maximum amount must be specified otherwise the payment method cannot be used. Optimization • by bank groups – If you optimize by bank groups. the house bank selection is determined by the business partner's domicile. by postal codes – If you optimize by postal codes. • Foreign payment/Foreign currency payment If you specify that the payment method can also be used for foreign currencies. Create here and access in available amounts. you can go directly to the activity for assigning house banks to an interval of postal codes. all currencies are permitted. o o o o o o o o IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/OP/Auto OP/ Payment method / Bank selection for payment Prg Setup all co codes for payment transactions  Tolerance days 7 vendors FP customers FPJ Setup paying co codes for payment transactions Setup payment methods per country for payment transactions  Currencies allowed [ blank = all curr allowed ]  ZP payment posting. value date upwards ]  Bank accounts : 113100  Available amounts : approx amount available for making payments.  Expenses / charges : useful for bill of exchange payments. you assign all banks in the master records to a bank group defined by you. If you select the "Optimization by postal codes" field. ZV payment clearing  Copy one by one from GB for IN Setup payment methods per co code for payment transactions : maximum amount 5000000/-. Days indicate interval of getting the bank statement for analysis etc. For this to be possible.e.

enter Co Codes. Qt etc. Vendor [ master data must contain paymt meth ] from to. PrintOut Prg RFFOUS_C [as shown on payMeth] enter variant and Maintain TOP for Chq lot etc. Enter details.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling   SAP/Ac/FA/AP/Account/F-44 for clearing payment to vendor thru FBCJ. Addl log Vend from to. 59 by Lawrence Rebello . Output Control DO NOT VOID CHEQUES. WT will however not appear. ] Automatic Payment Run :  Note: AP/Periodic Proc/F110 Auto Payment Prog – Give run date and ID like Mth. [ This is a substitute for FB15 on the customer side.

o Setup payment method per co code for payment transactions  C cheque  Ranking order 1  Min & max amounts for payment  Optimize using postal code for faster searches. payment cannot be made in that currency.include all possible currencies. Instead of the above. o FEBA post process. The other details on left like bank a/c con be copied wherever possible.When the house bank is entered. Value date is important. 60 by Lawrence Rebello . as the matching takes place as per the value dates. you can also create the house bank thru IMG/FA/BankAccounting/BankAccounts • Define house bank .  Post statement from Bank Statement TOP. If not set.. click create button to create. • IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/IP/AutoIP/Payment Method/Bank selection for payment prg o Setup all co codes for payment transactions  FPJ customers  FP vendors o Setup paying co codes for payment transactions  Copy from …. o Setup bank determination for payment transactions  Bank a/c create  Available amounts for C  Value dates • IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/OP/AutoOp/PaymentMedia/CheckManagement o Define no ranges for cheques o Pass some bank entries thru FBCJ [cash journal] • SAP/AC/Treasury/CashManagement/Incomings/ManualBankStatement o FF67 enter  Beginning balance = 0  End balance = total or earlier entry  In Further Processing keep Bank Posting  ON. o Setup payment methods per country for payment transactions  Copy IN cheque exists  Possible currencies .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENT SAP/FA/Banking/MasterData/BankMasterData • FI01 create.  The difference enter into the statement with +=dr & -=cr  Save statement.

annually]. FOREIGN CURRENCY VALUATION AT CLOSING Valuation of open items at closing date (B/S date) at exchange rate prevalent on the closing date is done as follows: Set Exchange rates [SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Environment > Current Settings] Here an exchange rate can be defined for an ‘exchange rate type’ and with a validity period. this field is linked to an on-line system and reflects real-time rate at any point of time. open item selection. It will give a document extract with closing value of open items as well as “Foreign Exchange Loss/Gain” 61 by Lawrence Rebello . • SAP/Ac/FA/AR/PP/Closing/Valuate o F.quarterly. open items [customer/vendor] must be valued and loss/gain reported . Any document posted within this period will be converted at this rate for posting purposes. • In case the customer is also a vendor o Closing/Regroup .invoice in a different currency is to be valued and posted in co currency.FC Bal per Account 10 Co Code Curr.  Create Postings & Reverse Postings ON. Exchange rate types are: Standard Bank selling rate Standard Bank buying rate Standard average rate B G M  Note: However in real-time. • FB70 .  Selections – Valuate Customer open items  FASB52 Exch Cur Type M  Process sessions and view doc ext.FASB52. thereby nullifying the loss/gain entries passed earlier. posting date. Rate entered will generate loss/gain.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling FOREIGN CURRENCY VALUATION AT CLOSING At specific intervals [monthly.05 open item in foreign currency  Valuation Method KTO . valuation date.05 [SAP Menu > Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Periodic Processing > Closing > Valuate] Process this step after specifying all parameters like. FASB exchange rate type.F101 receivables / payables User can pass a reversal entry [ if reqd ] the next day. Valuate Open Items in Foreign Currency F. etc. • SAP/Ac/FA/AR/Environment/Current Settings o S_BCE_68000174 enter exch rates [OB08 ] o Exch type “M” from USD to INR.

The credit control area 0001 is defined in the SAP standard system.  Note: SAP has defined 3 update types for SD updation – 000012. get assigned to the customer automatically. Within a CCA.e. the credit limits must be specified in the same currency. if “all Co codes” is selected ‘v’ while defining a CCA. 000018 000012 v v v v v 000015 000018 v Order Document (increases open order value) Delivery Document (inc open delivery value and red open order value) Billing Document (inc open billing doc value and red open delivery value) FA Document (inc open item value and red open billing doc value) v v v • Controlling . A CCA can include one or more Company codes but not vice-versa i. which are specific to such CCA. all parameters. Credit limit. templates  Co code  Plant  Sales orgn. but not ‘some’ company codes). Risk group (create – OB01) and Credit representative group (create – OB02) all are specific to a Credit Control Area. Whenever a new customer is created and any CCA is assigned in master record. it would be applicable to all company codes defined in a Company. dist channel. (i. Division  Co area co code [not necessary unless you want to enable controlling]  Structure.only if you think necessary o Copy delete check co area [copy from 0001]  Top button structure. 000015.e. navigation gives a tree effect 62 by Lawrence Rebello . it can be available to ‘one or all’.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling SALES AND DISTRIBUTION IMG/ES/Definitions • Financial Accounting o Define credit control area [sd updation 000012] [ OB45/OB01/OB02 ] SALES & DISTRIBUTION IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Financial Accounting Define Credit Control Area OB45 The Credit Control Area is an organizational unit that specifies and checks a credit limit for customers.

etc.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Logistics – general o Define valuation level  Stock valuation.  • • Note: Even is case of service organization. Copy. Data specific to a Plant are – Address / Language / Country / Own Material Master Record. etc. Plant • • ? ? ? created. Plant has to be defined and here it would mean the ‘Location’ services are rendered from. currency.r.t. Define Location Locations are used for informative assignment only. keep valuation as at plant o Define plant [necessary before copy o/w DEM & German plant o Copy delete check plant [ OX10 ] IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Logistics – General Business areas / Define Valuation Level (w. o • • Define locations [ OX09 ] OX09 A location allows a plant to be classified according to spatial or situation criteria. ? ? ? The following master data objects can be assigned to these locations: Asset master records of Asset Management / Pieces of equipment Functional locations / Work centers Production resources / Tools • 63 by Lawrence Rebello . OX10 A Plant is an operating area or branch within a company. Also in two cases valuation level must be Plant : ? To use the SAP Application component for Production Planning / Costing. You can only use locations to structure a matchcode or as parameter criteria in reporting. Check. Stocks) Sales Org / Distribn Channels SAP has defined valuation level as Plant by default. or ? If SAP system is a Retail one Define. You cannot derive any functionality from locations in terms of hierarchies.  Note: Before copying it is important to define one Plant otherwise it would copy all the German plant name. The Plant plays an important role in Material Valuation / Inventory Management / MRP / Production / Costing / Plant Maintenance Company Code ? ? Plant / Plants ? ? Storage Locations Shipping Points ? Other Plants Activity : Plant should be copied from SAP standard company 0001 (as creation of Plant needs creation of a lot of tables). Delete. To use the SD module a Plant must be It has got different meaning in different SAP modules: MM : Location where material stock is kept PP : Manufacturing facility SD : Location from where material and services are distributed and corresponds to a distribution centre. add.

A Distribution channel has its own master data for customers or materials as well as own conditions and All items of a sales document is specific to a Distribution channel. This organizational unit is a means thru which saleable material or services reach the customer. (eg motorcycles. A Sales organization cannot share any master data with other sales organizations. one or more plants can be allocated to a Distribution channel. However. • • • • • • A Sales organization is the highest summation level (after the Client level) for sales statistics with their own statistics currency. Activity: 64 by Lawrence Rebello . Copy. one or more Plants can be assigned to one Sales organization. Check Sales Organization OVX5 Sales organization is an organizational unit in Logistics which groups the enterprise according to the requirements of sales & distribution. o • • • • ? ? ? Define copy delete check dist channel [ OVX1 ] Define. SD & copy from templates] OVXB Define. Sales Organization & Distribution Channel”. The area for the material is determined via the plant and the division defined in the material master record. all items of an order. Activity: Copy from SAP standard Sales organization 0001 (as creation of sales organization contains lot of tables). The master data must be created separately. The entire sales document is therefore entered for a distribution channel. Delete. however.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Define copy delete check divisions [ OVXB ] [goto next i. services. A division can represent a product group. The sales organization is also used to take for example. • Sales & distribution o Define copy delete check sales organization [ OVX5 ] [structure/templates] IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Sales & Distribution Define. spare parts. A Sales organization has its own customer and material master data as well as its own conditions and pricing. In turn. that is. therefore it is also liable for the sold product and responsible for the customer’s right of recourse. delivery or a billing document are specific to a Sales organization. pricing. etc) It is also required for business area account assignment for logistics transactions in Financial Accounting. Check Distribution Channel OVX1 A Distribution channel can be allocated to one or more Sales organizations. Delete. for eg. one can restrict price agreement with a customer to a certain division or can conduct statistical analysis by a division. and Differentiate sales statistics Copy from SAP standard Distribution Channel 01 (as creation of sales organization contains lot of tables) Parameters are only name but no address. Delete. Copy. A sales organization is responsible for distributing goods and services. A Sales organization is specific to a Company code. The data for a distribution channel or a division can. be created for several distribution channels or divisions. etc.e. Check Division • • • • The division is one of the organizational units in Sales & Distribution that is used to group material and services. Division. Parameters are name. national or international sub-division of markets into account. All items in a sales & distribution document. a regional. address (Indian) & calendar (99 – Intl calendar). Creation of a material is specific to a set of “Plant. Copy. And is used to Define responsibility Achieve flexible pricing.

a dedicated group of employees responsible only for organizing urgent deliveries. • o Maintain purchasing organization [N/A] [ OX08 ] Logistics execution o Define copy delete warehouse no [N/A] o Define copy delete shipping point [ OVXD / EC07 ] IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Logistics – Execution Define. Check Shipping Point • Shipping point is place from where goods are finally transported for delivery. for example. o o Maintain loading point Maintain transportation planning point 65 by Lawrence Rebello . Activity: Copy from SAP standard Storage Location 0001 (as creation of sales organization contains lot of tables) Parameters are name and address. One or more shipping points can be assigned to a Plant and vice-versa. Parameters are name and address. Copy. shipping conditions and transportation group. Delete. It is possible to store material data specific to a storage location. It can also be.e. Stocks are managed only on a quantity basis and not on a value basis at storage location level. It can be a loading ramp. Physical inventories are carried out at storage location level. Options available are: • No Pick-pack time • Route-dependent Pick-pack time • Route-independent Pick-pack time. or a rail depot. and • Default from shipping line Pick-pack time: Pick-pack time is the difference between material availability time/date (after being issued) and loading time/date. where shipping point of a delivery is located and the place it has to go. country of origin / destination. Options available are: • No loading time • Route-dependent loading time • Route-independent loading time. SAP automatically proposes a transportation route based on departure zone. Activity: Copy from SAP standard Shipping Point 0001 (as creation of sales organization contains lot of tables).FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • o Maintain sales office [for service] [ OVX1 ] o Maintain sales group [for service] [ OVX4 ] Material management o Maintain storage locations [goods stored for delivery] [ OX09 ] IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Material Management Maintain Storage Locations OX09 • • • Storage Locations are specific to a Plant and there may be one or more storage locations within a plant. a mail depot. It is a physical place and should be near to the delivering Plant. • Important parameters : Loading time: Loading time is the difference between goods issue time/date and Loading time/date. Shipping point is defined for transportation scheduling and delivery scheduling. and • Default from shipping line Departure zone: Departure zone is defined based on region where delivery originates from i.

Each sales document is assigned to exactly one sales area. it may happen that the target org unit are assigned to other existing org units incl SAP standard units and vice versa. • • • • Financial accounting o Assign co code to company o Assign co code to credit control area [ OB38 ] Controlling [only if necessary] o Assign co code to co area [ OXO6 ] o Assign control area to operating concern Logistics – general o Assign plant to co code [ OX18 ] Sales & distribution o Assign sales org to co code [ OVX3 ] o Assign dist channel to sales org [ OVXK ] 66 by Lawrence Rebello . Activity : Financial Accounting Assign Co code Logistics – General Assign Plant Sales & Distribution : Assign Sales org Dist channel Division Setup sales area ? ? ? ? ? ? Credit control area Co code Co code Sales org Sales org Combination of SO. These multiple SP create a problem at Sales Order creation (VA01) & Outbound Delivery (VL01N). and this cannot be changed later. Here it becomes necessary to clear unwanted assignments from both places. you may end up with multiple shipping points. Unwanted SP can now be deleted. ? Plant Logistics – Execution Assign Shipping Point  Note: While copying from 0001. which defines the distribution channel a sales organization uses to sell products from a certain division. The above would normally happen when 0001 is copied & all associated SP will be assigned. Sales area Sales org & Dist channel ? ? Credit control area Plant   Note: In case of copying from SAP standard. DC & Div). Note: In FI assignment screen is presented in ‘Table’ form while in case of SD. To clear problem of SP determination: IMG > LE > Shipping > Basic Shipping Functions > SP & GRP Determination > Assign SP – DEASSIGN and DELETE as above. Shipping condition problem: IMG > LE > Shipping > Define Shipping condition by sales doc type : select sales doc type as ‘OR’ & Shipping Condition as ‘01’. Distr Channel & Div  Note: Sales area is a not given any separate name. Logistics. etc it is presented in ‘Tree’ form. it is just a combination (SO.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling IMG/ES/Assignment IMG > Enterprise Structure > Assignment Here various organizational units as defined above are assigned to higher organizational units. which can be cleared by IMG > LE > Shipping > Picking > Determine Pick Loc > Assign Pick Loc : DELETE unwanted assignments & go back to assignment of SP.

FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • o Assign div to sales org [ OVXA ] o Setup sales area [ combination of SO & div] [ OVXG / OVXM ] o Assign sales office to sales area [ OVXM ] o Assign sales group to sales office [ OVXJ ] o Assign sales org & dist channel to plant [ OVX6 ] o Assign sales area to credit control area [ OVFL ] Logistics execution o Assign shipping point to plant [ OVXC ]  o Note: While copying from 0001.common master data in DC Div should be defined & assigned to a co code. Master data forms the basis for SD processing. Precisely maintained data simplifies & accelerates the operations procs in daily business.DELETE unwanted assignments & go back to assignment of SP. If there is any error SAP points those errors in this IMG function. Execute & clear all errors. These multiple SP create a problem at VA01 & VL01N.  Activity: DChl-cond 01 DChl-cust/mt 01 Sales org Distr Chl 0001 01 (similarly for Division) • o Define common divisions IMG/ES/Assignment/Consistency Check o Check Enterprise Structure for S & D. which can be cleared by LE/Shipping/Picking/Determine Pick Loca/Assign PL . To clear problem of SP determination [ OVL2 ] LE/Shipping/Basic_Shipping_Functions/SP&GRP_Determination/Assign SP DEASSIGN and DELETE as above. 67 by Lawrence Rebello . IMG > Enterprise Structure > Consistency Check Consistency check is done for ensuring if all assignments regarding enterprise structure in sales & distribution (only) is proper.} IMG > Sales & Distribution > Master Data Define common Distribution channel (& Division ) Here condition data and customer & material master data defined in one Distribution channel (or Division) can be assigned to other distribution channels (or Divisions) also. The above would normally happen when 0001 is copied & all associated SP will be assigned. There you will now be able to delete unwanted SP. you may end up with multiple shipping points. • IMG/SD/Master data o Define common dist channel [IMG/SD/Master Data . However this sharing is under one sales organization and not cross sales org. this IMG step is important. Note: Even if there is only one distribution channel. In case of any error (in allocating organization units) it is recommended to correct errors before proceeding with further IMG activity. Shipping condition problem IMG/LE/Shipping/Define_Shipping_condition_by_sales_doc_type select sales doc type [ZOR] & enter SC 01.

o o Basic data 2 • DG dangerous goods [ not reqd. • • Select Organisational Levels [top butt] for Sorg.not required do not enter 68 by Lawrence Rebello . Year has to be closed under MM. etc) Change number: Creating a material with a ‘change number’ allows SAP to Make changes effective from a date or on some parameter (eg serial no) Keep log and documentation of changes made. etc) and Material type (eg raw mat.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling SAP/Logistics/Material Management/Material • Create general MM01 immediately / MM11 schedule  o Note: Use OMSY for cur yr dates. Pharma. kg meter. so that year can be current etc. spare parts. may cause probs ] Classification .t Industry type (eg FMCG. delivery process required or not say. click FERT & select the screens you want.r. net wt. In case all screens do not come up for MM01. LogGen/MatlMaster/BasicSettings/MatlTypes/Define Attributes of Matl Types. services. Create General (Material) MM01 [SAP Menu > Logistics > Material Management > Material Master > Material] • •   • • • Material is created w. Required views (for master data entry) can be selected for each material created based on their industry & material type. etc to group mat/services with similar attributes (01) Product division Item category defined for sales doc processing (Item category is defined to determine whether a sales activity is distr channel dependent. To change dates. DC. finished goods.NORM Important minimum settings: Basic Data 1: Base Unit of Measurement Material Group (defined earlier) Division GenItmCatGrp gram. etc. DO NOT TOUCH WH. packing dependent. services. etc. LogGen/MatlMaster/Tools/Initialise_Period MMPI / MMPV. that don’t require delivery processing. but if entered. Define NORM here) Weight specifications gross wt. A Material can also be copied from some other existing material. Material is created specific to a Plant & Storage Location. weight unit. etc.Div Select views & data : screens o Basic data 1 • Base unit G • Division • Matl group [with & without tax] • Gross wt • Net wt • Wt unit • Gen Item Cat Group .

it asks to define 1 EA = n UoM) o o Sales org 2 • Gen Item Cat Group – NORM Sales general / plant • Shipping data 0001 on pallets • Availability check 02 Individual Requirements. as defined above) (on exiting this screen.)  Note: “Sales : General/Plant” data is also relevant for sales & distribution but is valid for respective delivering Plant. etc (come auto. SAP gives a message as foreign goods require some certificate as per IMPEX procs) o o Sales Text . gross wt. etc 01 (come auto.n/a MRP1 [mat requirement plan] • MRP proc PD/ND • MRP controller 001 • Lot size DY [dynamic] • Ordering Costs 100 • Storage Costs Indicator 1 MRP1 (Material Requirement Planning) MRP type Lot size MRP Controller Ordering cost PD (activates MRP) DY (dynamic) group responsible for MRP as desired 69 by Lawrence Rebello . as defined above) EA (each). as defined above) Product Div (come auto. net wt Transportation Group Loading Group comes auto (as defined above) 0001 (on pallets) 0001 (on crane) (specific transportation and loading requirement group that can be allocated to many materials must have been defined earlier. Sales–Gen / Plant: Availability check 01 (individual requirement) (this function specify SAP whether and how to check mat availability and generate requirement for Material Planning) Base UoM. DZ (dozen).FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Sales org 1 • Base unit G • Sales unit EA [on exit define EA=nG] • Division Sales Org 1: Base UoM Division Sales Unit Material Group gm. o Foreign trade export • Country of origin IN • Region 10 Karnataka [o/w while saving a message reg foreign goods] Foreign Trade Export Country of origin Region of origin(optional) Country from where material is bought Region of country (as mentioned above) (in case of national goods if this is not defined.

forecast requirements Periodic indicator M monthly Availability check 02 Indl requests Pl conv factor 1 PL Plant [only if reqd] Period Indicator Availability check Planning conv factor M (monthly) 02 (comes auto.000 ]. S – Seasonal fluctuation.Both trend & seasonal fluctuation) o o o o o o o o Quality management n/a Forecasting • Historical periods 60 • Forecasts 12 • Forecast model D constant • Control data initialization X [by system] • Tracking limit [ 4.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o MRP2 • Proc type X inhouse. analytical model [ 2 ] Work scheduling n/a Plant data/storage1 n/a Plant data/storage2 n/a Warehouse mgmt 1 [do not configure] Warehouse mgmt 2 [do not configure] Accounting1 • Currency INR • Cost price xxxx • Cur period 03 1998 • Current valuation  BLANK • Valuation class 7920 [for finished goods FERT] 70 by Lawrence Rebello . 100 g = 1 kg. F-external. external prodn. A. both etc • Schedule Margin Key 000 • [Message of 0 prodn inhouse is ok. M(manual) amount by which forecast may deviate used to initialize forecast based on a model (T – Trend. etc MRP3 (period in which material’s consumption values and forecast values are managed) (if there is a difference in UoM in present material and UoM of MRP) o MRP4 n/a MRP4 Forecast model Historical periods Forecast period Initialization Tracking limit Model selection Selection Procedure (1 – SAP will look for trends/seasonal fluctuations first and then use a relating forecast model. 2 – use all forecast model) D (constant) any (past periods used for forecasting) any (future periods for forecasting) X (by system).] MRP2 Procurement type Schedule margin key X (E-inhouse. as defined above) eg. X-both etc) 000 (key that determine the float required for scheduling an order) o MRP3 • • • .

as defined above) 7920 (for Finished Goods) S (standard cost) – used to value inventory as desired 7920 (standard cost) 7920 (standard cost) (will not be allowed if ‘valuation category’ in the same screen is selected)   Note: With the above minimum settings.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • • • • • Price control S std price [will not be allowed if valuation category in general data is filled up] Price unit 1 moving avg price Prev period 02 1998 Total stock. as defined above) 01 (come auto. Note: Data other than specifically mentioned above are also relevant and valid for respective ……………………… organizational units. total value Valuation class 7920 [if left blank. as defined above) INR (come auto. MB1C error] Prod stk val class 7920 VC Stock val 7920 Accounting 1 Base UoM Currency Current period Division Valuation Class Price control Standard price Valuation class for Sales order Valuation class for Projected stock g (come auto. • o Accounting 2 plant stock o Costing 1 n/a o Costing 2 n/a SAP/Logistics/MaterialManagement/InventoryManagement/Environment o Stock MMBE check stock 71 by Lawrence Rebello . a F/G material can be created.

& entered the co code data. and not co code. [VD01 – sales areas. unlimited tolerance • Billing document o Inv date 99 [intl] o Inco terms EXW WORKS o Payment terms 0001 Immediate • Acct assignment group 01 domestic revenues SAP/Logistics/SD/MasterData/Agreement/CustomerMaterialInformation • VD51 create [ to substitute technical material with brand name.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling SAP/Logistics/SD/MasterData/BusPartners/Customers/Create o VD01 S&D • On selection SOLD TO PARTY . VD51 will work after VD01] • Create Customer Material Info Record VD51 [SAP Menu > Logistics > SD > Master Data > Agreements > Customer Material Information] Any material with a technical name (as created under MM01) can be substituted with a “brand name”  Note: VD51 will work only after a customer has been created. XD01 all areas] • Shipping point .Screens • General data • Recon a/c 140000 • Trans payment 0001 • Sales area data. BP. bill to. group etc • Address • Control data • Marketing • Unloading points • Export data • Contact persons • Partner Functions [ enter SP. as the above are linked to a sales area. PY. sales office. payer & ship to with number INTERNAL ] You should have already created a customer under FD01. 72 by Lawrence Rebello . SH as sold to party.only complete delinery.

For simplicity sake. 73 by Lawrence Rebello . and KOFK will be assigned “2” i. under ‘requirement’ field. without CO Acct assignment. with CO Acct assignment. one ‘alphanumeric’ key can be defined which can have upto ‘two’ characters and a description. (this 2 & 3 must have been defined earlier somewhere else. etc (FERT) (VERP). change . o o o Define dependencies for revenue a/c determination  Display. KOFI will be assigned “3” i. In case of each of these.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling INTEGRATION SALES & DISTRIBUTION WITH FI • IMG/SD/BasicFunctions/AcAssignment-Costing/Revenue A/c Determination o Check master data for Ac Assignment  Material AA group 01 trading groups [mfg].field catalogue [ N/A ] Define access sequence & a/c determination types  Maintain access sequences • KOFI A/c determination • KOFR Define A/c determination types  KOFI  KOFR Define Access sequence and Account determination types Maintain Access sequences for Account determination: SAP standard Access sequence for Account determination is available with key “KOFI”.) Note: Both KOFI & KOFK shall be within same step sequenced by ‘counter’ 1 & 2.e.foreign. create. Note: In Account determination procedure. etc make sure that account group keys are entered in the Material master and Customer master record. • • Revenue accounts have been sub-divided into FI and CO. hence account groups have to be defined in co-ordination with FI & CO. affiliated [CC] INTEGRATION OF SALES & DISTRIBUTION (SD) WITH FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (FI) IMG > SD > Basic Function > Account Assignment / Costing > Revenue Account Determination Check Master data for Account assignment (Revenue Determination) Material Account Assignment group & Customer Account Assignment group: • SAP uses this parameter (group) when creating an accounting document from a billing (sales) document. Define Account determination type: Here condition types can be defined to be used by Access sequences (as defined above). Example Account groups can be: Material 01 02 Customer 01 02 • Finished Products Packaging material Domestic Revenues Foreign Revenues. 02 performances [ser]  Customers AA group domestic.e. define a condition type “KOFI” (Account determination with CO) & “KOFK” (Account determination with CO) and assign it the access sequence KOFI (SAP standard – as defined above).

MWS Discount/Taxes Assign GL A/c’s [ create for 005 ] [ VKOA ]  001 cust grp/mat grp/A/c key  Application V  Condition KOFI  COA HPCL  S ORG HPCL  A/c Key Assign G/L Accounts Common combination of Application V. etc) for which a corresponding account determination is to be carried out. In standard SAP settings. EWS. Credit Memo. 002 003 004 005 Cust Grp / Acct key Mat Grp / Acct key General Acct Key • • ON THE FA SIDE IMG/FA/GLA/BT/Integrate/S&D [ VKOA ] o Prepare revenue a/c determination [same as SD 001.4] o Carryout document summarization for sales & distribution 74 by Lawrence Rebello . ERS.3. Combination Table Description varies only on cust grp. link the condition types (determination types) to the respective G/L accounts.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Define and assign A/c determination procedures  Billing Type F2 . SAP standard procedure is available with key “KOFI00”.2. when assigned. SAP standard accounting keys are: ERF freight revenues ERL revenues ERS sales deductions EVV cash settlement MWS sales tax o o Assign A/cing key  ZWMP01 ERL Revenue. Sales Org 0001 are common in all these tables. o Define & assign a/c keys  ERL. Assign Account determination procedure: Procedure (defined above) is allocated to ‘Billing types’ (eg Invoice.Proc KOFI00  Control Data KOFI 3 / KOFK 2  Cash Allocation A/c Key EVV cash clearing Define and Assign Account determination Procedure Define Account determination procedure: Here a procedure is defined which SAP uses to check the sequence (steps) in which ‘determination types’ (as defined above) are to be used for revenue determination. mat grp and acct 001 Cust Grp / Mat Grp / Acct key key. MWS Define and Assign Accounting keys Accounting keys. where a account must be assigned : Accounts INT. 5 types of tables contain different combinations for SD interface with FI Chart of relevant G/L Cond type for Acct determn KOFI. These are defined in co-ordination with FI.

base amount Header > Pricing procedure > Customer Pricing Procedure Customer Pricing Procedure 1 2 Standard Standard incl Sales tax OVKP 75 by Lawrence Rebello .   Note: WMP001 does not have any condition type for discounts and other considerations (which are mainly defined and populated in SD) which can of course be added but for simplicity sake.  Note: It is recommended that copy be made by prefixing ‘Z’ to the original procedure.e. MWS TAX. dbl click qty / conditions / analysis. yet if a different procedure has to be created. exclusive.e. In FICO all taxes are incl]In case you want to analyse why taxes not calc.pricing porceedure copy from WMP001 to ZWMP01 o Customer pricing procedure 1 std. Tax on Net i. an existing procedure can be copied and changes be made via condition types to suite the requirement in hand.e.maintain pricing o Header . SAP standard pricing procedure for Product Catalogue is WMP001 which (incorporates taxes in pricing) but it has condition type MWST i. populating and assigning pricing procedure in one screen only (by header menus). ERS Discount PRICING PROCEDURE  Note: An old version transaction code VOK0 is quite useful. Note: For taxes. as it displays all functions related to defining. condition MWST must have Reqt 10 [plant is set] & at AltCBV 16 [net value – this makes tax on net value i.e. County can be set at plant & customer a/c. In case VFX3 reports that a taxcode SA etc is missing.for Access No 8 [Departure Country/ Destination Country] Requirement 8 [Export business exclusive on] and condition type MWST [VOK0 / VK11] created for taxcode A1. we will proceed with simple ‘base amount’ and ‘taxes’ only (which have been defined and populated in FI). Tax Probs SD/Basci Func/Taxes/Plants Abroad/Assign GL Ac to Ac Key / goto table …………………………… 005 AppliCondType COA Sorg Act Key GL A/c …………V KOFI HPCL HPCL MWS 175000 Regionwise taxes possible thru county code. the same can be created in FA Global. check the following setting: Reqt Alt Cond Base Value 10 16 i. so that taxes are calculated. o A/c keys ERL Revenue. Header > pricing procedure Define Pricing procedure V/08 SAP has standard pricing procedures for many a cases.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling PRICING PROCEEDURE • VOK0 .Tax probs VOK0 / Acc Seq MWST . 2 std+tax Condition Type MWST as under : Cond Class Calc type Cond Cat Rounding rule Manual entries Group cond Header cond Item cond Text det proc D A D BLANK Blank On On On Taxes Access sequence Plus /minus MWST A Amount/perc Text id On 0001 o SD does not generate taxes.e. which we will copy to ZWMP001 and incorporate various condition types for excise duties and sales taxes that we defined in FI. – in MWST add condition thru VK11 – in ZWMP01. only I/O taxes. but MWST does not support it. Plant is Set i. analyse at VA01. You may have to explore USTX etc.

Distr chl.from / to Condition must exist for a particular material to process sales order. As we have defined our condition types (JT1. sale price  Unit i. etc) and access sequence (TAXINM) ourselves.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Header . there is table for each condition “Create Condition Tables” besides the “Define Condition Types” function. JT2. INR  Per i.e. 76 by Lawrence Rebello .environment / maintain condition / create [TC-VK11]  Enter condition type  Select material with release status  Material  Rate i. 1  UOM ie EA  Calc Type i. the latter being same as in FI).pricing procedure/proc determination  Ensure co has the relevant pricing procedure ZWMP01 Header .e. enter material name and other relevant detail.condition type / Access sequence  Accesses  Fields Header . Div) Header > Environment > Condition > create/change Associating Material with condition type VK11 OVKK Enter condition type. validity from/to. Header > Pricing Procedure > Procedure determination Assign Pricing procedure to Sales Area (a comb of SO. it has to be ensured that the condition types and access sequence and all relevant Account keys are made available in SD also. Header > Condition Types > Condition types & Access sequences Maintain Condition Types and Access Sequences V/06 & V/07 Normally SAP standard condition types and Access sequences (say MWST) will be available in both FI & SD (in SD. select Material with release status.condition type / definition  Copy from PR00 to ZPR0 B C Blank Blank B On On C A On Price Access sequence Plus /minus PR02 Blank Condition Type ZPRO as under : Cond Class Calc type Cond Cat Rounding rule Manual entries Header cond Item cond Scale basis Check value Qty conversion Text det proc Amount/perc Pricproc Pricing date Text id On Zwmp01 Blank 0001 o o o  Set entries from Manual priority to Auto priority Header .e.e. Populate the pricing procedure with relevant condition types and accounting keys. C Qty  Valid . Condition must exist for a particular tax code at the country and domestic business level for correct taxes.

enter relevant a/c’s manually for procedures UMB. from the date of initializing till date) for the concerned material which might be existing in the system. Initialize Open periods Initializes open period for material posting which had earlier been closed.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling INITIAL STOCK ENTRY SAP/Logisticsl/MM/InvMgmt/GoodsMovement/GoodsReceipt/Other • MB1C .561 Proc PK A/c Dr PK A/c Cr UMB gain/loss reval 83 232500 93 282500 D/C.70. V/C GBB offsetting entry BSA 81 799999 91 799999 D/C. Use MMPV & close period by period.GBB etc MB1C – FERT – 7920 . OMSY MMBE MMPI / MMPV  Note: This function would delete all future records (i. PRD. Reason FERT is not defined for updating in IMG/CO/PCC/PCPlanning/Mat_cost_estimate_with_qty_stru/ Settings_for_qty_stru_control/Material_data/Check_attributes_of_mat_types/ select matl & left Qty/Value updating & FERT  You may have to incorporate valuation group OMWD A/c determination . etc data. G/M. BSX. consumption. Initial stock entry [DO NOT COPY WH. V/C VAX 81 893010 91 893010    77 by Lawrence Rebello .e.configure auto postings [use options/simulation/input mode] If a/c’s are blank.e. Material Management view on Co codes Displays open period for material posting for a company code. entry into unrestricted use Check Stock Displays an overview of stock.MM/Valu&A/cAssignment/A/cDeter/Wizard [ not recommended ] A/c deter w/out wizard . V/C BSX inv posting 89 792000 99 792000 V/C PRD cost price diff PRA 86 231500 96 281500 D/C..create initial stock of material o Movement type 561 o Entry into unrestricted use o Doc date posting date • Stock MMBE check stock • IMG/FA/Global/Document/PostingPeriods/Open&ClosePP o OMSY material management on co codes o MMPI to initiallise posting periods [for materials] o MMPI does not work in 4. balance. DATA ENTRY – Initial Stock [SAP Menu > Logistics > MM > Inventory Management > Goods Movement > Goods Receipt ] Enter other Goods : Initial Stock Activity: Movement Type 561 MB1C i. OR DEFINE IT FOR MM01] Sometimes MB1C gives an error – product class FERT does not exist / consistent etc. G/M.

dbl click qty / conditions / analysis. Sales order is first created with open status (ZMIL).FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling SALES ORDER & BILLING • SAP/LOG/SD/SALES o VA01 . material & qty  Check Taxes [ Dbl Click Qty. etc ? ‘Check Taxes’ will show the taxes details (to ensure that condition types defined and populated is ok) ? Save Change Sales Order Display Sales Order VA02 VA03 78 by Lawrence Rebello . create from VD01 / in VA01 use create button. Standard order. analyse at VA01. & re enter the VA01. ensure BA assignment in all LG. SD.e.LE & complete data comparison under Log General. Type of Sales order (i. inco terms. dr/cr Memo. Enco terms. 3 display] sales order first created with open status [ ZMIL tc VOV8 ] [ F2 tc VOFA ]  Complete details of sold to party.In case of Business Area. Conditions]  Save o Sold to party does not exist – when customer was created under FD01. Sales Order ZMIL as under : SD Document Cat No range int assig No range ext assig Check division Probability Output Aplication Screeen sequence grp Incompletion Proc Transaction Grp Doc Pric Proc Delivery type Shipping conditions Dlv rel billing type Order rel billing type InterComp bill type C 01 02 2 100 V1 AU 11 0 A LF 01 F2 F2 IV Item no increment Sub item increment Item division Read info record Display Criteria Fcode for overw scr 10 10 On On UALL UER1 CndType line items Payment guar proc Payment card plan type Checking type Propose delivery date EK02 01 03 01 On SALES ORDER & BILLING [SAP Menu > Logistics > Sales & Distribution > Sales] Create Sales Order VA01 Sales Order is created with reference to a ‘sales area’. etc) option is there.Order [2 change. Activity: ? Details of Sold-to-Party. Create a new order type under IMG/SD/Sales/Sales_Documents/SDHeader/DefineSDTypes create newAssign sales area to SD Types IMG/Basic_Function/AA&Costing/AssignGLAccounts [140000. 140030 if former does not work]In case you want to analyse why taxes not calc.

go to conditions. goto conditions. VL01NO VL02N VL03N Create Outbound Delivery (without ref to Sales order) Change Outbound Delivery Display Outbound Delivery • • In case of PR00 missing error. 79 by Lawrence Rebello . Problems of shipping point / condition clear as above. OUTBOUND DELIVERY [SAP Menu > Logistics > Shipping & Transportation > Outbound Delivery] Create Outbound Delivery (with ref to Sales order) Activity: Enter storage Location and Pick Goods In Picking goods are locked for Customer Post Goods issue (FI & MM are affected after posting) VL01N   Note: In case of PR00 missing error.outbound delivery order [2 change. update and carryout new pricing. dbl click qty in the order. After delivery but before billing. Post goods issue [ MM & FI are affected ] MM01. SC 01 [std]. dbl click qty in the order. the price can be changed thru VA02 & carryout new pricing. 3 display] If storage loca not entered at o o o Enter storage location and pick the goods In picking the goods are blocked for a customer.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Shipping & Transportation/Outbound Delivery o VL01N . create thru a separate session. create thru a separate session. In case GL A/c 893010 not existing error. update and carryout new pricing. goto FS00 & create with reference. Note: After delivery but before billing. you have to enter it here. the price can be changed thru VA02 & carryout new pricing.

In case Acc Det Cash settlement is on. o Save o o o o In case of Foreign Trade Error : S&D/Foreign Trade Customs/Control Foreign Trade Data in MM & SD Documents /Import Screens in Purchasing Documents : HPCL Import Data should be BLANK. The delivery order comes up auto. In case it is unsuccessful.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • BILLING o VF01 create billing document. View the accounting entries. create the doc no range. 140000 is the normal reco a/c [img/s&d/basic functions/account assign costing/reco acct determination/assign GL a/c’s ][ OV64 ]. In case of wrong reco a/c. and ENSURE ONLY RECO A/C IS ON . and it will be posted in SD & FI Change Billing Document Display Billing Document VF02 VF03 VF01 80 by Lawrence Rebello .VOV8]. [ FBN1 ] In case of Billing problems – no a/c docs use VFX3 at SAP/LOG/SD/Billing/Billing Doc and release biling doc for a/cing by clicking flag 7 . a message will appear to go to notes at top header. save. In case of no doc no range. GoTo Billing doc type F2 [defined in img/s&d/sales/sales doc header/define sales doc[sales order] types . o VF02 the billing doc comes up auto. Using 140030 will stop postings to the Customer A/c. the posting will go to a GL a/c instead of a customer a/c. Use [img/s&d/billing/billing documents/define billing types] [ VOFA ]. F2 19 M 7 No Custo No LR S1 KOFI00 A KOFIAB Blank A00001 V10000 Blank RD00 FK FP 03 04 Billing Document F2 as under : Billing type No range int assig SD document category Transaction group Negative posting Branch/Head Office Cr memo w/val dt Invoice list type Cancellation type Account determ proc Doc pric proc Acc det rec acc Acc det cash set Acc det pay cards Output deter proc Item output proc Output type Header partners Item partners Text deter proc Text determ proc itm BILLING Item no increment Statistics mer/Payer/Branches Rel for rebate Blank On On Application V3 [SAP Menu > Logistics > Billing > Billing Document] Create Billing Document Delivery order comes up automatically. S&D/Foreign Trade Customs/Basic Data for Foreign Trade/Define Comodity Codes /Import Code Nos by Country : There should be no entry for IN.

Check  only material types in use & be careful when you uncheck a material type. o Select a/c postings o Maintain valuation classes . and a lot of other users will be affected] Account determination without wizard o Define valuation control [ OMWM ]  Group code active o Group together valuation areas  Val group code 0001 by Lawrence Rebello • 81 . & change later.finished goods. However some a/c postings like freight may not differ by material. You can setup two a/c’s. You make configurations relevant to transactions in Inventory Management & invoice verification [for automatic postings to GL a/c in Financial Accounting & Cost Accounting] o You do the above.start with the 1st incomplete transaction [no green mark] & work your way down. some process keys may have more than one a/c no. leave it blank.all plant or co codes in the same group will post identically o Examine different material types . Internal processing key BSX. This a/c is either dr or cr depending on whether then transactions or event requires a correction to your disadvantage [DR] or in your favour [CR]. so that a DR is posted to one & a CR to another.DO NOT COMPLETE [o/wise the wizard will auto a/c assign. you are assigning a/c nos to the internal process keys. BSX rules for dr/cr & a/c modifier is always set “OFF”. with/without the wizard or a combination of both o The wizard always reads the existing customization settings first. it would mean that even non – material types like freight are material type dependent. The process keys are :  Cost [price] differences PRD  Exp/rev from stock transfer AUM  Exp/inc from revaluation UMB  Offsetting entry for inventory postings GBB  Exp/rev from consignment mat consumption AKO o Maintain MM Transactions . o Maintain inventory accounts . If you are unsure of an a/c. material types o Select material type used FERT . Hence if you select ”Yes”.stock a/c nos to be filled up. By entering corresponding nos to each transaction for a material movement. o Maintain dr/cr rule : in MM there are transactions & events that may be posted to the Expenses/Revenue a/c or to Price Differences. These are displayed as defaults & form the basis for further adjustments.ideally you should have one valuation class per material type. you cannot post to that material type. BSX rule for valuation is always set “ON”. in this case the wizard takes you to a detail screen.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling INTEGRATION MATERIALS MANAGEMENT • IMG/MM/Valuation & A/c Assignment o A/c determination wizard [DO NOT COMPLETE]. o Activate purchase a/c mgmt Y/N o Activate purchase a/c mgmt for co codes o Assign chart of accounts o Assign plants to groups . plant. Depending on its rules. Checking a checkbox  will set the DR/CR rule “ON” for the corresponding internal process key.SAP assumes that inventory related a/c’s will differ by material type. o Pre-requisites co code. o Final Screen . If a material type is unchecked.

WN] and invoice receipts [IR]. only one a/c doc is created. In std SAP config.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling •  Val area plant Define valuation classes  A/c category reference  Valuation class [ OMSK ]  Material type/A/c category reference [ OMS2 ] o Define A/c group for movement type  One complete table contains cols  Movement type  Special stock  Val update  Consumption  Val string  Counter  Tran event key  A/c modifier  Check up assignment Purchase a/c management o Activate purchase a/c in co code o Calculation of value for purchase a/c . invoice receipt etc]  OR • Purchase a/c DR • Freight a/c DR • To GR/IR clearing a/c • To Freight clearing a/c o Document 2 • Purchase offsetting a/c & • Stock/price diff a/c  Invoice receipt • Purchase a/c • To GR/IR clearing a/c / vendor a/c  For delivery costs • Freight a/c • To Freight clearing a/c You can use only 2 documents if the purchase a/c is posted at the receipt value. The doc type must be different from the doc type for goods receipt [GR. Assign a no range to the document  o o o o 82 by Lawrence Rebello .define a new doc type for the 2nd a/c doc. Create new doc type for separate doc . o/wise the difference between GR/IR clearing a/c and the purchase a/c would result in a balance not being equal to zero. Activate separate a/c doc in val area.whether receipted value of purchase with/without delivery costs o Separate a/cing documents for purchase a/c postings .define whether the system should create 2 separate FI docs for stock & purchase a/c postings or for invoice & purchase a/c postings  Goods receipt doc 1 • Purchase a/c DR • To GI/IR clearing a/c [goods inward.

MB0A & purchasing trans [beginning with ME* & ML*] You must also assign the new doc type for automatic movements. This includes all transactions that generate goods movements with reference to purchase orders i. 83 by Lawrence Rebello . MB01. MB04.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • o Configure no range for new doc type Inventory management o Assign a new doc type to inventory management trans. Invoice Verification o Configure Doc type for separate Purchasing a/c doc o Assign the new doc type to logistics invoice verification transactions.e.

depr key must be defined with ‘changeover method 3’. o o Specify description . Net Book value for depr changeover: SAP changes the method of depr once ‘net book value. you have to copy the reference chart of depreciation. • Copy reference chart of dep / dep areas [ EC08 ] Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation / Depreciation areas Chart of Depreciation The chart of depreciation is a list of depreciation areas arranged according to business and legal requirements. These charts of depreciation serve only as a reference for creating your own charts of depreciation. irrespective of its asset class. any asset below this value. IT dep etc  Real dep areais posted to GL. (double click and you get into the following parameters) Max value for LVA posting: If certain value is specified here.change desc Copy delete depreciation areas  Book dep. In this case. (but mandatory in France) Capitalize AuC w/o Down payments: While capitalizing an asset under construction. 84 by Lawrence Rebello .6c version is not available with country-India version for assets accounting. All country specific settings get assigned to the company. if this is selected. Post net book value: If this is selected SAP doesn’t post gain/loss on disposal of assets. ½ the value is considered for dep etc. will get posted to the LVA assets and not to their respective class. capitalize Auc. SAP ignores down payments made to the construction company. and are therefore not directly accessible in the SAP system.7 version is available with country-India settings.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling ASSET ACCOUNTING • Organisational Structure [ OA08 ] o Check country specific settings  LVA low value assets  AUC assets under construction Post net book value. When creating a chart of depreciation. SAP provides country-specific charts of depreciation with predefined depreciation areas. w/o downpayment ASSET ACCOUNTING IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Organizational Structure Check Country specific settings SAP has pre-configured Assets Accounting for most of the countries but 4. unlike IT dep which is not posted  Negative values in assets are allowed  Proportion of depreciation – if the divisor is 2. However 4. once the (SAP specific) Chart of Depreciation is assigned to the Company code. It is instead posted (for net book value of the asset) to ‘revenue clearing from asset sale’ – not used in India. The chart of depreciation enables you to manage all rules for the valuation of assets in a particular country or economic region. gets below this amount.

Depreciation area can be ‘real’ or ‘derived’. If this is done valuation can be done by main asset no which shall include data for all sub-nos irrespective of its location. ‘ABCD’ if configuring ABCD) must be assigned to the company code being configured. unless you want these control specs to be country specific i. same co code (i.g. tax depr. but other depr area can also be defined in any such ‘chart of depr’ so that values of one area can be taken over by other area. in G/L G/L real-time posted parameters in G/L etc. However if no such setting is desired.e.as proposed by system [ AS08 ] o Define asset classes .suffix for VA [value adjustment] is 010. Each depr area belongs to at least one ‘chart of depr’. → ‘Real’ depreciation area is which get posted to G/L accts and reflected in financial statements P&L a/c and B/S (book depr). 85 by Lawrence Rebello .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Double click are Post assets in No values for setting depr posted Only the Depreciation area is set up to handle depreciation for a particular purpose say. cost accounting depr. assets are created with ‘Main Asset No’ under which many assets are created with sub-numbers. book depr.as porposed by system o Define no ranges interval .e. COD dependent. It is possible to define ‘Main Asset No’ across various Company codes. accum dep is 2010 [199990 clg asset acqui] o Create screen layout rules . 01 15 20 Book Depreciation Tax Balance Sheet Cost Accounting Depreciation parameters: Book Depr Real depr area indicator on on (this indicator ‘on’ means SAP will store these values in database) Posting in G/L a/c indicator 1 0 Tax Depr Cost Acct Depr on 3 o o Assign COD to co code [ OAOB ] Specify number assignment across co codes [ AO11 ]  Use co code for assignment of no ranges Specify number assignment across Company Codes In SAP. Hence if Bldg = 2000.[ OAOA ] o Specify COD dependent screen layout / account assignment  Normally not reqd. • Asset Classes [ DO NOT COMPLETE ] o Generate asset classes from GL a/c’s  Select APC [acquisition & prodn costs]  Checking the APC indicator will generate an asset class  Enter default a/c’s for all a/c determinations [825000] o Specify A/c determination . statutory reporting (tax depr) or other internal management reporting purposes (cost accounting depr). For e. → Depreciation Areas ‘Derived’ depr area is one which derives its value form real depr and is used in cases where additional or special depreciation is allowed.

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Organizational Structure > Assets Classes Generate Assets Classes from G/L accounts (1 to 1) Here Asset classes are generated in a 1 to 1 relationship to G/L accounts. The system enters ‘Account determinations’, ‘Screen layout rules’ and ‘Number ranges’ in the asset class as control parameters.

 

Note: Carrying out this step is not mandatory. Generating Asset classes from G/L accounts is an optional step and can be used to simplify the creation of asset classes. Note: Alternatively, Asset classes can be defined or copied without the help of G/L accounts using the step “Define asset classes”. Copying classes is useful for adding to Asset classes, already generated from G/L accounts (using the current step). Additional account determinations, Screen layout controls and Number ranges, in case of alternative method, can be defined in the section “Organizational Structures”.

SAP supplies example asset classes. Activities: A Wizard guides through the 7 different navigation steps. Asset classes are not generated until saved.

Note: If a wizard is not run or any change is desired after it has run, next 4 IMG activities – ’specify account determination’, ‘create screen layout rules’, ‘define number range intervals’ and ‘define asset classes’ – assumes importance. Enter chart of accounts and the chart of depreciation. Whole list of G/L accounts appear, out of which G/L accounts that are APC (Acquisition and Production Costs) balance sheet accounts, i.e. Assets, are selected. SAP creates Assets classes (similar to the G/L a/c no in description), for those G/L accounts that are selected as APC accounts. (as in 7th step, asset class automatically appears) Enter G/L accounts for Expense-ordinary depreciation, and Asset retirements – revenue clearing, loss or gain for all account determinations. (In a later step however, one can change these accounts for each account determination). System asks for suffix for VA accounts (Value Adjustment i.e. depreciation accounts) ‘10’ will result in acc deprn as 11010 for asset class 11000.

(configuration in following steps are meant for Plant & Machinery) Step 1 Step 2

Step 3 Step 4

Note: The system prepares an account determination and corresponding accumulated depreciation for each APC account, with a description that is the same / similar to that of the given APC account. (as shown in the 4th step i.e. suffix for VA accounts) account determination accumulated depreciation 11000 (comes auto) 11010 (comes auto) G/L a/c is also 11000

Step 5

A number range interval is defined for each APC account. And one can change the number range intervals as needed: • • 01 Change the limits of the number ranges. Specify whether the assignment of the main asset number should be external or internal. 000000010000 000000019999 external - ‘off’


Step 6

Note: SAP recommends internal number assignment. However, one can define the number range intervals, for example, so that the first characters of the asset number agree with the first characters of the APC account number. The system creates a screen layout control for each APC account. Screen layout 1100

Note: When the APC account has a number that is at most 5 characters long, the system automatically assigns the account number as the key for the screen layout control. If the account number has more than 5 characters, the 5-character key for the screen layout control has to be entered manually. Field groups for optional entries can be entered in the asset class. Step 7 The system creates an asset class with the same name as each APC account. Here the following parameters are added to the asset classes:

• •

Asset Class 0 1 2 3

11000 (comes auto)

Specify type of the asset class without AuC / LVA / CLVA asset under construction low value asset collective low value assets

86

by

Lawrence Rebello

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

Specify the default depreciation key and the default useful life for each depreciation area. You can add to this information for more depreciation areas in a later step.

Note: The function for generating asset classes can be used more than once. The system uses the following logic when this function is used again:

• First, the system checks whether the company code is already in production status. If it is, then the system creates,

based on the selected G/L accounts selected, only asset classes, account determinations and so on that were not yet created. Any existing asset classes are not changed; nor are they deleted and created again. classes. If not, the system deletes the existing asset classes and generates them again. following options are available: ? ? ?

• If the company code is not yet in production, the system checks whether assets already exist for the existing asset • If assets do exist, the system checks if there are also transactions for the assets. If there are no transactions, the
Delete all asset classes and their assets, and generate them again Only add new asset classes If transactions exist for the assets, then you can only add new asset classes

Specify Account Determination

All these variables as defined in earlier steps now available for assignment Account determination determines the ‘reconciliation account’ in G/L ledger i.e. the G/L account to which a transaction for asset will be posted and also its off-setting entry.

 

it refers to.

Note: An asset class must have one Account determination. Normally it bears resemblance with the G/L account

Note: However an Account determination can be used by several asset class, if it uses the same chart of accounts and is posted to the same G/L account.

Activity: A name is given to the Account determination but no properties are given at this stage. Acct determn for Plant & Machinery (Asset class) Screen Layout for Master Record FSV are defined for ‘required’, ‘optional’ and ‘suppressed’ fields. Activity: A name is given to the screen layout but no properties are given at this stage. Screen Layout for Plant & Machinery Define Number Range Interval Here ‘main number’ range for Assets are defined. There is no separate range for sub-numbers, these can be internally or externally assigned. (same features as document no ranges, also see concepts stated in wizard stage) Activity: 01 000000010000 000000019999 external - ‘off’ Define Asset Classes If Asset classes were not generated earlier form G/L accounts, these can be defined here one by one. Activity: Define an Asset class Important settings: Account determination Screen layout Number Range External sub-number ‘no’ 11000 1100 01 SAP recommendation 11000 Plant & Machinery (double click to get inside settings) 1100 11000 G/L a/c is also 11000

87

by

Lawrence Rebello

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

ASSET A/C INTEGRATION WITH GENERAL LEDGER • Define how dep areas are posted to GL o 0 no values posted o 1 post assets in GL realtime o 2 post assets periodically to GL o 3 only depreciation posted
IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Integration with General Ledger Define how depreciation areas post to General Ledger Here G/L a/c posting indicator is set for each depreciation area defined. Parameters available are: 0 1 2 3 no values are posted in General Ledger post assets in General Ledger real-time post assets periodically in General Ledger only depreciation posted in General Ledger 1 3 post assets in General Ledger real-time 0 no values are posted in General Ledger only depreciation posted in General Ledger

Activity: Book Depreciation Tax Depreciation Cost Accounting Depreciation


Note: Book depreciation, earlier given parameter 1 i.e. post assets in General Ledger real-time, cannot be changed here while other depreciation areas can be given some other parameter, if desired.

Assign GL a/c’s o Choose an allocation – select COA, choose a/c allocation, select any one Acct Det o Define acquisition/retirement a/c’s for COA [dbl click desc]  Acquisition 11000 M/c & Equip  Contra A/c for acq 191400 clg acqui  Retirement Clg a/c 825000 Clg Asset Disp  Gain 820000 Rev Asset Ret  Loss 200000 Loss Asset Disp  Loss w/o Rev 200000 “ “ “ o Define depreciation accounts for COA [dbl click desc]  Ord Dep 11010 ADP M/c & Equip  Exp A/c 211130 Dep M/c & Equip
Assign G/L Accounts Here for each Account Determination defined earlier, G/L accounts are assigned for transactions relating to acquisition/production, retirement, and profit/loss on disposal of assets for each depreciation area. Activity: Account Determination Depreciation area 01 11000 Book Depreciation double click to get inside settings Define Acquisition & retirement accounts: Assign G/L accounts for “Acquisition account assignment” and “Retirement account assignment” Define Acquisition & retirement accounts: Depreciation area 01 Book Depreciation double click to get inside settings Assign G/L accounts for “Ordinary depreciation account assignment” and “Unplanned depreciation account assignment”

88

by

Lawrence Rebello

remaining dep spread evenly  Catchup . by Lawrence Rebello . • • • • Change FSV of the Asset GL a/c’s o Change FSV for posting keys  DR 40. Selection should be made along with correct ‘period interval’ i.e.70 must have reversal CR 50. etc in this IMG activity. Activity: double click each depr area to set intervals Depr area 01 15 Book Depreciation Tax Depreciation interval monthly yearly period bet interval (months) 1 12   89 Monthly calc is annual deprn / 12 Note: One can also assign depreciation to cost centers. monthly.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Specify posting key for asset posting o 70 DR 75 CR for asset posting o 40 DR 50 CR for GL a/c posting Specify posting keys for Asset posting Here keys for asset posting in Asset register as well as G/L accounts are defined. allow posting of imputed interest.specifies the key which identifies the B/S & P&L version. Posting depreciation to general ledger o Specify document types for posting of dep [AF] IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Integration with General Ledger > Post depreciation to General Ledger Specify document type for posting of Depreciation Define Document type: SAP has provided standard settings AF Specify doc type for posting of depreciation: Depreciation posting Assign AF to ABCD o Specify intervals and posting rule [dbl click desc]  Smoothen .e. Note the settings: Asset Management posting group Procedures (double click to set posting keys) Additional accounts for asset accounting Asset posting 75 G/L a/c posting from asset posting ANC ANS 40 ANL 40 ANL dr 50 70 50 cr Change Field Status Variant of the Asset G/L accounts Mainly standard settings (posting keys) and those which have already been defined earlier (assignment of FSV to Company code). of periods between two consecutive depreciation posting.75 for GL & Assets Assign input tax indicators for Non-Taxable Acquisitions : Input tax & Output Tax [ OBCL ] Specify Fin Stat Version for Asset Reporting . However changes required specific to asset accounts can be made here regarding ‘required’. half-yearly or yearly for each depreciation area.period interval 001 i.arrears of dep updated  Monthly . ‘optional’ or ‘suppressed’ fields. no of periods between 2 dep runs Specify Intervals and posting rules Here intervals for depreciation posting is defined i. no. revaluation.e.

Therefore no transfer is possible to area 01.e.e. Book Depreciation area as standard for other depreciation area (all real depr areas) i. o Specify transfer of APC values In SAP asset values of one depr area can be used by other areas.   Note: ‘Ref depr area’ must be smaller that the ‘dependent depr area’. Note: ‘Ref area’ for 01 i.e. dep after useful life VALUATION • Specify COD [ OAPL ] • Depreciation areas o Define depreciation areas . Specify transfer of depreciation terms [similar to transfer of APC values] Specify transfer of Depreciation terms Similar to above.   • Note: Some other depr area can be made ‘base depr area’ in this IMG activity. SAP has defined 01 i.revaluation of APC [acquisition & prodn costs] & dep [ [when planned life ends] i.e.01 Book Dep IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Valuation > Depreciation area Define Depreciation areas and area type SAP standard settings are available: Depr area 01Book Depreciation 15Tax Depreciation 20Cost Acct Depreciation 01 03 07 Area type valuation for trade B/S valuation for tax B/S cost account valuation • Specify area types  01 Valuation for trade balance sheet Specify transfer of APC values / valuation adoption from another dep area.imputed interest in addition to depreciation  Post revaluation .as per asser master record Other posting settings  Post interest . 90 by Lawrence Rebello . hierarchy is maintained i. and in such a case. Any change in reference depr area will not automatically be updated in dependent depr area unless “identical” is kept ‘on’.e.e. A dep area can only adopt values from an area which has a smaller key than itself. one need not / cannot maintain depreciation terms other than that of reference area in asset master record. depreciation keys. etc) of one depr area can also be used by other depr areas. depreciation terms (i. Note: ‘Ref area’ for 01 i.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o o Co account assignment  Assign cost centers – for dep posting  Post to internal order . Book Depreciation area is ‘00’ and is not open to be changed. all other areas derive their Asset B/S values (APC values) from depr area 01. useful life. 03 can adopt values from 01 and not vice versa.e. Book Depreciation area is ‘00’ and is not open to be changed. Only exceptions are – derived depr areas and areas for revaluation & investment support.

SAP normally comes with standard settings for country specific requirements. of months in case of fractional life DG30 years over which assets under this class are to be depreciated Plant & Machinery Book Depreciation if this is ‘on’. LVA check . Minimum / Maximum life Life period Useful Life (wherever used) Depreciation key  • Note: ‘Useful Life’ is a mandatory field (irrespective of FSVs) except when depreciation key is 0000.e. SAP checks value of each asset in this class for max LVA 2 collective management i. Therefore.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Determine Depreciation areas in the Asset Class o Select asset class & depreciation area o Depreciation key o Use – useful life o Per .useful life periods [if useful life = 7.0 no max amount check o 1 value based max amount check o 2 check max amount with quantity IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Valuation > Amount specification (Company code / Depreciation area) Specify maximum amount for low-value assets Specify LVA classes: Here each Asset Class is assigned a LVA parameter. Note the settings: 0 no maximum amount check 1 individual management i. new assets can’t be created in this class.e. the assets in an asset class use the same depreciation terms (depreciation key. Note the settings: Asset Class Depr Area Ch of Depr only negative value LVA check 11000 01 off off 0 1 2 no maximum amount check value based maximum amount check quantity based maximum amount check assets with min life below this level are not allowed in t his asset class no. SAP needs it to calculate depreciation. 91 by Lawrence Rebello .index series for replacement values o Layout . one can put very high value say.screen layout Determine Depreciation Area in Asset Class Generally. useful life). you do not have to maintain the depreciation terms in the asset master record. 100 years in this field. However if some depreciation method is used which is independent of the useful life. periods = 6] o Index . Instead. they can be default values from the asset class. several LVA assets are grouped and compared with the max LVA amount Specify amount for LVA: Maximum amount for LVA is defined for each depreciation area.

10 = co code currency Group Assets o Specify dep areas for group assets .choose a FY o Period .normally for all periods dep is equal.indicator can be set for UNEQUAL depreciation. for financial statements to reflect true operational performance.remember to complete reco a/c’s [next scr] o Create an asset – sap/ac/fa/fixed assets/asset/create AS01 [AW01N . • • • • Define weighting of periods o Specify areas for individual period weighting . only it is weighted in active months only. but if a value is entered for this period dep = relative wt / total weights Currencies o Define dep areas for foreign currencies o Specify the use of parallel currencies . upto which dep is calculated o WT prop .e.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • • Amount specifications [value based check] o Specify max amount for LVA & asset class o Specify rounding off of Net Book Value & Dep . it is generally necessary to reduce dep in proportion to the reduction in the length of the fiscal year. Reqd only in exceptional situations Shortened Fiscal Years -Define reduction rules for shortened FY for ordinary & spl dep.after which dep is calculated or incase of retirement. interest & revaluation.leave blank  Allocation .a value exists even though the planned expected useful life has already been exceeded Fiscal year o FYV .net book value at year end rounded off to whole o Specify changeover amount – for changeover to the key defined in the dep key o Specify memo value for Dep areas . 15 days IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Valuation > Fiscal Year Use of half months in Company Code Using this function.specify other version on Dep area level. qty  Time dependent . one can calculate depreciation in these company codes on the basis of half months or half periods.mid month . This option is mainly exercised for management analysis purposes and not for statutory compliance purposes.weight proportion . where assets are only used for part of an year and hence depreciation needs to be accounted for in those active period only. a requirement in seasonal industries.asset class  General . because in a shortened FY.date which specifies the middle of a period i.indicator for managing group assets o Specify asset classes for group assets .evaluation [components] 92 by Lawrence Rebello . o Weight periods in FY version . Define weighting of periods This options can be used in case of seasonal industry. sr no. [Maintain Dep Key – refer DEP/Val Methods/Dep Key] Use of half months in the co code .asset explorer]  AS01 .description. Depreciation is still taken for whole year.indicator – class entirely consists of group assets Go to SAP menu o Create a vendor FK01 . Half months can only be used with calendar fiscal year versions.

periods.for clearing payment to vendor [after entering asset entries as above. 113100 & save the asset first before bank entry. Business area entry essential if defined] • 93 by Lawrence Rebello . enter the bank entry & process open items][It is advisable to enter 50. and no vendor/taxes will be calculated.] • ABZON .acquisition with automatic offsetting entry [could be used for uploading asset w/out vendor][MULTIPLE ASSETS ALSO POSSIBLE. If not previous open items must exist to process the bank entry. so that an open item appears for the vendor. The asset must have been created. useful life. lease payments  Dep areas . op dep start – date if not no dep calc SAP/Fixed assets/postings/acquisitions  External acquisitions • F-90 with vendor o Posting key 31 CR vendor 70 DR asset o Tran type for 70 is 100 ext asset acquisition • F-91 clearing offsetting entry . made up of smaller assets  Origin – country. base value.dep key.part of a big asset. vendor etc  Leasing – type.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Integration of assets & equipment o Equipment no . Provision for existing/new asset.

Based on the useful life. G/L accounts are defined for Chart of Accounts / Account determination (Asset Class) / Depreciation area.% from remaining life calculated from depr conversion date) : Reduce useful life at FY end Treatment of end of depreciation Depr after planned life end Depr below NBValue zero Curb ‘yes’ ‘no’ continue depr even after end of useful life if ‘on’. depr is calculated at rate 1/extended life for each extended year after the useful life has expired.choose a/c allocation & a/c determination o Define unit of prodn [UOP]  STCK default UOP . ordinary depreciation is selected with “negative and zero values allowed” (double click depr area). Settings (0008 . of units produced in each FY. Can only be selected if ‘depr after plnd life’ is on.total units are for the whole year. IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Depreciation > Valuation Methods > Depreciation Key > Calculation Method Define Base Methods SAP standards (0001 – 0031) are available and sufficient to be used. Also +ve or –ve sign is allowed for each depreciation area. After changing key. G/L a/c for Accumulated depreciation (B/S) G/L a/c for Depreciation expense (P&L a/c) Define Unit of Production Depreciation If useful life of any asset is more dependent on the no.e. In AW01N to see dep of 2nd year “comparisons”. so that the system does not calculate depr.values should be –ve or 0 o Assign a/c’s . and therefore no errors. of units produced. 0008 is used. remember to activate. After changing key. remember to activate. depreciation can be calculated based on no. 12=1/12 etc] • For multilevel base method choose EXPLICIT [0012] method. • Valuation Methods o Dep key . For more than 1 year. system reduces useful life so that it always coincides with the end of Fiscal Year  Note: For multilevel base method choose EXPLICIT [0012] method. define units for all the years.calculation methods  Define base methods [normally 0008] • Reduce useful life at FY end • Dep with curb NO [if yes. Normally. ‘off’ if ‘on’.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling DEPRECIATION • Ordinary Depreciation o Determine dep areas . In AW01N to see depr of 2nd year “comparisons”. Assign G/L Accounts In this step. dep/yr is calculated & then broken up in a year based on UOP. else at the same rate i. after useful life of 10 years. In normal procedure.  Period unit .  Define declining bal methods 94 by Lawrence Rebello . units is defined in this activity for the asset concerned. if total no. 1/useful life. IMG > FA > Asset Accounting > Depreciation > Ordinary Depreciation Determine depreciation areas Here depreciation areas are selected for ordinary depreciation.units produced in a period – month. 11=1/11. continue depr even after NBV is zero ‘no’ if ‘on’.

‘x’   • Define max amount .will override factor above Min % age . this settings: factor is ignored by the system method declining factor 001 say.g 004  10. From start of dep 2.specify max amounts Define multi level methods – validity start options 1 From capitalization date 2 From ord dep start date  3 From spl dep start date 4 From orig acqui date of AuC 5 From changeover year • Select levels • Acqui year .%age of acquisition value at which system changes the calc of dep Maintain Period control methods o Acq – period control used for acquiring transactions in year of capitalization. there should be a changeover method/phase that is relevant.change method to a different phase • 0 . The system multiplies the depreciation percentage rate resulting from the total useful life by this factor. Set this indicator to determine the periodic dep %age. However if max rate is defined.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Declining factor – dep % resulting from useful life etc X factor for DB dep The multiplication factor is used in determining the depreciation percentage rate for declining-balance depreciation.no of years 2. • Reduct . o Add .retirement 95 by Lawrence Rebello .keep as 0 Normally kept zero maximum % 25 minimum % 0 • • Define Declining BalanceSystem uses the factor defined here to method calculate declining balance dep rate.C/o when SLD high • 5 .C/o at end of useful life changeover %age rate . 1st 2 them 3] • Per .reduction of base value by an entered %age rate • Dep by fiscal year = Yes [if checked] • For every level/phase.no auto changeover • 1 .validity periods in cal months • Rem Life .e.5 [i. based on the remaining life.upto which valid • Year .000/2. Changeover after end of useful life Change methods . To change useful life USE AS02 • Phases e. Changeover within planned life 3.leave blank.500 as 1/2/3 below 1.period control for additions or subsequent transactions o Ret . Max % age .000/5.

Phase . Select co code & enter valid upto. when net book value reaches a particular level  1 1 c/over when SL dep is hich  2 5 c/over after end of useful life  3 Period control  Maintain Period control • Enter & select – individual period version will be  in pro rata at period start date  Define calender assignments .transfer postings Values  01 Pro rata start date  02 Pro rata upto mid period  03 Pro rata at mid period  04 First yr half dep value  05 Year start date [Austria]  06 At start of year  07 at mid year  08 at end of year Maintain dep key  Select dep key and go to assignments of calculation methods.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o o Trn .specify period  Define time dependent period controls • Define dep keys with T/D period control o Assign T/D period control to dep keys.changeover to a different phase when SL dep is high.0/30%/0%  2 001 0/0/0  3 001 0/0/0 • Prd cont period control  1 002 04/06/02/02  2 003 01/06/02/02  3 003 01/06/02/02 • Multi level method  1 002 0%  2 001 0%  3 003 APC any life • Change method .the duration of dep is divided into different phases  1 from start of dep  2 changeover within planned life  3 changeover after end of useful life • Base method of calculating dep  1 0007 ord % after end of life  2 0011 ord % from useful life  3 0017 ord imm dep after end of life • Decl method of calculating dep  1 004 3. addl acq. DG30 VWDV thru copy [activate] • Assignment of calculation methods [left] • Phases . retirement & transfer 96 by Lawrence Rebello . period control key for acq.

The a/c’s are at assign a/c’s above. master data] o Retirement with revenue  F-92 with customer [01 DR select customer TT 260  Posting key 50 CR a/c 825000 TT 260 ]  Click asset retirement curr yr Ret & enter on screen to go to next screen.if gain/loss posting is on. it goes to the GL a/c • IMG/FA/AA/Trans/Retirements/Define TT for Retirement • Select TT. Integration AA with PM . the same are posted to the GL & not kept in the asset concerned. an asset has to be created to hold such gain/loss.you specify for asset class. whether auto equipment records [PM] be created. o Gain / Loss Posting . [new asset. complete asset no & enter text. Transactions • Acquisitions o Define transaction types for acquisitions • Define transaction types for acquisitions • Limit TT [displayed] to dep areas o Define A/c assignment category for Asset PO o Specify asset class for clearing asset from PO o Assign A/c’s o Allow downpayment TT in asset class o Define validations • Retirements o For taxes create ET [exempted tax]. Tax will then not be calculated at retirement. & whether both get updated simultaneously.plant maintenance • Master data o Automatic creation of equipment master records o Specify conditions for synchronization of master data . details & gain/loss  [off] o Assign a/c’s . If it is kept off. Header doc display for a/c entries  ABAON asset sale w/o customer o Asset  AS01 create Asset  AW01N explorer to check posting in Dep posted / planned [green button posted period]  S_ALR_87012347 doc extract to check entries  ABST a/c reco for AA/GL diff  Info system for asset balances • SAP periodic processing o SCMA schedule manager  Create a task list [top header/tasklist/create] 97 by Lawrence Rebello .where a/c’s are assigned for gain/loss. SAP/A/c/FA/Fixed Assets • Posting o Acquisitions  F-90 with vendor  F-91 clearing offsetting entry  ABZON acq/with auto offsetting entry.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling  Generate period controls o Enter FYV & calender yr & generate. update GL thru FS00 to accept all taxes.

} AFAB execute . and view the spool through own spool requests. program/transaction. because batch input in  ON in document type AF [dep posting]. go top program & execute in background F9 LP01 Enter AUTHORISATION [ USER ] Click immediate Save [RABUCH00_FIU] System/Services/jJobOverview/execute [SM37] System/Services/Batch input/sessions/process. title & enter • Click immediate & save • Background job is scheduled • System/Services/jJobOverview/execute [sm37] • Click jobname & view spool [xxx] Depreciation Run { Depreciation run is supposed to generate a session. If it is set off. No need for any special params.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling            • Enter name of task • Enter desc. Go by defaults. start time etc Select task & execute IN BACKGROUND [TOP HEADER] • Enter output device [LP01]. the posting will take place.has to be executed period by period Choose period. calender etc & save • Tasklist appears in the tasklist Change task list [top] • Right click on task list • Create task o Enter desc. 98 by Lawrence Rebello . Keep the spool on which comes up by default.

In this case. and so on. In the asset section you enter the individual assets and their values. HEADER In the header. The Excel spreadsheet consists of two parts (see the example below). you can then use the Replace function in Excel to replace the variable with the correct value. although the organizational structures of your enterprise have not yet been specified (for example. The next columns should contain the field descriptions assigned to these record types. the company code. you should adhere to the following guidelines when creating the Excel sheet: SAP recommends that you set the Standard Excel format for the entire document before you enter any data. Dates. The fields are organized in record types Enter these record types in the first column of the worksheet. This method is especially suited for transferring small datasets. • • In the header (blue in the example). SAP recommends the following structure: USE OF RECORD TYPES 99 by Lawrence Rebello . asset class and capitalization date. can also be entered using the Custom Excel format. you specify the type of data you want to transfer for your assets. the SAP R/3 Asset Accounting component also offers the option of transferring legacy asset data using Microsoft? Excel. for example. company code. the description of a company code is not decided). and values have to be supplied in these cells for each asset. In order to ensure that the data transfer is carried out correctly. PREREQUISITES The first step is to load or manually enter the legacy asset data and values from your legacy system into an Excel sheet.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling ASSET DATA TRANSFER Legacy Data Transfer Using Microsoft XL Along with the Data Transfer Workbench. . Before carrying out the data transfer. description. The Excel worksheet has to contain cells for the legacy asset number. The data transferred to the R/3 System has to be in a specified form. you first specify the field descriptions to be transferred. company code XXXX. The first 5 rows in the Excel worksheet are reserved for this header information. for example. you enter variables for the missing information. The amount of data you can transfer using this method is limited by the maximum number of rows in your Excel version. such as a few hundred fixed assets. The same applies for any required entry fields that are defined in the asset class in the R/3 System. however. You might want to prepare for the data transfer. You are not allowed to use them for asset master data or asset values.

FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Record type 0 Used for… Is assigned to tab page during field assignment (see below) … Header data Identifier (legacy asset number). time-dependent data Depreciation areas. in order to assign them to the correct assets. Fields that have leading zeroes in the R/3 System (for example. cumulative values. company code 0001). The system then recognizes the field contents of all fields of record type 1 in column B as company codes and in column C as asset classes. which is in a row specified as record type 1. record type 4). that its company code is always in column B and its asset class in column C. ASSET SECTION Enter the asset values below the header data. For example. general data and inventory data Posting information. you have to make sure that for each asset. cumulative values. Therefore. posted values 1 2 3 Header data Time-dependent data to Leasing Depreciation areas. You have to enter the asset data in the Excel worksheet so that it corresponds to the structure of the field descriptions in the header. have to have leading zeroes in this format. Asset master data. The system needs the identifier if there are errors. posted values Transactions 4 Transactions If you do not need certain record types (for example. then you can omit them when creating your Excel worksheet. 00001000). and is not allowed to be used for any other purpose. record type 0 is reserved solely for the number of the asset from the legacy system. Always enter the asset class with 8 places and leading zeroes (for example. EXAMPLE OF STRUCTURE OF XL WKS 100 by Lawrence Rebello . you specify in the header for record type 1 that the company code is in column B and the asset class is in column C.

FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling In record type 3 (depreciation area data) always supply the depreciation area name (such as 01) first.97 01. The sequential number is used to keep different transactions separate from one another.97 Features Field Assignment between XL & R/3 [ Mapping ] 101 by Lawrence Rebello . number Area Transaction Type 100 100 100 Amount Posting date 4 4 4 1 1 2 01 02 01 5000 4900 1000 01.01.01.01. In record type 4 (transactions) you have to enter the sequential number and the depreciation area in the first two fields.97 01. REPRESENTING TRANSACTIONS Record type Seq.

Choose No. capitalization date. Test run ) the system lists any errors that occur. You thereby only have to carry out the mapping and conversion once. 2 and so on). The message states that there is a large amount of data in stored temporarily. You have to assign the old asset number (from the legacy system). Before the data transfer. In this way. select the one you want and choose Start with field assignment. and so on SETTING THE DATE FORMAT Choose Settings ? Date format to specify whether the date uses American format (MM/DD/YY or MM/DD/YYYY). The asset master data fields that can be completed in the R/3 System are split up on various tab pages. It is saved in your saved field assignment and can be used again in the future. you assign the field descriptions of the Excel worksheet cells to fields in R/3 (for example. and any required entry fields (see above) in the R/3 System. the system displays a dialog box. TRANSFER OF FIXED ASSETS During a test run (choose legacy data transfer. European format (DD. the assignment of header in f ormation to table field in the R/3 System would look like this: Comp Code – company code Asset Class – asset class Tr Type – transaction type. and asks if you want this data to be available to other applications.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling In the R/3 System. ISO format (YYYY-MM-DD). In the Excel sheet in the above graphic. 1. you can carry out a number of data transfers that always follow the same pattern. It supplies values to their fields based on the assignments you made. The system does not check if the assignment is logical. 102 by Lawrence Rebello . You make the field assignment by selecting a row in the Fields of file table and selecting its corresponding field on the Fields of asset master record tab pages.MM. and then choosing the Assign pushbutton. you can also still save the field assignment after the data transfer (Saved assignments pushbutton).MM. However. To display master records of assets that were created successfully. To create a new field assignment. you have to assign the asset class. you choose whether you want to use an already existing field assignment or if you want to create a new one. CoCd to company code). or SAP format (YYYYMMDD). In the initial screen of the transaction. To choose an existing field assignment. Certain assignments are mandatory. However. you can assign each field to exactly one other field. choose Details of return message .YYYY). in which it asks if the field assignment should be saved. In addition. See the Use of Record Types table (above) for the valid assignments. Dates in your Excel sheet have to have the same format. Some Excel versions issue a message at this point in a dialog box. choose Create field assignment.YY or DD. The system lists only those field descriptions that are defined in the header section of the Excel sheet. without actually starting the During a production run (choose Assets ) the system creates new assets using the values from the Excel worksheet. These are sorted according to their record type (0. company code.

test co with data transfer allowed. Legacy data transfer using Microsoft Excel. Date Specifications / Last Closed Fiscal Year – must be followed for Asset data upload in Capitalisation date [seq 2]. • The cols after that have to be matched to SAP like CO Code etc. The INPUTS can be reduced.e. mfg. o/wise date errors.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Any incomplete or incorrect data that could not be used to create assets can be displayed in a separate Excel worksheet (choose Export errors to file). so that assignment is easier like 0 no change 1 no change. • Legacy data cols will have to be changed to be recognizable by SAP. QTY & UOM can be added 2 blank cctr. Specify Sequence of Dep Areas . ACTIVITIES Start the legacy data transfer program in Customizing for Asset Accounting. • Alternatively you can use BDC. [some tips] – convert all cells to text. plant. Thereafter an asset can be uploaded backdated. loca 3 blank cumul apc. cumul dep 4 DOES NOT WORK Legacy Asset No Dep Area Dep Key Dep Start ULin Period Use Life Real Area Current Value Date Identification Feature Real Dep Area Depreciation Key Dep Calc Start Date Planned useful life in periods Planned useful life in years Real Dep Area Sequence No of Asset Line Items in Fiscal Year Reference Date Controlling [ OB13 ] • MAINTAIN CONTROLLING AREA IMG/ES/Definition/Controlling [ OX06 / OK19 ] 103 by Lawrence Rebello . Asset Data Transfer Set Co Code Status 2 i. TC – AS100 • You must have the legacy data in an Xl file. • When all the SAP fields are matched you can upload.01 must be first. Choose Asset Data Transfer ? Legacy Data Transfer Using Microsoft? Excel. also ensure PP is open.

select & details [to change CO area OKKS][when you activate components/control indicators. However the co codes can have different currencies. Creating new allows you to use your COA instead of INT. According to the complexity of your organizational structure & the components with which you work. you cannot activate ProfitAnalysis. which must be checked  otherwise variances will not be calculated. TO MAINTAIN NO RANGES [ KANK ] o IMG/CO/General CO/Organisation Create new entry & then copy. Direct Posting 104 by Lawrence Rebello . otherwise you will have to make do with INT COA]. Enter CO area CO area same as co code Curr type 10 Currency INR Cur & val profile BLANK COST ELEMENT ACCOUNTING [create a CCTR first] [ KS01 ] [ Change CO Area – OKKS ] There are 4 types of cost elements 1.must be a GL a/c 2. That is why. and the system will create it. you must first analyse the outcome that determining organizational units has on the other SAP components. you need to ensure that all the co codes have the same no of posting periods [FY variants].FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Maintain CO area [ OKKP ]       • •  the CO area is the highest level in which you can create reports. which must be checked  otherwise variances will not be calculated]. o Maintain CO area/No ranges/Versions : In other settings there is a cost center hierarchy. unless you create operating concern] Assignment o Assign co code to CO area [ OB62 ] IMG/CO/General CO/ [ OKKP ] o Organisation : The definition of the organizational unit is one of the most important activities when introducing the SAP system. [cost center hierarchy / select & activate components [left]. Therefore. At the bottom there is an option for variances. and the same COA. once a COA is stored it cannot be changed. DO NOT COPY COA. templates ] o Maintain CO area .can be User defined 3. since master data & COA are stored here. Primary . do not copy CO area before creating GL a/c’s [first create thru maintain CO area and then copy. create it here. If the hierarchy is not created. When you assign all co codes to one CO area. The complete representation of a complex organizational structure should first be discussed with a consultant. Enter Std Hier name. Secondary .This option is in General Controlling] o Copy delete check CO area [ through structure. Keep Profit Center OFF. [cost center hierarchy / select & activate components [left]. At the bottom there is an option for variances.

[ KA06 ] • C Ele Cat 43 internal activity allocation / use 42 for Asst.select [ if necessary create a C Ctr first from IMG/CO/CCA/Master Data/Cost Centers]  History o Secondary Cost Element . [enter] • Right click on Std Hierarchy & create groups 105 by Lawrence Rebello .screens  [ KA01 ]  Basic Data : • C Ele Cat 11 Revenue • Attribute [n/a] FMW Fixed / Material • FP Fixed / HR • FPW Fixed / HR/ Effective Payment  Indicators • Record quantity  • UOM EA  Default AA cost center . Indirect Posting • Master Data o Create cost element [800000 & 893010]  Create primary cost element .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 4. versions etc] SAP/Ac/CO/CCA o Master data/ Standard Hierarchy [OKKS to change CO area]  OKEON change . COST CENTER ACCOUNTING • • Activate Cost Center A/cing in CO area o Select co & activate components [left] [screen similar to CO area .

To enter actual figures. ensure period is relevant] Redistribution IMG/CO/CCA/Act Posting/PE Closing/Distribution o Define distribution [okks – set CO area]  Create actual dist [ KSV1 ] by Lawrence Rebello • • • • Create cost centers Save Activate Save 106 . so that later amounts can be distributed auto. o Top left butt gives 12 period dist o Top left 2n d butt . from to periods etc by default. skip & dbl click CCA & following menu appears. create AAM thru FKMT equivalence type i. o IMG/CO/CCA/Planning/Manual Planning/Define UD Planner Profiles . In free you decide] • Assign button top Cost & Activity Input o KP06 change KP07 display o Enter & variables & top left overview .you can enter data like direct production cost 416100. [overview screen will not open unless 800000 & 893010 have been defined as cost elements & cost center details entered in the cost element]. 417001. For meaningful comparisions.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • Planning o KP04 select planner profile [use SAPEASY a simple profile. clear tax problems if any o On saving for question “Edit all items” enter screen by screen o Enter text where reqd o Bank value date o TT 50 for total amount o S_ALR_87013611 for comparisions [ from to period will give plan data for the whole year. and copy so that defaults can be entered] Use F4 then create new. back for totals & save o Using KP04 before KP06.e. Enter * at cost center & cost element to go to the next screen. all elements are depicted. Use F-02 [FB50 requires complex posting to bring up AAM]. and you can choose. gets the version. o Ensure that both plan & actual data are in the same year [especially if it is a calender year and the cost center exists as on that date ] o Earlier plan amounts were entered.better to copy from an existing one as detailed above o Select & left  General CO • CuDK currency dist key 1=equal 3=dist by %age • QtDk quantity dist key  Layouts for CO • Deflt Default params • Overw params can be overwritten • Integrated XL planning with XL as frontend • File description • Select & enter default params • Version 0 from 1 to period 12 • Fiscal year 2004 • Form based [in form based. specify %ages.

assessment 42 • Indicators • Default A Assig USER1 CCtr becomes a sender o Define allocation structures [ KSES ] { not required }  New entries  Assignment [create new] • Source from Cele to Cele  Assessment cost element • New entries CAFETERIA [F4]  Settlement cost elements • Receiver category CTR • By cost element  o Maintain assessment  Create actual assessment / change [ KSU1 ] • Cycle UD bpacyc o Iterative o Attach segment  Segment UD bpclasgeg screens   Segment header • Assessment C Ele CAFE • Allocation stru VA [ enter either CEle/VA but not both ] • Receiver rule Fixed %ages  Sender / receiver • Cost center from to • Cost ele from to  Receiver cost center from to  Sender values • Share in % 50 etc • Act Vals  Plan Vals   Receiver tracing factor .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Cycle any name Starting date 8 type text Top left button.cost ctr USER2 enter %ages [for all receivers] o SAP/CO/CCA/PE Closing/Single Function/Allocation    107 by Lawrence Rebello .sending cost center to receiving cost center  Sender values  Receiver tracing factor [ 100 % ] o KSV5 for distribution i. material03] [ KA06 ]  Top left master data  screens • Basic data . but for a secondary CCtr.]  Sender receiver .e. attach segment [details of cost centers]. segment name any & screens  Segment header 40% to redistribute [ receiver tracing factor – use fixed %age . For primary use distribution] o Specify receiver types for assessment o Create assessment cost elements [cafe. redistribution [SAP/CO/CCA/PE Closing/Single Function/Allocation] o S_ALR_87013611 to view Assessment IMG/CO/CCA/ActPosting/Period end closing/Assessment [allocation to. variable portion gives errors.cost element category .

FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling   KSU5 assessment  [F8] S_ALR_87013611 to view INTERNAL ORDERS IMG/CO/IO • Activate order management in CO area o Select & left  Activate components / control indicators  Assignment of co codes • Order master data o Define order types  Order cat 01 internal order[CO] screen  108 by Lawrence Rebello .

general [Obj Class Inv for Assets] • Functional area [like SD. • Status profile : Release status will allow posting to cost center [no need to release later on] • Order layout 0030 or blank.maintain] • The internal order created earlier is unassigned o Position cursor on I/o o Click on top button right [select] o Position cursor on target group [prodn] o Click on top center button [element group] • The unassigned I/o will be assigned IMG/CO/IO/ActualPostings/Settlement o Maintain no ranges for settlement documents o Maintain settlement cost elements  Create primary settlement cost element [Create 500000 CElem cat 22 ext • •   sett for Assets. Commit Mgmt.select 70 & left o Source [new entry] separate for Asset] o Cost element from to [group leave blank] Maintain Settlement Profiles by Lawrence Rebello .MM etc]  • Business area [for consolidation] • Archiving time 3 months [removes data from actual DB & stores offline for better space management] • Co partner active will produce a total record  • Control indic Classi. • Print form  • Save [no range not maintained error message is OK]  Maintain no ranges for orders [the following applies to No ranges for settlements also] • Click groups [top button .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • Order type UD [MKTG] Settlement profile 20 internal [ use settle to CCTR with orig CEle ] • Plan profile .]  Change Primary/Secondary settlement cost element Create secondary settlement cost element  screens • Basic data o C Ele Cat 21 Settlement o Default AcAssign Cost Ctr HPCLCOSTS Maintain allocation structures VA • Assignments [select VA/ 00 & click assignments] o Source 400000 – 650300 [separate for Asset] o Assessment cost elements SETUP o Settlement cost elements  Receiver category CostCtr [FXA for Assets]  By cost element  [leave blank]  Settlement cost element IORCOELE [IO cost ele][secondary cost element defined above] [ 500000 for Assets i. with 22 ]   109 Maintain source structure 7 • Select & top left o Assignments . Revenue Postings on.e.

Receiver DIRPRCOST. Use 7 [enter Asset value date ] • Save . bank value date. SAP/Ac/CO/IO/Master Data/Special Functions/Order o KO01 create Type 0722  Co code BPCL plant BPPL  Obj class overhead  Release [right button][will not come if release immediately selected earlier]  Settlement rule [top][w/out which IO will not work] • Cost CTR. Mention I/o for all 40. o Save document o S_ALR_87012993 to view SAP/Ac/CO/PE Closing/SingleFunction/Settlement o KO88 settlement o IO no last created comes up by default [enter asset value date] o Enter settlement period [004 for 4] and posting period as relevant. but not for 50. o  [F8] [ AW01N to see Asset ] o View cost center comparision . %age ---.ABC components active for analytical & integrated calculation o Assignment of co codes Maintain Std Hierarchy for CO area .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • Enter Alloc & Source Stru with default obj type FXA for Assets & valid receiver CCTR/Fixed Asset reqd/ GL optional.[order no created] IO/Planning/Cost & Activity Inputs Planner profile ZSAPEASY o KPF6 change [use form based] o Enter plan data & save o Enter actual values F-02 & GL item fast entry [top butt] for I/Orders. amount must go to C Ctr]  ACTIVITY BASED COSTING • • IMG/CO/ABC .Sett Type FUL • From 1/2003 to 4/2003 etc LEAVE BLANK  Top header Goto settlement params [F8] • Allocation structures VA / 00 • PA trf structure [profitability analysis][FI . enter text etc.S_ALR_87013611 [as after settlement.there should be a CO area & a cost ctr existing Activate ABC in CO area o Activate components . o Clear tax probs if any.assign std hierarchy defined under master data/business process [ enter the Std Hier defined in Co Area ] Master Data / Bus Processes .Direct a/c assig FI/MM] N/a • Source Stru.Maintain std hierarchy of Bus process [like CCtr] right click & create Bus Proc. [ CPH4N ] [ enter only basic data ] • • 110 by Lawrence Rebello .

field for dummy P Ctr wil be blank. create new.activation conditions [active] o Change template o Display template o Environment BPP [bus planning process] o Object type Cost element o Object template Assign templates for Bus Process [packing etc] screens  [ not reqd ] o Basic data o Organization o Attributes o Allocation o Templates o History Planning / maintain versions o Create authorization groups for versions o Maintain settings of version in controlling area  Settings by fiscal year [integrated planning on for FY 2005]  Version 0.copy SAPALL  ZPCLABC & enter defaults o Select & left Cost / Activity/Process/Inputs o CP06 change .  Elimination of duplication / Int Bus Vol  [keep off]  Local currency 111 by Lawrence Rebello . PROFIT CENTER ACCOUNTING [OMSY to open Fin Year] • IMG/CO/PCA o Basic settings  Set controlling area o Controlling area settings  Maintain CO area settings . but as soon it is defined.to check variances You can also use Dist/Asst under ABC/PEClos/Dist etc. dbl click ABC & o IMG/CO/ABC/Planning/Manual Planning/Def UD Plan Profiles . ref version n/a SAP/Ac/CO/ABC/Planning o KP04 set planner profile [SAPALL] [ use ZSAPALL 1-D01 with CEle ] o F4. skip.enter bus process in screen [ use screen variant from top header edit ] S_ALR_87011761 plan/actual costs . plan  Act  Legal Valuation  WIP/RA  Variance   Auth group.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • • • • • • • Templates / maintain templates [ not required ] o Create template .bus processes with cost elements as GL a/c’s & top left overview o Enter plan fixed / variable costs & dist key 1 [equal dist] S_ALR_87011760 plan / actual comparison FB50 actual postings . it should be displayed  Std hierarchy as per your CO area.

Billing FB15. FD11 to view VF02 .enter with Qty structure  & no costing off  .pick & post goods issue VF01 .new entries .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o  P Ctr currency  Legal Valuation  Control Indicator [active] Master data / profit center  Maintain P Ctr groups. and you will have to make do with the hierarchy.material created assigned to P Ctr MB1C . o o o o o o o o o o o o Create dummy P Ctr Maintain profit center [under group created] screens • Basic data • Indicators • Co codes PCA/Basic settings/CO area settings  Activate direct postings .check all correct ? MM01 create material  Costing 1 scr profit center .line / online   Plan versions • Maintain plan version o Plan version 0 o Settings for P Ctr o New entries o Online  line item  TP0 [transfer price] o Exch rate type “M” • Adjust line items [no action]  Analyse settings  Update basic settings . o/w P Ctr will not accept the group.Planned price & dates IMG/CO/PCA/Assignment to profit centers  Check assignment • Top – assignment monitor IKE4 • Material [ensure job is run etc] • Assigned materials .pricing for new material if reqd VA01 .initial stock [do not copy/assign WH as it creates a problem in MB1C] VOK0 .  Costing 2 .set control param for actual data .sales order VL01N . go back to maintain CO area setting and put the group in the tree. After creating the group.A/cing documents IMG/CO/CEA/MD/CE  Create cost elements WRT 800000 & 893010 for them to appear in PCS reports PCA/Transfer Prices  Basic settings for Pricing n/a • Condition types • Pricing procedures • Transfer price variants  Advanced settings for pricing n/a • Define price dependencies   by Lawrence Rebello 112 . FD10N.

Screens   Select create button [ ignore the warning message ]  Name operating concern. INR etc  Enter costs/revenues . variances can be viewed thru SAP/CO/PCA/InfoSystems/ReportsForPca/InteractiveReporting S_ALR_87013326 PROFITABLILTY ANALYSIS There are 2 types of profitability analysis : Costing based & Account Based [see end] • IMG/CO/PA/Structure/DefineOpConcern o Manitain Op Concern .equal dist etc [ cr –ve for 800000 & 893010 for cop etc ] Since sales are booked thru VF01. after entering plan amounts. o Save  Data structure / Create • Charecteristics [ to see ] Value Fields[to see] • Customerwise Sales Qty • Cust Groupwise Sales Value 113 by Lawrence Rebello . Amount.  Select Costing Based. SAP/CO/PCA/Planning  7KEP set planner profile zSAP800 [ Layout 8A-101 ] PC groups [centralized] SAP/CO/PCA/Planning/Costs/Revenues  7KE1 change  7KE2 display  Version 0 1-12 2003 2005  Co code Pc Gr A/c etc  Overview [enter] 8  PCtr.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o o o • Define access sequences • Define condition exckusions for groups • Define pricing reports  Profit planning • Define permitted a/c’s [to appear in PCA] • 800000 sales • 893010 cost of sales  Actual postings • Maintain automatic a/c assignment • C/E 800000 PC BPTRANS Mandatory 3 • Can also enter 893010 with CCTR. Dist.

o Maintain versions 0  Settings in op concern – weekly [ no option ?? ] IMG/CO/PA/Structure/DefineOP Concern o Maintain characteristics [key fields]  Chars created earlier [ MATKL etc ] o Maintain value fields  Created earlier [ VVIQT etc ] o Define profitability segment characteristics  Operating Concern – 00BP  Select Costing Based  Enter  Save IMG/CO/PA/Master Data o Maintain characteristics values [top button all chars on/off]  Clicking on a char = maintain values 114 by Lawrence Rebello .This will happen only after Assignment to Op Concern as above.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • • • Materialwise COGS • Material Groupwise Discounts  Characteristics • MATKL Matl Group click τ • KUNNR Customer click τ • KMKDGR Customer Group • VVGRW Group weight  Value Fields • VVIQT Invoice Qty • VV010 Revenue • VV020 Qty Discount • VV030 Customer Discount • VV040 Material Discount • VV060 Other Rebates • VV070 Cash Discount • VV110 Accrued Freight • VV140 COGS  Save  Select Activate Button  Select Back Arrow  Select YES for “Do you want to generate Op Concern Environment ?” [ Status Green = Active ]  Attributes • OC Currency = INR • Select Co Code Currency = INR • Fiscal Year = K4 [ensure same fiscal yr in FI]  Save [o/w assignment not possible]  Environment .activate client specific Part IMG/ES/Assignment/CO/Assign CO area to OP Concern IMG/CO/General Controlling/Organisation o Maintain CO area  Activate components  If activation is in display mode uses KEKE to activate.

where these chars are logically dependent on one another  Derivation rule .incoming sales order o Details [left] o Assign valuation strategy Setup valuation using Matl Cost Estimate o Define access to std cost estimate  Costing Key 001 Costing variant PPC1  Costing version 1 Period [template ] 012.country key.derivation lets you find values for certain chars automatically based on known values of other chars. prices & price  Separate pricing proc for CO [ZWMP01]  Steps counter ZBPR  100 00 ZBPR  Condition records however do not appear [xxx] o Assign value fields  Ctype Value Field  ZBPR ERLOS / VV010 o Define pricing reports . Table 502. dist channel.002 [ legal valu problem ?? ] o Assign costing keys to material types 001. sales orgn.P1  Cost ctr. division & plant source & target Valuation / Valuation Strategies o Define & assign valuation strategy [create new if necc with PA] o PV REC Plan Ver Val Strat o 1 A 0 BPV o Point of valuation PV 1  Real time o Record  A . 10.2003  Cost estimate is executed w/o date Define access to actual costing matl ledger o Costing key 002 o Valuation view .002 o Assign costing keys to any chars n/a o Assign value fields ERLOS / VV010 Setup conditions & costing sheets o Define condition tables [create top button]  502 [ selected field co code ] & GENERATE o Define access sequences  BP01.profit center valuation / [use legal valu o/w prob later] o Type of valuation . header [key field & text] rest – item level [only key field] Planning o Initial steps  Maintain version 0  Settings in Op concern [transfer to Sop – create char groups] o Assign qty fields o o 115 by Lawrence Rebello . co code.2003 o Valuation field allocation 00BP ERLOS / VV010 o Assign costing keys to products 001. Co Code / Customer / Material o Create condition types & costing sheets  Define type.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • • • Char hierarchy [to structure your products / customers] Define char derivation .only transfer total cost o Plant 00BP period 012.

FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling •  SD Qty Field COPA Qty Field  Order qty Sales Qty o Planning framework  Setup planning framework 00BP General O/View  Aids for Changeover to the Planning Framework • Create planning level from planning layout ZPLAN • Display Planner Profiles o Create your planner profile [ use change butt ] o Manual entry of Planning data  Define planning layout / Create • Save o Setup trans based top down dist  Define value field assignment • Value field same as ref field  Define dist profile [BDI] • Dist level o Receiving char PRCTR [profit Ctr] Flow of actual values o Initial steps  Characteristic groups • Maintain char groups [see top] • Assign char groups for assign screens • Assign char groups for line item screens  Value field groups • Maintain value field groups • BPVF [only value fields Rev. freight etc] • Assign value fields for line item screens o Transfer of incoming sales orders  Assign value fields SD  COPA • Condition Type Value Field • PR00 VV010 • KP00 pallet dis VV020 • KA07 cust dis VV030 • KA00 sales promotion VV060 • ZF00 accrued freight VV110 • VPRS cost VV140  Save  Assign Qty Fields SD  COPA • SD Qty Field COPA Qty • BRGEW VVGRM gross wt • FKIMG VVIQT invoice qty  Activate transfer of incoming sales orders o Transfer of billing documents o Order & Project settlement  Define PA transfer structure for a settlement • PA Trf Stru FI • Assignment line 50 [revenues] • Source cost element 800000 to 805000 • Value fields ERLOS / VV010 116 by Lawrence Rebello . Gross sales.

[back arrow] • Select 20 direct revenues from FI • Dbl click source • From 300000 to 399999 • Select Value fields [QTY/Value] 1 [fix] VV010 [value field] • Save   Posting of transaction in FI [F-02]  40 cash 113100 8 amt 100000 BA BPCL des = sales posting  50 sales 800000 8 amt “” “” BA BPCL des = +  Select profit segment ′ [arrow]  Select  [continue ]  Save  To see line item list display A/c/CO/PA/Info System/Disp Line Item List [ KE24 – Actual ] • Cur type 10 • Rec Type B dir FI posting • Period 012/2004 • Co Code HPCL by Lawrence Rebello o 117 .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling o Assign PA Stru to settlement profile 00BP Activation of Profitability Analysis • IMG/CO/PA/Flow of Actual Values/Activate PA o Select thru position & 2 • IMG/CO/PA/Flow of Actual Values/Initial Steps/Define No ranges for Actual Postings o Select Op Concern o Select maintain groups • Save  IMG/FA/Global Settings/Document/Line Item/Controls/Maintain FSV • Select FSV [0001] • Dbl Click FSG [G004] • Dbl click Addl A/c Assignment [PgDn] • Profitability segment  required / optional. • Save IMG/CO/PA/Flow of Actual Values/Direct Postings from FI/MM  Maintain PA transfer stru for direct postings • Select FI [stru] Financial A/cing • Dbl click assignment lines • Select 10 direct cost from FI • Dbl click source • From 400000 to 499999 • Dbl click value fields • Select new entries • Select Value fields [QTY/Value] 1 [fix] VV140 [value field] • Save • Select τ . • Save ′ enter • Select G001 & dbl click • Dbl click Addl A/c Assignment • Profitability segment  required / optional.

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

• Customer 2704 • Execute & list appears.  To see the report  A/c/CO/PA/Info System/Execute report [ KE30 ]  Dbl click IDES 50 actual data • Sales org 1000 • From 1.02.00 • To 12.02.00 • Plan/act ind = 0 • Execute  Goto navigate [menu] ′ switch drill down  Select customerwise.  Navigate ′ switch drill down.  Select actual data. [There seems to be a confusion between direct FI & incoming sales order. It is better to be clear about what PA you want to achieve before starting to avoid disappointments]

PRODUCT COST CONTROLLING
What are the material types ? 1. Raw Material ROH - Account Groups 2. Stores & Spares ERSA 3. Packing Material VERP 4. Finished Goods FERT 5. Trading Goods HAWA 6. Semi – Finished Goods HALB 7. Services DIEN You have to create under material master just like GL Master in FI.

118

by

Lawrence Rebello

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

Material Master : • Purchase View - Views are nothing but areas or different screens. • Sales View • Accounting View • Costing Views • MRP View • Production View • Quality View Product Costing is used to valuate Finished Goods at Standard Price. Cost Sheet : Raw Material RM Overhead Personnel Cost Manufacturing Cost Mfg Overhead Cost of Goods Mfg Admin & SD Cost of Goods Sold xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx qty from BOM x price as per matl master %age of RM above

Personnel Power Dept A ′ B ′ C ′ D [routing means how many depts. Or product runs] Power Cost 100,000 No of Hrs 10,000 Per Hr 10 Yarn ProYarn 2hrs x 10 = 20 6hrs x 10 = 60 Depts are called work centers in PP In work centers we assign Cost center.

All done in 1000 Co Code

Basic Settings Log/MM/Matl Master/Material/Create General – immediately MM01 • Material WSLFG • Material Type Finished Goods • Material T – F100 • Industry Sector Mech Engg • Select Orgn Levels o Plant 1000 8 [enter] • Select top right button • Select Accounting 1 View 119

by

Lawrence Rebello

FICONOTES

:

A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling

• • • • •

o Price control S Standard o Std Price 200 Select top right button Select Costing 1 view o Select  with qty structure Overhead group = SAP10 Select Costing 2 view. Save WSLRM1 Mech Engg Raw Material T-T300

Creation of Raw Material • Material • Industry • Matl Type • Material • • • • • • • Select o Select o o Save

Organisational Levels Plant 1000 8 [enter] top right button - Acounting 1 view Valuation Cost 3000 Mov Avg Price 50 Rs WSLRM2 Mech Engg Raw Material

Material Industry Matl Type Select o o Select o o Save

• •

Organisational Levels Plant 1000 8 [enter] Des WSLRM2 top right button - Acounting 1 view Valuation Class 3000 Avg Price 25 Rs

Creation of Work Center [in production planning] Log/Prodn/Master Data/Work Centers/Work Center/Create CR01 • Plant 1000 work center & cost center will be same • Work Center Test5 [any name] • Work Center Cat 0001 • 8 [enter] • Working Hamburg Test5 work center • Select costing tab ′ date = 1.1.03 • Cost Center Test2 • Machine 1419 • Save 120

by

Lawrence Rebello

FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Creation of Routing [routing means how many depts or product runs] [logic ′ this product goes thru how many depts.] Log/Prodn/Master Data/Routings/Standard Routings/Create CA01 • Material WSLFG • Plant 1000 • Group 50000002 • 8 [enter] o Usage 1 o Status 4 [released general] • Select Operations Button • Operations Work Center • 0010 Test5 • Dbl Click 0010 operation • Machine 120 mins • Save Define Costing Sheets : IMG/CO/PCC/PCPlanning/Basic Settings for Material Cost/Overhead Define Costing Sheets • Select COGM [cost of goods manufactured] • Dbl Click costing sheet rows • Select 10 raw material • Dbl Click base o Controlling area 1000 o From Cost element 400000 to CE 410000 • Select 20 Material O/h • Dbl Click overhead rate o Position ′ enter o Give OH type 2 OH type • Select 60 Prod Cost • Dbl Click base o CO area 1000 o Select new entries o From CE 416200 to CE 416200 • Save CREATION BILL OF MATERIAL Log/Prodn/Master Data/BOM/Material BOM/Create CS01 • Material WSLFG • Plant 1000 • BOM Usage 1 • 8 [enter] • Item Item Category Comp Unit • 0001 L WSCRM1 PC • 0002 L WSCRM2 PC • Save CREATION OF SECONDARY COST ELEMENT 121 by Lawrence Rebello .

00 [Co Area WSL] • 8 [enter] o Name machine hour rate o Element Cat internal activity allocation 43 • Save • Co Area 1000 • Save CREATION OF ACTIVITY A/c/CO/CCA/MD/Activity Type/Indiv Proc/Create KL01 • Activity Type 1419 [can be any no or name] • Valid from 01.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling A/c/CO/CEA/c/Master Data/CE/Indiv Proc/Create KA06 • Cost Element 620001 [any no can be given] • Valid from 01.04.00 8 [enter] • Name machine hours • Description machine hours • Activity unit H • CCtr category * • Act Type Cat 1 • Allocation CE 620001 • Save CREATION OF COST CENTERS A/c/CO/CCA/MD/Cost Centers/Create KS01 • Cost Center Test2 [any name or no] • Name Test2 cost center • Description Test2 cost center • Person responsible A • C Ctr Category 1 • Hierarchy Area H1 • Co Code 1000 • Bus Area 1000 • Save CREATION OF COST CENTER GROUP KSH1 • Cost Center Group Testall [any name] • Testall Testall • Test2 • Save PLANNING FOR COST CENTER FOR POWER ELEMENT KP06 Version = 0 From Period = 10 [for next month] To period = 10 Fiscal Year = 2003 Cost Center = Test2 122 by Lawrence Rebello .01.

FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Cost Ele to = 499999 Select  from based Select overview screen Cost Element Plan Fixed Cost 416200 100000 Save CHANGE ACTIVITY TYPE PER PRICE PER PLANNING [giving no of hrs required] Controlling/CCA/Planning/Activity/Output Price/Change Version = 0 From Month = 10 To Period = 10 Fiscal Year = 2003 Cost Center = Test2 Activity Type = 1419 Select  from based Select overview screen Activity Plan Activity 416200 100000 Save PRICE CALCULATION [to get per hr cost calculation] Accounting/Controlling/CCA/Planning/Allocations/Price Calc [TC – KSPI] Select Cost Center Group = Testall Select no bus processes =  Version = 0 Period From = 10 To Period = 10 Fiscal Year = 2003 Test Run =  Detail List =  Execute Select back arrow Yes TO CHECK WHICH COSTING SHEET IS TO BE ATTACHED TO COSTING VARIANT IMG/Controlling/PCC/Material Cost Estimate with Qty Structure/Define Costing Variant [TC – OKKN] Select Position Button Costing Variant = PPC1 [std cost estimate] Select PPC1 ′ select details button Select valuation variant button Select overhead tab = costing sheet = COGM Save GOODS RECEIPT / PRODUCTION RECEIPT [in MM] Logistics/Matl Mgmt/Inv Mgmt/Goods Movement/Goods Receipt/Other [TC – MB1C] 123 by Lawrence Rebello .

50 94. the price as per Costing will be the future price.03 521 1000 SLOC 0001 TO CHECK THE MATERIAL MASTER TO SEE VALUES ARE UPDATED OR NOT Material = WSL Plant = 1000 Accounting 1 CREATION OF COST ESTIMATE WITH QTY STRUCTURE Accounting/CO/PCC/PCPlanning/Material Costing/Cost Estimate with Qty Structure/ Create [TC – CK11N] Material = Plant = Costing Variant Costing Version 8 [enter] 8 [enter] WSLFG 1000 PPC1 1 WSLRM1 RM2 10 % Power 2x5 = = = = 50 25 7.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Document Date Posting Date Movement Type Plant [enter] 8 Material WSLFG Save = = = = Qty 1 23. 124 by Lawrence Rebello .10 7. cost estimate price will become current price. When you do releasing.5 Total Value 10 50 25 2.07.5 10 92.6 Cost Element 620001 400000 400000 629900 655100 Save Goto Material Master MM03 Select Costing 2 View PRICE UPDATE Accounting/CO/PCC/PCPlanning/Material Costing/Price Update [TC – CK24] Posting Period= 9 2003 ′ Select marking release Co Code = 1000 ′ Select CoCode 1000 Plant = 1000 ′ Costing Variant PPC1 Material = WSLFG ′ Costing Version 01 Execute ′ Save ′ Select Back Arrow ′ Select Release Button When you do marking.07.03 23.

Tools 3.12. ASAP integrates 3 components 1. COST ESTIMATE WITHOUT QUANTITY STRUCTURE Accounting/CO/PCC/PCPlanning/Matl Cost Planning/Cost Estimate Without Structure/ Create [TC – KKPAN] Material No = WSLFG Plant = 1000 Costing Variant = PPC1 Costing Date = 31. Implementation Phases Implementation Stages : ASAP is a PC based solution recommended by SAP for implementation planning and for use in an R/3 System implementation.99 Valuation Date = 01.03 Enter 8 Category = Material Resource = WSLRM1 Plant = 1000 Qty = 1 PC Enter 8 Category = M Resource = WSLRM2 Plant = 1000 Qty = 1 PC Enter 8 Category = E Resource = Tets2 Plant = 1419 [activity] Qty = 2 H [hrs] Enter 8 Save Marking & releasing [ we are avoiding PP completely] Same as price update.01. ASAP optimizes time.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Then current price will become previous price & new cost estimate price will become future price. The ASAP Roadmap 2. quality & efficient use of resources. R/3 Service & Training 125 by Lawrence Rebello .

This process continues with customer interaction through a QADB. Go Live & Support Tools : Implementation Assistant Question & Answer Database [QADB] Implementation Guide Profile Generator Transport System R/3 Business Engineer Project Estimator – helps drawing up a project plan. From the viewpoint of the database.industry specific solutions [ RRR i. this is a conversion from one consistent state to the next. IDES the model R/3 Company Project Related Knowledge : ASAP Project Management ASAP Change Management Risk Analysis Review R/3 System An R/3 transaction is a sequence of dialog steps that are consistent in a business context and that belong together logically. The scope of SQL enables the full functionality of the database system. 1. Realization 4. Customer sign off on the AS IS is a must. which consists of 5 phases. clear & concise project plan to provide step by step direction throughout the R/3 implementation. R/3 User Application Component ABAP Dictionary Relational Database Front End Middle Layer Middle Layer Backend Project Preparation The primary focus of Phase I is getting the project started. which allows direct navigation from BPML to IMG related activities. identifying team members & developing a high level plan. thereby enabling knowledge of the customers process and facilitating of the AS IS Document which is the DELIVERABLE of this phase. the R/3 system starts a query from the application level to the database level.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling The ASAP Roadmap – which delivers a process oriented. Ready to Run R/3 ] Sample Implementation Project Plans SAP Ref Structure & Sub Structure fo ASAP – IMG link. all individual dialog steps are performed and the data entered in the transaction is updated in the database.e. Project Preparation / Scoping 2. including all vendor-specific enhancements to be used. Final Preparation 5. When an R/3 transaction is executed. Concept Check Tool Accelerators . 126 by Lawrence Rebello . This query is performed in SQL [structured query language] the language compatible with most database systems. After a user accesses a transaction. Business Blueprint 3.

Go Live & Support Transition from a project oriented. generated a “TO BE” deliverable. resources etc are done through a project estimator. end user training. Business Blueprint Understand the business goals of the company & to determine the business requirements needed to support these goals. you can work on customizing transactions. You can transfer industry specific master data structures to the system by using a CATT which is also integrated in the R/3 system. which forms the basis for the implementation. The implementation takes off in a Development Box. business in the R/3 Production Server can be run. The project plan. All configuration done on any earlier SANDBOXES. As to how SAP will function [ look & feel ]. 127 by Lawrence Rebello . Final Preparation Complete testing. & not vice versa. user training and signoff. After all testing is done. This configuration is transported to the Test Integration/Implementation Server. In early watch sessions. Go Live & Early Watch : The Go Live check is for just before you cut over to live operation. SAP spots potential performance problems early & suggests suitable corrective measures. Critical Open issues are resolved. It tests whether the system is suitably configured for the requirements. Remote Consulting : In remote consulting sessions. If any modifications are done on the Test Server in the course of testing. Data transports are always from the Dev Box to the Test Server. From a project IMG. Industry specific customizing is the name given to the installation of the default customizing parameters in the IMG that relate to a certain industry. a sandbox client can be set up to demonstrate to the customer. Industry business solutions are integrated in the Business Framework as Business Components. project documentation. pre-productive environment to a successful & live productive operation. USER SIGNOFF. In the course of capturing the proceses. trying to analyse & solve problems in your system from their desk. which is an independent and insulated server. The IMG is hierarchally structured. SAP consultants log into your server at convienent times. Upon the successful completion of this phase. Baseline & Final Configuration. Customize step by step in two work packages. The implementations of the system can also be ready to run R/3 [RRR] system solution. The main feature of this system is the complete delivery of hardware and software allowing you to rapidly install the R/3 system. The Business Blueprint captures all the processes “TO BE”. where the data is loaded & testing & integration point tests take place. SANDBOX demo etc. are reconfigured on the DEV Box. they have to be redone on the Dev Server. This document captures all the proceses “AS IS”. This becomes the deliverable and input for the next stage. compile documentation. Realization To implement al the business & process requirements based on the Business Blueprint. & after GAP ANALYSIS. Img – Implementation Guide The IMG acts as a checklist of the customizing activities that an enterprise should complete for a SAP system implementation project. CATT’s are provided for industry specific businesscases defined by SAP. system management and cutover activities. cross project documentation and project management information.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling The project preparation is instrumental in generating the AS IS document. which has taken the information from the “AS IS” document.

TTBC created for North. Central India Fiscal Year Variant V3 [ TC – OB29 ] TTBP assigned to V3 [ TC – OB37 ] 128 by Lawrence Rebello . While online. The check on R/3 application level guarantees data consistency before the data is transferred to the database. Architecture : SAP Bus Component FI. TTBE. A bus object in a BOR can have many methods from which one or several are implemented as BAPIs.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling ABAP Dictionary The ABAP dictionary contains the field definitions that are defined in the standard SAP system. A BAPI is assigned to one & only one bus object. the system uses the definition of the table fields in the ABAP dictionary to check the format of the users field entries.g change employee address.Company Code TTBP created TTBP assigned to TATABP TTBN. Maintain FYV 6. Create Company 2. TTBS. Business components interact in the Business Framework Architecture via open BAPIs. Assign Co Code to Co 4. HR etc Bus Objects Sales Orders BAPIs Create Sales Order Client Components Sales component on an external w/station Sample FI Configuration Sequence ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE 1. Business Object Repository Where SAP Business Objects are maintained. Create Bus Area 5. which R/3 offers access to business data & processes. sales order etc. South. promote employee. West. Methods [application programs] are used to modify the attributes [characteristics that specify a bus object] e. Business Application Programming Interface A BAPI is basically an entry gate to the R/3 system. Assign Co Code to FYV Company TATABP created. Create Co Code 3. TTBW. . East. A SAP Bus Object is the representation of a central bus object in the real world like an employee.

Define PPV 12. Global Parameters 20. Create default cost center 24. AA IS ON. Define Doc Types & No Ranges 15. Assign Variants to Co Code 13. Maintain Controlling Area CAIN [ TC – OB13 ] TTBP assigned to CAIN [ TC – OB62 ] Groups copied N/A as already existing in CAIN [ TC – OBD4 ] A/c 11610000 [ TC – OB53 ] Posting Period variant TATA [ TC . Assign Co Code to FSV 19. Enter CO area & select fiscal year GROUP INSERT. Define Tolerance Groups for employees 17. ABC NOT active PROFIT CENTER ON COPY 0. Create COA 8. -ve postings allowed. PA. Define A/c Groups 10.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 7. Create Cost Element 25.OBBO ] TATA assigned to TTBP [ TC – OBBP ] Posting periods opened 2000-10 [ TC – OB52 ] No ranges copied from 0001 as none present in IN01 [ TC – OBA7 ] Tolerance Gr TATA defined [ TC – OBA0 ] Tolerance Gr “” defined [ TC – OBA4 ] Field Status Variant TATA defined TTBP assigned to TATA [ TC – OBC5 ] Checked Global Parameters [ TC – OBY6 ] Propose fiscal year.Default Cost Center TPLS Silvassa Plant Gujarat TPLSL1 . Define FSV 18. Maintain Versions 22.STD HIER DEFTATABP . Define Tolerance groups for GL 16. select element COIN. TTBP CO area & STD HIER [ TC – OKKP ] Fiscal Year from 2003 CCA active. Open & Close Posting Periods 14. Create Cost Center Groups & Cost Centers 129 by Lawrence Rebello .Lane 1 21. Maintain NO Ranges COST CENTERS 23. Select settings for each Fiscal Year. create no range. Assign Co Code to COA 9. Target TTBP & assign [ TC – KANK ] DEFTATABP [ TC – KS01 ] UOM KL [ TC – KA01 ] PRIMARY COST OF RM TRF 51000000 COST OF PROD FACT 49000000 COST OF FIN GOODS TRF 52100000 COST OF FIN GOODS SOLD 50200000 SEMI FIN GOODS TRF 51100000 MFG SAL & WAGES 55010000 SALES – DOMESTIC BASE SALES REALISATION 40010000 UOM KL [ TC – KA06 ] SECONDARY [Celem category 43 internal activity allocation] SETUPCOSTS for setup prior to production LABOUR DIR for labour costs MACHINECST for machine costs [ TC – OKEON ] TTBP . Define Retained Earnings 11. default value date ON.

TTB3 created TTCC created Assigned ME51 – no integration No integration ME21 – no integration BSX – inventory posting configured [Rules based on valuation modifier. VAX.Lane 2 TPLSL2BOS Base Oil Storage TPLSL2PUR Purification TPLSL2BLN Blending TPLSL2FIL Filter Press TPLSL2CAT Cattle Tank Storage TPLSL2AFM Auto Fill Machine TPLSL2QC Quality Checks TPLT TPLU TPLV TPLW TPLX CREDIT CONTROL AREA 26. valuation class] [Account Assignment – Valuation modifier. Automatic Posting Procedures [OBYC – can be accessed thru Config Auto Postings in MM/A/C DETER W/O WIZARD] [ with WIZARD. FI-MM INTEGRATION 29. Create Credit Control Area 28.AUA. valuation account creates a problem ??] Patalganga Plant Gujarat Paharpua Plant West Bengal Tondiarpet Plant Tamil Nadu Ballabhgarh Plant New Delhi Hoskote Plant Karnataka TTB1. Valuation Class. Assign Credit Control Area to Company Code. TTB2. Purchase Quotation 30. Purchase Order 32. Automatic Posting Procedures GBB –offsetting entry inv posting 130 by Lawrence Rebello . PK 81/91. Gl a/c] 7920 GL 24300000 – Fin Prod: Prod & Purch for sale [Posting Key 89/99] BSD – inventory posting 7920 GL Dr 58012000 Other losses matl 7920 GL Cr 45500000 Other Gains matl WRX – GR/IR clearing A/c Posting Key 86/96 GL 13110100 Ext Proc Dom GBB – offsetting entry inv posting FOR 7920 – General Modification AUF. Purchase Requisition 31. Create Addl Bus Areas 27.GL 50200000 Cost of Fin Goods Sold FI-SD INTEGRATION 1. VBR.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling TPLSL1BOS Base Oil Storage TPLSL1PUR Purification TPLSL1BLN Blending TPLSL1FIL Filter Press TPLSL1CAT Cattle Tank Storage TPLSL1AFM Auto Fill Machine TPLSL1QC Quality Checks TPLSL2 .

Assign Country to Calc Proc 5. Tax Rates 131 by Lawrence Rebello .50/4.00 IN05 Goa 12. VBR.00 IN02 Arunachal Pradesh 11.00/4.00 IN04 Bihar 12.00 IN15 Meghalaya 10.00 IN12 Madhya Pradesj 11.00 IN10 Karnataka 12.00/4.00 IN06 Gujarat 12. GL A/C 51010100 Sales Product 1 Act Key MWS [taxes] GL A/c 24638000 TAXES 3.00 IN19 Punjab 12.2 level 1 was preset instead of level 2.00 IN20 Rajasthan 12.00 IN16 Mizoram 10.00/4.00/4.00/4.50/4.00 IN09 Jammu & Kashmir 13.00/4.00 IN11 Kerala 11.25/4.GL 50200000 Cost of Fin Goods Sold TC VKOA Table 001 Cust Grp/Mat Grp/ Act Key Copied from CACN TTSO Table 002 Cust Grp/ Act Key Copied from CACN TTSO Table 003 Mat Grp/ Act Key Copied from CACN TTSO Table 004 General Copied from CACN TTSO Table 005 Account Key Copied from CAIN 0001 Cond Type KOFI.00/4. Maintain Tax Proc 6.00/4.00/4.50/4.00 IN07 Haryana 13.00 IN14 Manipur 10. Act Key ERL. VAX. Assign GL A/c’s FOR 7920 – General Modification AUF.00 IN08 Himachal Pradesh 13.00 IN22 Tamil Nadu 12. Define Tax Codes Already defined Assigned [TC – FTXP] IN01 – IN32 defined A1 output tax jur code IN10 – Karnataka LST 12% defined CST FIELD NOT ACCESSIBLE as in condition type JIP1.00 IN03 Assam 11.50/4.00 IN18 Orissa 11. AAGR for Cust & Mat. [ Acc seq TAXJ is ok?] IN01 Andhra Pradesh LST 11.00/4.AUA.00 8. Check Calc Proc 4.50/4.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling [OBYC – can be accessed thru Config Auto Postings in MM/A/C DETER W/O WIZARD] 2.00 IN21 Sikkim 10.00 IN13 Maharashtra 12. Define Tax Jurisdictions 7. Sales Org TTSO.25/4.2 JIN1.00 IN17 Nagaland 10.00/4.00 / CST 4. PK 81/91.

Assign Input Tax indicator for Non – Taxable Transactions 14. Define No Ranges 18.00 IN29 Daman & Diu 10..00 IN26 Andaman & Nicobar Islands 10.00 IN28 Dadra & Nagar Haveli 10.00 IN25 West Bengal 12.00 [TC – OB40] JIN1 Act Key MWS GL 13113400 JIN2 Act Key MW3 GL 13113410 JIP1 & 2 Act Key NVV [TC – XD01] SD/Basic Functions/Taxes/ Define Tax Relevancy of Master Records : In customer taxes.00/4.00/4.00 IN24 Uttar Pradesh 11. create NEW JIN1 0. assignment will not take place] AO11 no change ASSET ACOUNTING 11. [TC – OA08 ] No Changes EC 08 OIN copied to TTBP OBCL A0. Org Stru / Check country specific settings 12. change sequence 1.& 1 for exempt & fully taxable.00 IN30 Delhi 10. Assign GL A/c’s AO90 Plant & Mach 20000 No changes AS08 01 to 06 defined OAOA no change acqui & prodn costs contra acqui loss on ret w/o revenue clearing a/c asset sale [xxx] loss on asset sale gain from asset sale ord acc dep exp dep mfg acqui & prodn costs contra acqui loss on ret w/o revenue clearing a/c asset sale [xxx] loss on asset sale gain from asset sale ord acc dep 20200000 21400000 58190000 21500000 58190000 45100000 20210000 57000000 30000 Furnitures………………. Define Tax Accounts 10.2 in VD01.2 to JIN1.00/4. and V0 assigned.2.00/4. Specify No Assignment across Co Codes 16. OAOB . Tax in Customer IN23 Tripura 10. Define Tax Determination Rules : In country IN.. 20600000 21400000 58190000 21500000 58190000 45100000 20610000 132 by Lawrence Rebello . Define Asset Classes 19.00 IN27 Chandigarh 11.00/4.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 9.00/4.00 IN32 Pondicherry 10.00 IN31 Lakshwadeep 10. similar for JIN2.00/4. Assign COD to Co Code 15. Copy COD 13.assigned [if u skip 11. This will ensure JIN1. Specify A/c Determination 17.

gain from asset sale 20510000 . Define a/c’s for over / under payments 36. Assign No Ranges to Cust A/c Groups 27. Create No Ranges [Cust] 26..created Assigned Preset XKN1 . Define Posting Keys 32.ord acc dep 57100000 .acqui & prodn costs 21400000 . started saving on 10/08/04 TC – OKKP activated TC – OKW1 assigned TC – KL01.contra acqui 58190000 .. LABOUR & MACHINE [A/c/Co/CCA/MD/ActType/IndvProc/Create] Activity type MIN.loss on asset sale 45100000 .loss on ret w/o revenue 21500000 . Define A/c Groups [vendors] 28.clearing a/c asset sale [xxx] 58190000 . Maintain Std Hier for Co Area 22. A/c’s for bank charges 39. Define A/c Groups [Cust] 25.preset GL 44310000 GL 44310000 GL 58160000 13110000.acqui & prodn costs 21400000 . Actiivate ABC in Co Area 21.exp dep sales 20500000 . Create No Ranges [vendors] 29..exp dep admn A/C DETERMINATION NOT SAVED as on 07/08/04.contra acqui 58190000 .created Assigned OBA7 . Check doc types 31.ord acc dep 57200000 .preset OB41 .exp dep admn 20700000 . A/c’s for exch rate diffs 37. A/c’s for rounding diffs 38.loss on ret w/o revenue 21500000 . CCtr Cat F prodn Atyp Cat 1 Manual Entry.gain from asset sale 20710000 .clearing a/c asset sale [xxx] 58190000 . 32000 Hardware………………. Default values 33. Create Price Planning AR & AP 24.preset OBU1 . Define a/c’s for Cash Discount taken 34. Define a/c’s for lost cash disc 35. Posting Keys for Clearing 133 by Lawrence Rebello . manual alloc Price Indicator 1 Plan price auto based on activity Output unit MIN minutes TC – KP26 [A/c/Co/CCA/Pl/ActOutPrices/Change] Preset XDN1 . Assign No Ranges to Vend A/c Groups 30. 24430000 58242000 Trans BSP GL 56000000 Outgoing Payment ACTIVITIES [ FOR PP ] 20. Create Activity Type 23.loss on asset sale 45100000 .FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 31000 Vehicles………………. 57200000 . SETUP..

Setup Co Codes for Payment Transactions 43.999. HOUSE BANKS 41.00 inr E cash 9.00 inr Ranking order 1 for C cheque Bank A/c’s SBI 25420000 Available amounts 9.999.00 Value Date 9.999.999.999.00 3 days 42.999. Payment Methods per country 45. Bank determination for payment transactions 134 by Lawrence Rebello .999. Setup Paying Co Codes 44. Payment Methods per Co Code 46.999. Customers FPJ TTBP.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Customers 05/18 Vendors 25/38 GL 40/50 Incoming Payment Customers 08/15 Vendors 28/35 GL 40/50 Credit Memo Customers 02/11 Vendors 21/32 GL 40/50 Transfer Posting with Clearing Customers 07/17 Vendors 27/37 GL 40/50 40.999.999. Vendors FP. min amt for o/p 10. Define House Banks House Bank SBI Branch Churchgate Swift 123456 Bank Number 11111 Bank Key SBI A/c Id SBI Bank A/c No 11111 Alt A/c No 55555 GL 24520000 Discounts 30000000 TTBP Tolerance days 3.00 INR. 1 b/e per due dt IN INR preset.999.00 inr T bank tr 9. TTBP C cheque 9.

TC – FBMP create new proc & copy from 0001 After defining/copying the texts. 6. Define Time Based Terms Defined 60. Define Dunning Procedures 100001 . Def Ref Int Rates T1 & T2 defined 59. Def A/c Bal Int Calc T1 & T2 defined 58. 9.TPLA – TSA1 st loc for TPLA View Purch Orgn – TCPO. 2. Define No Ranges for Int forms Preset 57.TPLA . TCPS – TCPX by Lawrence Rebello 135 . Dunning TC – F150 after passing some entries in TELCO customer. DUNNING 49.TTBP View Plants .TPLX View Divisions . dunning params were saved and run. 8. Define Dunning Keys 51. 3. ] 53. 7. 52. 5. T2 for item and balance @ 10 % defined for TTBP. INTEREST Configured on [ 23/08/2004 ] 55. Define Int Calc Types T1. 56.TTCC Overview Co Areas . 4. Number ranges for cheques 48.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 47. Enter Interest Values 10% for T1 & T2 61.LD Lubricant Division View Storage Locations . the above error [48] disappears.100100 lot 101 TC – FCHI TTBP [dunning notices not yet defined ???] Preset.TTBP View Credit Control Areas .TTBP View Co Code Global Data . Interest Posting Recd 44020000 Paid 56000000 Checking Sample FI Configuration Sequence 1. SCC4 OX02 OBY6 OB45 OX06 OX10 OVXB OX09 OX08 Locked View Company Code . 54. Define Dunning Area 50. Define Interest Rates [ To be done after defining interest indicator.

View Divisions LD lubricant div Sales area to Credit Control Area . FSP3 136 View Sales Orgn – TTSO View Dist Chanels . LD. OX18 31. FSP1 57. Edit GL A/c COA data. ST Sales Area SO . OB01 25. OX19 23.CS. OVX4 45. by Lawrence Rebello . DSG Sales Offices to sales Groups 19 assigned Sorg .23 shipping points. Pack. View Sales Offices Sales Area – sales offices 19 assigned Sales Groups CSG. OVXC 50. OVX1 43. OVXM 44. OX08 35. OVX6 48.TATA Retained Earnings A/c 11610000 Edit GL A/c COA data.Co Code TTBP . OB13 17.19 sales offices View Sales Groups – Cust Sales Gr. OVXG 42.TTSO Sorg Dist Chan to Plant TTSO Dist Channel – Sorg TTSO . OB62 21. OB29 16. Addl defined Sales Orgn TTSO defined Sales org – Divi TTSO . OVXI 12.TTBP Co area . OB37 22. Edit GL A/c COA data.LD. OVX3 47.24 shipping points Create Shipping points – created 24 shipping points View Purch Orgn . OVX5 11.ST.CS. OBC4 54. OVXB 51. OX01 36.TTCC EC-PCA Controlling area settings NOT CONFIGURED View Plants Allocation Plants – Co Code 23 plants View Storage Locations View Shipping Points . Dist Channels CS.CS.TTCC View Cr Risk Mgmt Categories View Cr Mgmt Cr Representative Groups Repeated ??? Assign Co Code to CCA TTBP .1+6 PO defined. OX01 20.Basic Data View Credit Control Areas . OVX1 13.CAIN Controlling Area – Basic Data Controlling Area – General Controlling Purchasing Org Assigned to Co Code – Only CPO assigned Assign COA to Co Code CAIN . OVXI 41. OVXA 40. Ship Pts – Plant 23 assigned. OVXJ 46. FSP2 58. OAOA 53. Dist Sales Gr View Shipping Points . OVXK 49. OX06 18. OVX4 14.DS. OME4 38. EC07 34. OVX5 39. OKKP 19. OB45 24. OX09 32.DS.ST. OB45 27. OVXD 15. OBC5 55. OVXD 33. OVFL 52.preset Field Status Groups Assign Co Code to FSV TTBP . OB02 26.V3 12 + 4 COA .LD.DC – Div TTSO. OB53 56. DS.Purch Orgn 6 PO assigned Purchasing Groups – 4 groups RM. DS. Purchasing Org Assigned to Co Code – Only CPO assigned Plants . ST View Sales Offices . Fiscal Yr variants . OX17 37. Consu.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 10.TTCC SETUP ASSET CLASSES .TTBP Assign FYV to Co Code V3 . OB38 28. 0KE5 29. CS. OX10 30.TTSO.

KO01 102. OMS1 76. FBL3 66. OBA3 85. OMSG 83. FS03 62. KL03 96. KA01 88. KL01 94. Display Activity Type / Price Planning Activity Type Price Reports Create I/o [not in use] Change I/o [not in use] Display I/o [not in use] by Lawrence Rebello .Valuation Grouping Code NOT DEFINED NOT ASSIGNED A/c Cat Ref Val Classes MM view on Co Codes open for per 6/2004 Material Types . OKEO 86.5.created Change Cost Element Display Cost Element Delete Cost Element Display Change Documents Create Secondary Cost Element Create Activity Type Change Activity Type Display Activity Type Delete Activity Type Display Change Documents – Activity Type Change Activity Type / Price Planning.defined Tolerance Group TATA defined.preset Material Master No Ranges [very small intervals] Units of Measure Groups . FS05 64. FB03 67. OMSJ 84.CC group . KA02 89. KA04 91. Create Cost Element . OMWD 71. OVT0 79.3. OBD4 68.V-09 Customer Master . V-03 .6. KA05 92. OMSK 72.NO ENTRIES Material Groups. FK02. MMNR 75.preset Customer Groups .2.5.2. OMSF 77. FS01 60. KA03 90. FS02 61. KA06 93. OVZC 78. 0002 “ “ defined for TTBP XD01. OBB8 81. KO03 137 Edit GL a/c Centrally Edit GL a/c Centrally Edit GL a/c Centrally Central GL A/c Changes Edit GL a/c Centrally Edit GL a/c Centrally GL A/c Line Item Display Display Document GL A/c Groups Edit GL a/c Co Code Data Valuation Control A/c Deter for Valuation Areas . KO02 103. FS04 63.Industry & Retail Terms of Payment 0001.6 Vendor SAIL1 ????? Std Hierarchy . KP27 100.3.created. FSS1 69. FS06 65.defined & assigned. KL02 95. OMWM 70.preset Vendor No Ranges . KS01 87. OVS9 80. KP26 99.4. OBA4 82.3. KSBT 101.4 [RFDABL00 ??] Vendor A/c Groups . KL04 97. G01 – G05 Customer No Ranges – Defined.4. OMSY 73.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 59. OMS2 74. KL05 98. XK01. Create Cost Center .No Entries Customer A/c Groups .

108. SAP APO is a separate SAP solution with its own release cycle. 105. KO04 KOK3 KO12 KO13 KO22 FD24 FD32 FD33 Order Manager Collective Display for I/o Change Overall Planning Display Overall Planning Change Original Budget Credit Mgmt Changes [Cr Co Area] Cust Credit Mgmt Changes [Cr Co Area] Display Cust Credit Mgmt Changes [Cr Co Area] Advanced Planner & Optimiser [Supply Chain Planning & Optimization] Provides a complete suite of supply chain planner applications. based on SAP’s live cache technology which allows forecasting. planning & optimizing to be executed in realtime. 110. 107. 138 by Lawrence Rebello . 106. Each of SAP APO components like Demand Planning can be implemented as a standalone product or as an integrated part of the business framework. 111. 109.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 104.

status & tracking. approval & rejection. MYSAP. industry specific enterprise applications. invoicing & performance reporting functions. The supply chain cockpit provides users with a birds eye view of all activities & applications. with or without catalogs. and creates accurate dynamic demand forecasts. to the payment of the invoice. monitors & manages your supply chain with a specially designed GUI. Demand Planning :- Identifies & analyzes patterns & fluctuations in demand. Supply Network Planning :. and enable one-step bus transactions. SAP BIW [bus info warehouse] Enables analysis of data from operationsl R/3 applications or any other bus applications.COM is a comprehensive. e-business solutions environment. The bus objective of mYSap. Supply Chain Cockpit :- Models. production & transportation processes to demand. including external data sources such as databases.optimizes the use of resources & creates accurate plant by plant production schedules in order to shorten prodn life cycles and respond rapidly to changes in market demand. companies can streamline their requisition & indirect procurement processes. It 139 by Lawrence Rebello . full cycle. with visibility and control across the entire procurement chain. SAP b2b procurement includes the creation & maintenance of requisitions. comprising of portals. while providing the purchasing department.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Global ATP [available to promise] :– matches supply to demand on a truly world wide scale. Production Planning & Detailed Schedules : .com places the internet at the center of SAP’s activities. and gives customers reliable delivery commitments by means of both realtime checks & sophisticated simulation methods.matches purchasing. staff productive and decision makers informed.com are to empower people to create value. and balances & optimizes your entire supply network. and covers all processes from creation of a requisition. All end users are able to purchase goods and services straight from their desktops. distribution. sales and service processes. and lets you create links between the production. SAP LES [logistics execution system] :- Is part of SAP’s unique Supply Chain Management initiative. and cut the overall cost of procurement. Using this compelling b2b procurement solution. online services and the internet. It helps keep customers happy. SAP BIW supports OLAP and is particularly suited for processing large volumes of operational & historical data. desktop receiving and service entry support. procurement. It means real time data for decision making. SAP B2B Procurement Solution : - Enables open. internet applications and services. open. simulation and planning. purchase orders & reservations with or without catalogs. inter enterprise procurement. transportation. MYSAP. storage. as well as XML based technology – all of which combine to enable companies to participate in the Internet economy. leaving purchase departments free to focus on strategic purchasing operations.COM MYSAP.

The mission of the mySAP. Single sign on access to all services.com marketplace. MySAPcomponent .com places the internet at the center of SAP’s activities. The main components of mySAP. customer base.Ext systems using open internet standards. This business world includes market places. services and content provided by a company over the Intranet or other companies via the internet.com internet services . One Step Business : . Anyone who sells or buys can participate in the mySAP. industry solutions].personalized homepage for the registered user with favourites from the mySAP. Streamlined business process flow with one step business. reports [BIW reports with BW 2. Sap focus earlier was company created. Workplace is an application on a users desktop that co-operates with a web browser & provides a personalized. Key Benefits of a Workplace Access to all necessary internet & external services through one screen.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling leverages all of SAP’s key assets. It is not for just SAP applications or SAP customers.internet services are available for the user to which he can subscribe. role specific view on the entire business world. now it is market centered [via the internet] where mySAP.com marketplace is a public business portal hosted by SAP.com marketplace include : MyHome : . Communities : .com environment. applications. 140 by Lawrence Rebello . new dimensions.consists of links inside & outside a company’s boundaries. ERP made SAP R/3 a worldwide standard system. Processes. integration meant business process integration. In the new economy. it requires integration of processes between enterprises. customer base. Seamless integration in mySAP.com marketplace Any internet or intranet web sites. partner community and expertise in integrating business processes. MYSAP. Since 1996 SAP R/3 has been e-commerce capable. Key Benefits of the marketplace : Personalized home page available for registered users. Links can be made to Non mySAP components . partner community and expertise in integrating business processes. Services : . Protal is tailored to users role in the company. In the old economy. It leverages all of SAP’s key asets including its extensive product portfolio. Access to a broad scope of suppliers.portion of the site where users can browse merchant web sites and procure products and services. anywhere.com marketplace. Knowledge WH contents MYSAP. WorkPlace:. where many users participate and can be executed simultaneously as a one step business. SAP products incorporated business technology for the future allowing customers to be ready for the future without system change for the new economy. including its extensive product portfolio.classical & new web based R/3 transactions [R/3 standard system. Access via the Internet anytime. User friendly web browser interface.com is the collaborative environment providing personalized business solutions on demand. Marketplace portal is a place on the web where communities can exchange goods and services electronically.0a]. The mySAP.com web site. is to engineer business collaboration across enterprises via the internet.mySAP.content rich data organized along the vertical & horizontal industries supported by SAP. where the requirement is for collaboration more than working together.

Many of your reporting requirements can already be met by using the standard reports provided by various SAP application components. 141 by Lawrence Rebello . Miscellaneous : PLEASE DO NOT EXPERIMENT Report Painter Report Painter allows you to create reports using data from SAP application components. Direct access to value add internet services. If these SAP standard reports do not meet your reporting needs.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Reduce costs ofinteraction with external partners Content rich communities available for better decision making & to interact with other business professionals. which you can adapt to meet your individual requirements. Report Painter enables you to define your specific reports quickly and easily.

and choose Choose. Advantages of Report Painter include: • • • Flexible and simple report definition Report definition without using sets Direct layout control: The rows and columns are displayed in the report definition as they appear in the final report output. 2. You thus have access to the same functions as for Report Writer reports defined in the same way. A list of reports appears. The report selection screen appears. and can combine Report Painter and Report Writer reports together in a report group. which forms the basis for your report definition and displays the rows and columns as they appear in the final report output. The report search screen (ABAP Program Directory) appears: In the Program field. choose the possible entries icon and select an entry from the dropdown list box. making test runs unnecessary. When you define a Report Painter report you can use groups (sets). You can also enter characteristic values directly. * = multiple chars. however. see the SAP Library. When executing a Report Painter report. the program name will be in the box ] for Program. In the Program field. Or. Most of the functions found in Report Writer have been built into Report Painter. + = 1 char. and standard layouts) in your own specific reports. but is easier to use.) as explained below : Choose System → Services → Reporting.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling Report Painter fulfills a function similar to Report Writer. double-click the report name. see Finding the Name of a Report You Want to Execute. enter the report name. Report Painter uses a graphical report structure. Choose Execute. Or. enter any part of the report name that you know. row/column models. For comprehensive information on the Report Painter. as needed. [ using back till variant screen. 142 by Lawrence Rebello . Place the cursor on the report name. (If you do not know the name. you can use many of the standard reporting objects provided by SAP (such as libraries. choose System → Services → Reporting. To facilitate report definition. Choose Program → Execute. From the menu bar. you do not need to be familiar with all Report Writer concepts (such as Sets) in order to use Report Painter. Choose Utilities → Find Program. it is displayed by the system in Report Writer format. under Financial Accounting → Special Purpose Ledger → InfoSystem / Report Painter Reports Report Variants Creating Report Variants : 1. plus any wildcards ( * or + ).

complete with data. The ABAP Variants initial screen appears In the Variant field. You will notice that this is not just a technical representation but also reflects the way a company handles organizational management. 143 by Lawrence Rebello . The system displays the selection screen for the report. In the Program field. enter the report name. 3. The system displays the selection screen filled with data. 2. Enter values in the selection criteria input fields. • There are direct relationships between the different objects. From the menu bar. 3. WorkFlows : PLEASE DO NOT EXPERIMENT • Configuring a WorkFlow o Create a Simple Oraganisational Unit In this section you will create a simple organizational structure. 5. From the application toolbar. From the menu bar. 2. You can use any combination of characters to create the variant name except for special characters. The position is described by a job and a user is assigned to this position. To view the contents of the variant. choose the possible entries button. choose System → Services → Reporting. All the variants attached to the report appear. 5. choose Overview of variants. 4. place the cursor on a variant and choose Variants → Display values. To obtain a list of available variants. choose Goto → Variants. In the Program field. 5. and choose Create. 6. To use the variant. such as the percent sign (%) or dollar sign ($). The selection criteria screen for the report appears. highlight the variant and choose Execute with variant. enter the desired variant. From the menu bar.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling 3. 7. enter a name for this variant. To execute the report with the variant. 6. enter the report name. In the Variant field. 4. Choose With variant. 4. choose System → Services → Reporting. choose Execute. Select attributes [ top button ] enter description & save. For example: A position is assigned to an organizational unit. Using Report Variants : 1. Displaying Available Report Variants : 1. 7.

or any other organizational unit. Later. The vacancy can be filled at any time by the system administrator.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • The positions and the relationships also have validity dates. It also allows you to specify a termination date. TOP RIGHT 2 Detail frame. if there is an organizational reshuffle this termination date can be brought forward. if it is assigned to a workflow task no agents will be found outside this validity period. Later. MIDDLE RIGHT create as Org Unit BOOKDEPT & Desc as ORG UNIT FOR 144 by Lawrence Rebello . • The default is to start immediately and terminate in the year 9999 . The organizational unit is only valid for this duration. This tutorial shows you how to create an organizational unit from scratch. users.in other words forever. 1 Maintenance frame. • First Step in Creating the Organizational Plan • Specify Validity of the Main Organizational Unit • Description of the Main Screen • Create a Hierarchy of Organizational Units • Create an Organizational Sub-Unit • Create Positions • Create Positions (Part 2) • Describe the Position • Search for a User • Select a User • Assign the User to the Position • Determine the Validity • The Organizational Unit Is Complete First Step in Creating the Organizational Plan o SAP/Tools/BusWF/Dev/DefTools/OrgMgmt/OrgPlan/Create [ PPOCW ] • Specify Validity of the Main Organizational Unit All organizational objects have a validity period. This is easy and ensures that the reporting and auditing work consistently. This displays the detailed information about the organizational object selected in the maintenance frame. • Description of the Main Screen The maintenance screen is divided into four frames. For example: A position can be created in advance so that it is valid from the beginning of the next month. this makes it very easy for the workflow administrator to keep the organizational structure up-to-date. You can switch between different types of detailed information (views) using the tab strips. and to maintain the assignments and reorganizations in advance so that they automatically come into effect at midnight on the appropriate day. Tip: Never delete positions. Use the validity date to delimit the existence of the organizational object. As you can see.in this case the new organizational unit that you are creating. This allows you to set up an organizational object in advance. A user can be assigned to this position for the next sixth months leaving it vacant after this date. This frame displays the main object and its relationships .

e. • Create Positions (Part 2) & Describe the Position This time select position and dbl click Enter a description for the position e. Save the changes you have made so far. & JOB as BookReader. An object can either be dragged and dropped into the maintenance frame in a relationship (such as a user to be assigned to an organizational unit) or displayed in the maintenance frame by double-clicking on it.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling BOOK 3 Search criteria frame. Select orgn unit by double clicking on it. This frame is independent of the maintenance frame and the detail frame. An organizational object can be assigned: • Subsidiary organizational objects • Positions • Tasks (single step tasks used in a workflow) • Workflows (meaning that anyone assigned to the original organization has the authorization to start this workflow). • Create Positions Type in a description of the new orgn unit [ e. LEFT BOTTOM The blue arrow buttons ( ) are used to navigate back and forth between the views that you have displayed.e. It allows you to search for new objects which can be displayed or linked to other objects. Select one of the orgn units & create positions for it usingthe create button again. LEFT TOP 4 Search results frame. The frames can be resized by stretching their frame outline and the detail frame can be eliminated (or recovered) by clicking on its title bar. Double-clicking on the new unit will display it in the maintenance frame. which undoes changes made up to the last save. Southern Division ]. Normally you create a workflow from the Workflow Builder rather than this screen. For example. • The Organizational Unit Is Complete Now you have assigned a user to the position and you can continue this for other positions. • Determine the Validity Accept the default.g. Do not confuse this with the undo button ( ). Drag & drop the user chosen into the postion [ Reader1 ] in the frame on the right i. Do not forget to regularly save the data ( ).[ or assign a JOB using F4 ] • Search for a User Assign an existing user to the position. • Select a User & Assign the User to the Position Enter thesearch criteria & find users matching.g. while you are displaying the organizational unit you may search for another organizational unit to compare them. The results of the search based on the search criteria frame is displayed here. • Create a Hierarchy of Organizational Units Top Left NEW ORGN UNIT becomes ORGN UNIT FOR BOOK after Save of Right Middle i. Task Assignment Frame. by searching for a user. • Create an Organizational Sub-Unit The list of object types that can be created depends on the original object selected. and create an addl orgn unit. detail frame. Choosing the blue "back" arrow will return to view the original unit. 145 by Lawrence Rebello . Your organizational unit is now complete. Reader1.

All the events have been activated. whenever this occurs. Choose Edit / Refresh Index to refresh the buffers. IMG/BASISCOMPO/BUSMGMT/SAPBUSWF/ • Maintain Std Settings [ SWU3 ] o Automatic Customization o Test RFC Destination o Start Verification Workflow • Bus Workplace [ SO01 ] IMG/FA/ARAP/BusTrans/Release for Payment/ • Create Workflow Variant for Release for Payment • Assign Company Code Workflow Variant for Release for Payment • Define Release Approval Groups for Release for Payment • Define Release Approval Paths for Release for Payment • Assign Release Approval Paths for Release for Payment 146 by Lawrence Rebello .LOMD-BP-VM. Select one of the events & use activate icon. Repeat for other events.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling ASSIGN AGENTS Start the Customizing Transaction • Select Task-Specific Customizing for Workflow • Expand the Application Hierarchy • Select the Application • Task List • Make the Task a General Task • The Tasks Have Been Classified • • • • • ACTIVATE EVENTS Select Event Activation • Activate the Event • All Events Activated Select Event Activation: USE IMG/BasisCompo/BusMgmt/SAPBusWF/ Perform Task Specific Customizing GOTO Log Gen/Log Basic Data/Bus Partners/Vendor Master & assign agents to tasks FA LOMD-BP-VM. Your WF will now start automatically. this workflow will automatically start. The belowmentioned are not part of the above. Select the tasks shown in the chapter description. Select General task in the dialog box. GOTO Log Gen/Log Basic Data/Bus Partners/Vendor Master & activate event linking FA. Whenever a vendor is blocked. Since the tasks are general tasks. • • • • Return to the application hierarchy & select event activation to activate the event linkage for this WF. and make the task a general task using the ATTRIBUTE button. everyone in your system will receive the work items in their inbox.

calender etc & save o Tasklist appears in the tasklist o Change task list [top]  Right click on task list  Create task • Enter desc. right click & simulation of scheduling  Enter planned run date o Select task & execute IN BACKGROUND [TOP HEADER]  Enter output device [LP01]. These can be incorporated in a schedule manager as tasks & then executed. program/transaction.SCMA • Create a task list [top header/tasklist/create] o Enter name of task o Enter desc. title & enter  Click immediate & save  Background job is scheduled  System/Services/jJobOverview/execute [sm37]  Click jobname & view spool [xxx] o You can also create a RUN SCHEDULE from IMG/FA/GLOBAL/DOCUMENT/RECURRING ENTRIES/ DEFINE RUN SCHEDULES & ENTER RUN DATES.  Return to Scheduling [TOP]  Select Task. 147 by Lawrence Rebello . start time etc o Schedule a task for a particular date and time.FICONOTES : A guide to Configuring Financial Accounting and Controlling • • • Assign Release Approval Procedure for Release for Payment Define Relevant Document Types for Release for Payment Define Users with Authorization to Release Payment Schedule Manager .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful